Catalogue

2008
Low Voltage
Compact NS
Circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors
from 80 to 3200 A

Compact NS,
setting the standard, once again...
The launch of Merlin Gerin Compact NS in 1994
revolutionised the world of moulded-case circuit
breakers. Innovative, fexible and attractive,
Compact NS rapidly set the standard in its feld.
Today, Schneider Electric continues to innovate,
extending the Compact NS range to high power
ratings to offer a comprehensive and consistent
range from 80 to 3200 A.
Equipped with the new generation of Micrologic
control units, Compact NS630b to 1600 circuit
breakers now offer built-in power and energy
metering in addition to electrical measurement
and analysis functions.
The communications option makes it possible
to control power consumption, simplify
maintenance and improve operating comfort.
A wide range of optimised auxiliaries
and accessories is also available to meet
the needs of even more applications.
Compact NS, simply a step ahead
0
4
6
7
5
1
-
1
3
Compact NS80A.
P
B
1
0
1
0
4
5
-
1
5
Compact NS100 to 250 A.
P
B
1
0
1
0
4
4
-
1
9
Compact NS400 to 630 A.
D
B
1
1
2
5
2
9
Compact NS630 to 1600 A.
E
4
5
1
7
8
R
-
6
0
Compact NS1600 to 3200 A.

Compact NS
General contents
Introduction 3
Functions
and characteristics
A-1
Installation
recommendations
B-1
Dimensions
and connection
C-1
Wiring diagrams D-1
Additional characteristics E-1
Catalogue numbers
and order forms
F-1
1

2
Additional earth-leakage protection protects life and property against the risks
of faulty insulation in the installation. Depending on the circuit breaker,
earth-leakage protection is provided by:
adding a Vigi module to the circuit breaker
using a specifc Micrologic control unit
using a Vigirex relay and separate toroids.
b
b
b
Compact NS,
even more applications...
Protection for:
distribution systems supplied by transformers
distribution systems supplied by engine generator sets
long cables in IT and TN systems.
Installation :
in power switchboards
on DIN rails (see page A-36)
Special applications:
single-phase and two-phase systems (see page A-22)
1000 V distribution systems (see page A-28)
400 Hz distribution systems (see page A-26)
DC systems (see page A-32).
All circuit breakers in the Compact NS range offer positive contact indication
and are suitable for isolation in compliance with standards IEC 60947-1 and 2.
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
Protection of LV distribution systems page A-4
When combined with a motor starter, Compact NS circuit breakers protect the cables
and the starter against short-circuits. Equipped with an electronic trip unit, Compact
NS circuit breakers also protect the cables, starter and motor against overloads.
The exceptional current-limiting capacity of Compact NS circuit breakers
automatically ensures type-2 coordination with the motor starter, in compliance with
standard IEC 60947-4-1.
The different circuit-breaker versions in the Compact NS range are designed to meet
the specifc requirements of machines:
compliance with international standards IEC 60947-2 and UL 508 / CSA 22-2
No. 14
compliance with U.S. standard UL 489
protection against overloads and short-circuits
positive contact indication
installation in universal and functional enclosures.
b
b
b
b
b
E
2
0
9
9
9
Protection of motor feeders page A-42
Protection of machines page A-50
E
4
4
3
5
6
Earth-leakage protection page A-54
E
4
4
3
5
7
E
2
6
9
8
8

3
A switch-disconnector version of Compact NS circuit breakers exists for circuit
control and isolation.
All the additional functions may be combined with the basic switch-disconnector
function, including:
earth-leakage protection
motor mechanism
ammeter, etc.
For information on other switch-disconnector ranges, see the Interpact (offering
positive contact indication and visible break) and Fupact (fuse switch) catalogues.
b
b
b
To ensure a continuous supply of power, some electrical installations are connected
to two power sources:
a normal source
a replacement source on hand to supply the installation when the normal source is
not available.
A mechanical and/or electrical interlocking system between two Interpact, Compact
or Masterpact devices avoids all risk of parallel connection of the sources during
switching.
A source-changeover system can be:
manual with mechanical interlocking between the devices
remote operated when an electrical interlocking function in added
automatic when a controller is added to manage switching from one source to the
other on the basis of external parameters.
b
b
b
b
b
Compact NS circuit breakers also meet the requirements of applications governed
by standard UL 489 (see the corresponding catalogue).
Control and isolation page A-56
E
2
1
2
7
2
Source-changeover systems page A-66
(see also the " Source-changeover systems" catalogue)
E
3
2
4
5
4
N R
UL 489 applications

4
...a solution for all installation
congurations
The Compact NS range now covers all ratings from
80 to 3200 A:
b Compact NS80 to 1600 A, fxed, withdrawable,
front or rear connections, manual or electrical
operation.
Compact NS1600 to 3200 A, fxed, front connection,
manual operation.
Total discrimination
as standard
E
2
2
0
5
1
Discrimination between Compact NS circuit breakers
is total for all types of faults (overloads, high or low short-
circuits) and whatever the type of trip unit used with
the circuit breaker.
The rating plates on the front panel of each device indicate the
breaking capacity (N, SX, H or L).
Breaking capacity
Icu at 415 V
Compact NS100 to 630
D
B
1
0
1
8
3
8
NS100 NS160 NS250 NS400 NS630
N 50 kA
N 36 kA
H 70 kA
L 150 kA
SX 50 kA
Compact NS630b to 1600
Compact NS1600b to 3200
D
B
1
0
5
1
5
9
N: standard breaking
capacity.
D
B
1
0
5
1
6
4
SX: reinforced breaking
capacity.
D
B
1
0
5
1
6
5
H: high breaking
capacity.
D
B
1
0
5
1
6
6
L: very high breaking
capacity.
Breaking capacity
Icu at 415 V
D
B
1
0
7
6
6
3
NS630b NS800 NS1000 NS1250 NS1600
H 70 kA
N 50 kA
L 150 kA
LB 200 kA
Breaking capacity
Icu at 415 V
E
5
8
5
5
1
NS1600b NS2500
H 85 kA
N 70 kA
NS3200 NS2000

5



P
B
1
0
1
0
5
0
_
2
4
Manual Compact NS250
with thermal-magnetic
trip unit
0
4
7
3
1
3
Compact NS250 with motor
mechanism
0
4
1
6
3
2
Plug-in Compact NS250
on base
P
B
1
0
1
0
4
4
_
2
8
Compact NS400 with
electronic trip unit
0
4
1
8
7
9
Withdrawable Compact
NS250 on chassis
D
B
1
1
2
5
3
0
Manually operated Compact NS800
E
4
5
1
6
3
Electrically operated Compact NS800
E
4
5
1
7
8
R
-
6
3
Compact NS2000 (manually operated only)

6
Compact circuit breakers make it poss ble to
standardise switchboardsfor faster installation and
fewer errors.
All type L (150 kA) and LB (200 kA) Compact circuit
breakers are housed in the same case as the type N
and type H models with the same ratings.
Compact circuit breakers up to 1600 A can be easily
installed side-by-side in a minimum amount of
space.
...simplied installation
5 frame sizes from 80 to 3200 A
Many connection possibilities
Numerous connection poss bilities, including front and
rear connections for bare cables, cable lugs or bars, as
well as plug-in or withdrawable versions, are available
using accessories that can be rapidly added to the
circuit breaker.
Plug-in and withdrawable
versions
Plug-in and withdrawable versions for:
fast removal or insertion of the circuit breaker without
exposure to live parts
standby outgoing circuits ready for wiring and circuit
breaker installation at a later date
visible break possibility.
Busways
Compact NS circuit breakers up to 630 A can be
installed in tap-off units of the Telemecanique Canalis
range of busbar trunking.
b
b
b
0
4
6
7
5
1
80 A
P
B
1
0
1
0
4
3
_
1
5
100 to 250 A
P
B
1
0
1
0
4
4
_
1
6
400 to 630 A
D
B
1
1
2
5
3
0
630 to 1600 A
E
4
5
1
7
8
R
_
5
5
1600 to 3200 A
0
4
1
6
5
0
Connection parts
for Compact NS
0
4
2
7
8
8
E
3
2
4
5
5

7
Compact NS100 to 630
On Compact NS100 to NS250 circuit breakers, the thermal-magnetic and electronic
trip units are interchangeable and may be rapidly ftted to the circuit breakers. It is
therefore easy to change the protection of a given circuit following a modifcation in
an installation.
On Compact NS400 and NS630 circuit breakers, the electronic trip units are
interchangeable, plug-in modules. The STR53UE trip unit offers a large number
of protection settings:
standard:
specifc indication of the different types of faults (overloads, short-circuits, etc.)
optional:
built-in ammeter
earth-fault protection
communication: transmission of all information concerning circuit-breaker
operation to an electrical distr bution control, monitoring and automation system
(see page A-68).
Compact NS630b to 3200
Compact NS630b to 3200 circuit breakers are equipped with Micrologic control units
that are interchangeable on site.
Micrologic 2.0 and 2.0 A control units offer standard protection. Micrologic 5.0, 5.0 A
and 5.0 P control units offer selective protection that can be completed by earth-fault
protection on Micrologic 6.0 A/6.0 P and earth-leakage protection on Micrologic 7.0
A/7.0 P control units.
Micrologic A control units continuously display the current fowing (I1, I2, I3, Ig, In)
and can measure maximum currents (Imax) with an accuracy of 1.5 %.
Micrologic P control units calculate all electrical values (V, A, W, Var, VA, Wh, VARh,
VAh, Hz), power factors and cos values in real time.
b
b
b
b
...optimised protection
and accurate measurements
Each Compact NS circuit breaker provides different
types of protection, depending on the trip unit or
control unit selected.
Additional measurement and indication functions
are available:
b on Compact NS100 to 630, by adding an
electrical auxiliary to the circuit breaker
b on Compact NS630b to 3200, depending on the
Micrologic control unit selected.
2
P
B
1
0
1
0
5
0
_
3
3
Compact NS250
0
4
1
6
3
8
TM thermal-magnetic
trip unit
0
4
1
6
4
1
STR electronic trip unit
D
B
1
1
2
5
3
0
Compact NS800
0
5
6
4
7
9
Micrologic 2.0, 5.0
0
5
6
4
8
0
Micrologic 2.0 A,
5.0 A, 6.0 A, 7 0 A
0
5
6
4
7
8
5.0 P, 6.0 P,
7.0 P
0
4
8
2
8
7
Voltage presence indication
module
0
4
5
2
1
2
Ammeter module

8
2
1
7
8
12
15
16
14
10
11
2
3
6
4
9
13
5
...an optimised range
A complete system of add-on modules for
Compact NS:
Fewer catalogue numbers means immediate
availability of parts for all solutions.
Trip units, control units, auxiliaries and installation
and connection accessories are the same for a given
frame size and often for a number of frame sizes
(e.g. auxiliary contacts, MN and MX voltage
releases, etc.):
Compact NS80 to NSA160
Compact NS100 to NS250
Compact NS400 to NS630
Compact NS630b to 1600
Compact 1600b to 3200.
b
b
b
b
b
E
2
4
6
0
3
1 Breaking unit
2 Trip units or control units
3 Vigi earth-leakage protection module
4 Insulation monitoring module
5 Voltage presence indicator
6 Ammeter module
7 MN and MX voltage releases
8 Multifunction auxiliary contact
9 Direct rotary handle
10 Extended rotary handle
11 Motor mechanism
12 Plug-in base
13 Connection of auxiliary circuits to plug-in base or withdrawable chassis
14 Connection accessories
15 Short terminal shields
16 Long terminal shields

9
Schneider Electric fully takes into account environmental requirements, starting right
from the design stage of products through to the end of their service life:
the materials used for Compact NS are not dangerous for the environment
the production facilities are non-polluting in compliance with the ISO 14001
standard
fltered breaking for the high ratings eliminates pollution in the switchboard
the energy dissipated per pole is low, making energy losses insignifcant
the materials are marked to facilitate sorting for recycling at the end of product
service life.
b
b
b
b
b
Open communication
and protection
of the environment
...modern products
For integration in supervision systems, Compact NS circuit breakers can be
equipped with optional communication solutions.
For Compact NS100 to NS630, two solutions are available:
NS100 to NS630 circuit breakers equipped with any trip unit and:
a TCU measurement module associated with a Power Meter to handle
all measurements. In this case, an optional Power Meter input/output module can be
used to display the status of the different contacts and initiate remote
control functions
an Adventys OTB Modbus network interface module with integrated inputs/
outputs. This OTB module communicates the status of all auxiliary contacts
via the Modbus network
NS400 or NS630 circuit breakers associated with a Modbus DC150 interface and:
STR53UE or STR43ME electronic trip units with the communication option
communicating contacts
communicating motor mechanisms.
Compact NS630 to NS3200 can be equipped with Micrologic control units and
communication modules.
b
v
v
b
v
v
v
D
B
1
1
2
3
8
1
: wiring
: communication bus
: Modbus bus
: Ethernet

This international site allows you
to access all the Schneider Electric
products in just 2 clicks
via comprehensive range data-
sheets, with direct links to:
complete library: technical
documents, catalogs, FAQs,
brochures
selection guides from
the e-catalog.
product discovery sites and
their Flash animations.
You will also nd illustrated
overviews, news to which you
can subscribe, the list of country
contacts
p
p
p
These technical guides help you
comply with installation standards
and rules i.e.: the electrical
installation guide, the protection
guide, the switchboard
implementation guide,
the technical booklets
and the co-ordination tables all form
genuine reference tools
for the design of high performance
electrical installations.
For example, the LV protection
co-ordination guide - discrimination
and cascading - optimises choice
of protection and connection
devices while also increasing
markedly continuity of supply
in the installations.
schneider-electric.com The technical guide
TOOLS

A-1
Compact NS
Functions and characteristics
Contents
Presentation 2
Functions and characteristics A-1
Installation recommendations B-1
Dimensions and connection C-1
Electrical diagrams D-1
Additional characteristics E-1
Catalogue numbers and order forms F-1
General characteristics A-2
Protection of distribution systems A-4
Overview of solutions A-4
Compact NS circuit breakers up to 630 A A-6
Compact NS circuit breakers from 630 up to 3200 A A-8
TM and STR trip units for Compact NS100 to 250 A-10
STR trip units for Compact NS400 to 630 A-12
Micrologic control units for Compact NS630b to 3200 A-16
Micrologic P "power" for Compact NS630b to 1600 A-20
Micrologic A control units for Compact NS630b to 1600 (cont.) A-24
AC and DC single-phase and two-phase systems A-26
1000 V systems A-28
400 Hz applications A-30
DC systems A complete DC offer A-32
DC systems Selection guide for DC circuit breakers A-34
DC systems Circuit breaker characteristics A-36
DC systems Trip-unit characteristics A-38
Incoming circuit breakers in fnal distribution A-40
Motor protection A-42
Overview of solutions A-42
Compact NS80H-MA A-44
Compact NS100 to 630 circuit breakers with MA magnetic trip units A-45
Compact NS100 to 250 circuit breakers with STR22ME electronic trip unit A-46
Compact NS400 to 630 circuit breakers with STR43ME electronic trip unit A-48
Protection of industrial control panels A-50
Overview of solutions A-50
Circuit breaker NSC100N A-51
Trip units, auxiliaries, installation enclosures A-52
UL508 / CSA 22-2 no. 14 marking A-53
Earth-leakage protection A-54
Overview of solutions A-54
Add-on Vigi module (Vigicompact) for Compact NS100 to 630 A-55
Control and isolation A-56
Overview of solutions A-56
Control and disconnection A-58
Compact NSA125NA and NSA160NA switch-disconnectors A-58
Compact NSC100NA and NS100NA to 630NA switch-disconnectors A-60
Compact NS630bNA to NS1600NA switch-disconnectors A-62
Compact NS1600bNA to 3200NA switch-disconnectors A-64
Source-changeover systems A-66
Presentation A-66
Mechanical interlocking A-67
Electrical interlocking A-68
Standard confgurations A-69
Remote-operated systems A-70
Associated controllers A-71
Communication A-72
Compact NS100 to 630 A-72
Overview of functions A-73
Compact NS630b to 1600 COM option in Compact A-74
Overview of functions A-75
Compact NS1600b to 3200 COM option in Compact A-78
Overview of functions A-79
Compact and the MPS100 Micro Power Server A-80
Electrical and mechanical accessories A-82
Compact NS80H-MA A-82
Compact NSC100N, NSA160 A-83
Compact NS80H-MA, NSC100N and NSA160 A-84
Compact NS100 to 630 (fxed version) A-88
Compact NS100 to 630 (plug-in and withdrawable versions) A-89
Compact NS100 to 630 A-90
Compact NS630b to 1600 (fxed version) A-108
Compact NS630 to 1600 (withdrawable version) A-109
Compact NS1600b to 3200 (fxed version) A-127
Test equipment A-132
Display modules A-133

A-2
Compliance with standards
Compact NS circuit breakers and auxiliaries comply with the following:
international recommendations:
IEC 60947-1 - general rules
IEC 60947-2 - circuit breakers
IEC 60947-3 - switches, disconnectors, switch-disconnectors, etc.
IEC 60947-4 - contactors and motor starters
IEC 60947-5.1 and following - control circuit devices and switching elements;
automatic control components
European (EN 60947-1 and EN 60947-2) and the corresponding national
standards:
France NF
Germany VDE
U.K. BS
Australia AS
Italy CEI
the specifcations of the marine classifcation companies (Veritas, Lloyds Register
of Shipping, Det Norske Veritas, etc.)
French standard NF C 79-130 and the recommendations issued by the CNOMO
organisation for the protection of machine tools.
For U.S. UL, Canadian CSA, Mexican NOM and Japanese JIS standards, please
consult us.
Pollution degree
Compact NS circuit breakers are certifed for operation in pollution-degree 3
environments as defned by IEC standard 60947 (industrial environments).
Tropicalisation
Compact NS circuit breakers have successfully passed the tests prescribed by the
following standards for extreme atmospheric conditions:
IEC 60068-2-1 - dry cold (-55 C)
IEC 60068-2-2 - dry heat (+85 C)
IEC 60068-2-30 - damp heat (95 % relative humidity at 55 C)
IEC 60068-2-52 - salt mist (severity level 2).
Environmental protection
Compact NS circuit breakers take into account important concerns for environmental
protection. Most components are recyclable and the parts of Compact NS630b to
NS3200 circuit breakers are marked as specifed in applicable standards.
Ambient temperature
Compact NS circuit breakers may be used between -25 C and +70 C.
For temperatures higher than 40 C (65 C for circuit breakers used to protect motor
feeders), devices must be derated as indicated in the documentation.
circuit-breakers should be put into service under normal ambient operating-
temperature conditions. Exceptionally, the circuit breaker may be put into service
when the ambient temperature is between -35 C and -25 C.
the permiss ble storage-temperature range for Compact NS circuit breakers in the
original packing is -50 C
(1)
to +85 C.
Discrimination
As standard, the Compact NS range ensures discrimination between two circuit
breakers positioned in series in an installation.
b
v
v
v
v
v
b
v
v
v
v
v
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
General characteristics
(1) -40 C for Micrologic control units with an LCD screen.
Standardised characteristics indicated on the rating plate:
Ui: rated insulation voltage
Uimp: rated impulse withstand voltage
Icu: ultimate breaking capacity, for various values
of the rated operational voltage Ue
cat: utilisation category
Icw: rated short-time withstand current
Ics: service breaking capacity
In: rated current
suitable for isolation
D
B
1
0
5
1
6
7
E
2
2
0
3
7
CB2
CB1
Functions and characteristics

A-3
Positive contact indication
All Compact NS circuit breakers are suitable for isolation as defned in IEC standard
60947-2:
the isolation position corresponds to the O (OFF) position
the operating handle cannot indicate the OFF position unless the contacts are
effectively open
padlocks may not be installed unless the contacts are open.
Installation of a rotary handle or a motor mechanism does not alter the reliability
of the position-indication system.
The isolation function is certifed by tests guaranteeing:
the mechanical reliability of the position indication system
the absence of leakage currents
overvoltage withstand capacity between upstream and downstream connections.
Installation in class II switchboards
All Compact NS circuit breakers are class II front face devices. They may be installed
through the door of class II switchboards (as per IEC standard 60664), without
downgrading switchboard insulation. Installation requires no special operations,
even when the circuit breaker is equipped with a rotary handle or a motor
mechanism.
Degree of protection
As per standards IEC 60529 (IP degree of protection) and EN 50102
(IK degree of protection against external mechanical impacts).
b
b
b
b
b
b
Bare circuit breaker with terminal shields
With toggle IP40 IK07




ON
O
O F
With direct rotary handle IP40 IK07
standard / VDE
Circuit breaker installed in a switchboard
With toggle IP40 IK07




ON
F
With direct rotary handle
standard / VDE
MCC
CNOMO
IP40 IK07
IP435
IP547
N O
F
N O
F O
With extended rotary handle IP55 IK08




I
h O
O
1
m n u
With motor mechanism IP40 IK07


E
2
8
4
4
2
E
2
8
4
4
1
E
2
8
4
4
0
E
2
1
2
7
7
E
2
8
4
3
9
E
1
8
5
7
0
0
4
4
3
3
4
R
_
5
5
E
1
8
5
6
9

A-4
Protection of distribution
systems
Overview of solutions
Protection of distribution systems means protection of:
b systems supplied by a transformer
b systems supplied by an engine generator set
b long cables in IT and TN systems.
A special range of circuit breakers is available for
DC applications. The Compact NS DC range, from
16 A to 630 A, offers solutions for the many types of
DC installations. Features include:
1, 2, 3 and 4 pole versions up to 160 A and 3 and
4 pole versions from 250 A to 630 A
high breaking capacities for DC voltages from
12 to 750 V
compatibility with the many accessories of the
standard Compact NS range
accessories for isolation and series or parallel
connection of poles, designed for the special needs
of DC applications.
b
b
b
b
P
B
1
0
1
0
4
4
1
5
E
4
5
1
7
8
R
4
0
D
B
1
1
2
5
3
1

DC systems, see page A-32
E
5
8
5
6
3
E
4
3
8
4
2
G
E
2
0
9
9
9
E
4
3
8
4
3
+
Power distribution
Selection of circuit breakers up to 630 A page A-6
Rated current (A) 12.5... 12.5... 12.5... 12.5... 60 250
125 100 160 250 400 630
Compact NS125E NS100 NS160 NS250 NS400 NS630
Breaking capacity E 16
(kA rms) N 36 36 36 50 50
380/415 V SX 50 50 50
H 70 70 70 70 70
L 150 150 150 150 150
Accompanying trip units up to 630 A page A-8
Interchangeable thermal-magnetic and electronic trip units for NS100 to 630 and built-in
thermal-magnetic trip unit for Compact NS125E
Selection of circuit breakers from 630 to 3200 A page A-10
Rated current (A) 250 320 400 500 640
630 800 1000 1250 1600
Compact NS630b NS800 NS1000 NS1250 NS1600
Breaking capacity N 50 50 50 50 50
(kA rms) H 70 70 70 70 70
380/415 V L 150 150 150 - -
LB 200 200 - - -
Rated current (A)
640 800 ... 1000 1250
1600 2000 2500 3200
Compact NS1600b NS2000 NS2500 NS3200
Breaking capacity N 70 70 70
(kA rms) H 85 85 85
380/415 V
Accompanying control units up to 3200 A page A-16
Micrologic electronic control units may be used on all Compact NS630b to NS3200 circuit
breakers and can be changed on site.
P
B
1
0
1
0
4
3
_
1
2
Functions and characteristics

A-5
E
2
1
0
0
0
0
4
8
0
1
6
Power distribution (cont.)
Single-phase or two-phase distribution page A-26
Rated current (A) 16 100 125 160 160 250
Compact NS100 1P/2P NS160 1P/2P NS250 1P
Built-in thermal-magnetic
trip units
Breaking capacity 1P 2P 1P 2P 1P
(kA rms) 220 V N 25 85 25 85 25
H 40 100 40 100 -
1000 V distribution page A-28
Rated current (A) 60 400
Compact NS400 1000V
Breaking capacity:
10 kA rms at 1000 V
STR23SP electronic trip unit
specially designed for
1000 V applications
Incoming circuit breakers in fnal distribution page A-40
Rated current (A) 16 160
Compact installation on NSA160
a DIN rail Breaking capacity
(kA rms) 380/415 V:
E: 16 kA
N: 36 kA
Built-in trip unit
0
5
3
1
8
2
P
B
1
0
1
0
4
7
_
0
9
P
B
1
0
1
0
4
8
_
1
3

A-6
Protection of distribution
systems
Compact NS circuit breakers
up to 630 A
P
B
1
0
1
0
5
0
_
3
3
Compact NS250H
P
B
1
0
1
0
4
4
_
4
2
Compact NS630N
(1) 2P in 3P case for type N only
(2) specifc trip units are available for operational
voltages > 525 V
(3) NS100N et U u 500 V: Ics = 50 % Icu
(4) operational voltage y 500 V
Compact circuit breakers
Number of poles 2 2 2
Control manual toggle
direct or extended rotary handle
electric
Connections fxed front connec ion
rear connection
plug-in (on base) front connec ion
rear connection
withdrawable (on chassis) front connec ion
rear connection
Electrical characteristics as per IEC 60947-2 and EN 60947-2
Rated current (A) In 40 C 12 1 1 2
65 C 1 1 22 2
Rated insulation voltage (V) Ui
Rated impulse withstand voltage (kV) Uimp
Rated operational voltage (V) Ue AC 50/60 Hz
DC
Type of circuit breaker
Ultimate breaking capacity (kA rms) lcu AC 220/240 V 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
50/60 Hz 380/415 V 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
440 V 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1
500 V 2 1 1
525 V 22 1 22 22 22 1 22
660/690 V 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 2 1 2

Service breaking capacity (kA rms) lcs % Icu 1 1 1 1 1
Suitability for isolation
Utilisation category
Durability (C-O cycles) mechanical 1 2 1 1
electrical 440 V In/2 2 12
In 2 1
Electrical characteristics as per NEMA AB1 (H.I.C.)
Breaking capacity (kA) 240 V 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
480 V 1 1 1 2 1 2 1
600 V 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Electrical characteristics as per UL508
Breaking capacity (kA) 240 V
480 V 2
600 V 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Protection
Trip units 22 2
Overload protection long ime Ir (In x ) 12 12
Short-circuit protection short time lsd (Ir x )
instantaneous Ii (In x )
Ear h-fault protection lg (In x )
Zone selective interlocking ZSI
Add-on earth-leakage protection add-on Vigi module
combination with Vigirex relay
Current measurements
Additional measurement, indication and control auxiliaries
Indication contacts
MX shunt and MN undervoltage releases
Voltage-presence indicator
Current-transformer module and ammeter module
Insulation-monitoring module
Remote communication by bus
Device-status indication
Device remote operation
Transmission of settings
Indication and identifcation of protection devices and alarms
Transmission of measured current values
Installation
Accessories terminal extensions and spreaders
terminal shields and interphase barriers
escutcheons
Dimensions (mm) W x H x D fxed, front connections 2-3P / 4P 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 11 1 2 11
Weight (kg) fxed, front connections 3P / 4P 2 2 2 2 2 2 1
Source changeover system (see section on source changeover systems)
Manual, remote-operated and automatic source changeover systems
Functions and characteristics

A-7
NS125E NS100 NS160 NS250 NS400 NS630
3, 4 2
(1)
, 3, 4 2
(1)
, 3, 4 2
(1)
, 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4
b b b b b b
- b b b b b
- b b b b b
b b b b b b
b b b b b b
- b b b b b
- b b b b b
- b b b b b
- b b b b b

125 100 160 250 400 630
- 100 150 220 320 500
750 750 750 750 750 750
8 8 8 8 8 8
500 690 690 690 690 690
- 750 750 750 750 750
E N SX H L N SX H L N SX H L N H L N H L
22 2 25 85 90 100 150 85 90 100 150 85 90 100 150 85 100 150 85 100 150
1 16/10 36 50 70 150 36 50 70 150 36 50 70 150 50 70 150 50 70 150
10 35 50 65 130 35 50 65 130 35 50 65 130 42 65 130 42 65 130
6 25 36 50 100 30 36 50 70 30 36 50 70 30 50 100 30 50 70
2 - 22 35 35 100 22 35 35 50 22 35 35 50 22 35 100 22 35 50
- 8 10 10 75 8 10 10 20 8 10 10 20 10
(2)
20
(2)
75
(2)
10
(2)
20
(2)
35
(2)
50 % 100 %
(3)
100 % 100 % 100 % 100 %
(4)
b b b b b b
A A A A A A
10000 50000 40000 20000 15000 15000
2 6000 50000 40000 20000 12000 8000
6000 30000 20000 10000 6000 4000
E N SX H L N SX H L N SX H L N H L N H L
2 5 85 90 100 200 85 90 100 200 85 90 100 200 85 100 200 85 100 200
5 35 50 65 130 35 50 65 130 35 50 65 130 42 65 130 42 65 130
- 8 20 35 50 20 20 35 50 20 20 35 50 20 35 50 20 35 50
E N SX H L N SX H L N SX H L N H L N H L
2 - 85 85 85 - 85 85 85 - 85 85 85 - - - - - - -
- 25 50 65 - 35 50 65 - 35 50 65 - - - - - - -
- 10 10 10 - 10 10 10 - 18 18 18 - - - - - - -
non interchangeable TM (thermal-magnetic) STR22 (electronic) STR23 (electronic) STR53 (electronic)
12.5 125 (A) b b b b
- - b b b
- b b b b
- - - - b
- - - - b
b b b b b
b b b b b
- - - - b

b b b
b b b
- b b
- b b
- b b

- b b b b
- b b b b
- - - - b
- - - - b
- - - - b
b b b
b b b
b b b
2 105 x 161 x 86 / 140 x 161 x 86 140 x 255 x 110 / 185 x 255 x 110
2.0 to 2.2 / 2.6 to 2.8 6.2 to 8.1

- b b

A-8
Protection of distribution
systems
Compact NS circuit breakers
from 630 up to 3200 A
D
B
1
1
2
5
3
0
Compact NS800L
E
4
5
1
7
8
R
_
6
8
Compact NS2000H
(1)

65 C with vertical connections. See the temperature derating
tables for other types of connections.
(2) Ics: 100 % Icu for breaking capacity 440V/500V/660V
Ics: 75 % Icu for breaking capacity 220V/380V.
(3) Except 1600b-3200.
Compact circuit breakers
Number of poles
Control manual toggle
direct or extended rotary handle
electric
Type of circuit breaker
Connections fxed front connection
rear connection
front connection with bare cables
wi hdrawable (on chassis) front connection
rear connection
Electrical characteristics as per IEC 60947-2 and EN 60947-2
Rated current (A) In 50 C 1 12 1 1 2 2 2
65 C
(1)
1 12 1 1 1 1 2 2
Rated insulation voltage (V) Ui
Rated impulse withstand voltage (kV) Uimp
Rated operational voltage (V) Ue AC 50/60 Hz
Type of circuit breaker
Ultimate breaking capacity (kA rms) lcu AC 220/240 V 1 2 1 12
50/60 Hz 380/415 V 1 2 1
440 V 1 2 1
500/525 V 1 1 1
660/690 V 2 2 2 2
Service breaking capacity (kA rms) lcs Value or % Icu manual operation 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
electrical operation 1 1 1
Short-time withstand current (kA rms) lcw AC 50/60 Hz 1 s 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
3 s 2 2
Integrated instantaneous protection kA peak 10 % 1 1
Suitability for isolation
Utilisation category
Durability (C-O cycles) mechanical 1 1 1 1
electrical 440 V In/2
In 2 2
690 V In/2 2 2
In 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1
Pollution degree
Electrical characteristics as per Nema AB1
Breaking capacity at 60 Hz (kA) 240 V 12 2 12 12
480 V 1 2 1
600 V 2 1 2 2 2
Protection and measurements
Interchangeable control units



Overload protection long time Ir (In x )
Short-circuit protection short time Isd (Ir x )
instantaneous Ii (In x )
Ear h-fault protection lg (In x )
Residual ear h-leakage protection In
Zone selective interlocking ZSI
Protection of the fourth pole
Current measurements
Power measurements
Advanced protection
Remote communication by bus
Device-status indication
Device remote operation
Transmission of settings
Indication and identifcation of protection devices and alarms
Transmission of measured current values
Additional indication and control auxiliaries
Indication contacts
Voltage releases MX shunt release/MN undervoltage release
Installation
Accessories terminal extensions and spreaders
terminal shields and interphase barriers
escutcheons
Dimensions fxed devices, front connections (mm) 3P 2 21 1 2 1
H x W x D 4P 2 2 1 1
Weight fxed devices, front connections (kg) 3P 1 2
4P 1
Source changeover system (see section on " source changeover systems" )
Manual, remote-operated and automatic source changeover
systems
Functions and characteristics

A-9
NS630b NS800 NS1000 NS1250 NS1600 NS1600b NS2000 NS2500 NS3200
3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4
b b b b b
b b b b -
b (except LB) b b b -
N H L LB N H L N H N H N H
b b b - b b b b b b b b b
b b b b b b b b b b b - -
b b - - b b - b b - - - -
b b b b b b b b b b b - -
b b b b b b b b b b b - -

630 800 1000 1250 1600 1600 2000 2500 3200
630 800 1000 1250 1510 1550 1900 2500 2970
800 800 800 800 800
8 8 8 8 8
690 690 690 690 690
N H L LB N H L N H N H N H
22 2 50 70 150 200 50 70 150 50 70 50 70 85 125
1 50 70 150 200 50 70 150 50 70 50 70 70 85
50 65 130 200 50 65 130 50 65 50 65 65 85
2 40 50 100 100 40 50 100 40 50 40 50 65 -
30 42 - 75 30 42 - 30 42 30 42 65 -
100 % 75 % 100 % 100 % 100 % 75 % 100 % 100 % 75 % 75 % 50 % 100 %
(2)
75 %
75 % 50 % 100 % - 75 % 50 % 100 % 75 % 50 % 75 % 50 % 100 %
(2)
75 %
1 19.2 19.2 - - 19 2 19.2 - 19.2 19.2 19.2 19 2 - -
- - - - - - - - - - - 32 32
1 40 40 - - 40 40 - 40 40 40 40 130 130
b b b b b
B B A A B B A B B B B B B
10000 10000 10000 10000 5000
2 6000 6000 4000 4000 6000 6000 4000 5000 5000 3000
5000 5000 3000 3000 5000 5000 3000 4000 2000 2000
2 4000 4000 3000 3000 4000 4000 3000 3000 2000 2000
2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 1000 1000
3 3 3 3 3
N H L LB N H L N H N H N H
2 50 65 125 200 50 65 125 50 65 50 65 85 125
35 50 100 200 35 50 100 35 50 35 50 65 85
25 50 - 100 25 50 - 25 50 25 50 50 -

Micrologic 2.0 Micrologic 5.0 Micrologic 2.0 A Micrologic 5.0 A Micrologic 6.0 A Micrologic 7.0 A Micrologic 5.0 P
(3)
Micrologic 6.0 P
(3)
Micrologic 7.0 P
(3)
b b b b b b b b b
- b - b b b b b b
b b b b b b b b b
- - - - b - - b -
- - - - - b b b b
- - b b b b b b b
b b b b b b b b b
- - b b b b b b b
- - - b b b b b b
- - - b b b b b b

b b b b b b b b b
b b b b - - b b b
- - b b b b b b b
- - b b b b - - -
- - b b b b b b b

b b
b b
b -
b b
b b
327 x 210 x 147 350 x 420 x 160
327 x 280 x 147 350 x 535 x 160
14 24
18 36



b -

A-10
TM thermal-magnetic trip units
Protection
The protection functions may be set using the adjustment dials.
Overload protection
Thermal protection with an adjustable threshold.
Short-circuit protection
Magnetic protection with a fxed or adjustable pick-up, depending on the rating.
Protection of the fourth pole
On four-pole circuit breakers, the trip units can be of the:
4P 3d type (neutral unprotected),
4P 3d +N/2 type (neutral protection at 0.5 In) or 4P 4d type (neutral protection at In).
Compact NS100 to 250 circuit breakers, types N, SX, H
and L, may be equipped with either a TM thermal-
magnetic trip unit or an STR22 electronic trip unit.
A mechanical mismatch-protection system avoids
breaker and trip unit mismatches.
D
B
1
0
5
1
1
5
Im Ir
x 250A x 250A
1 .8
.9
9
8 7
6
10 5
Im Ir
TM 250 D
250A / 40C
Protection of distribution
systems
TM and STR trip units
for Compact NS100 to 250
D
B
1
0
5
1
1
4
13 16 25 40 63 80 100 125 200 250
TM-G
160
TM-D
STR22SE
STR22GE
STR22SE OSN
Standard protection
Protection of systems supplied by generators.
Protection of long cables
Protection of systems
with an overloaded
neutral
E
5
8
5
6
4
I
t
0 Ir Im
2
1
1 overload protection threshold
2 short-circuit protection pick-up
TM thermal-magnetic trip units TM16D to 250D TM16G to 63G
Ratings (A) In at 40 C 16 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 250 16 25 40 63
Circuit breaker Compact NS125 E b b b b b b b b b - - - b b b b
Compact NS100 b b b b b b b b - - - - b b b b
Compact NS160 b b b b b b b b b b - - b b b b
Compact NS250 b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b
Overload protection (thermal)
Current setting (A) Ir adjustable from 0.8 to 1 x In adjustable from 0.8 to 1 x In
Short-circuit protection (magnetic)
Current setting (A) Im fxed adjustable fxed
Compact NS100 190 300 400 500 500 500 640 800 63 80 80 125
Compact NS160/250 190 300 400 500 500 500 1000 1250 1250 1250 5 to 10 x ln 63 80 80 125
Protection of the fourth pole
Neutral unprotected 4P 3d no protection no protection
Neutral protection at 0.5 In 4P 3d +N/2 56 56 63 0.5 x Ir
Neutral protection at In 4P 4d 1 x Ir 1 x Ir
Functions and characteristics

A-11
STR22 electronic trip units
Protection
The protection functions may be set using the adjustment dials.
Overload protection
True rms long-time protection with an adjustable threshold.
Short-circuit protection
Short-time and instantaneous protection:
short-time protection with an adjustable pick-up and fxed tripping delay
instantaneous protection with fxed pick-up.
Protection of the fourth pole
On four-pole circuit breakers, neutral protection is set using a three-position switch to
4P 3d (neutral unprotected), 4P 3d +N/2 (neutral protection at 0.5 In) or 4P 4d
(neutral protection at In).
Protection of an overloaded neutral (OSN):
For 4-pole circuit breakers, special protection of systems with high 3rd order
harmonic contents. In position 4P 4d, the switch sets the neutral protection threshold
to 1.6 x Ir.
Indications
A LED on the front indicates the percent load:
ON - load is >90 % of Ir setting
fashing - load is > 105 % of Ir setting.
Test
A mini test kit or a portable test kit may be connected to the test connector on the
front to check circuit-breaker operation after installing the trip unit or accessories.
b
b
b
b
1 long-time threshold (overload protection) Ir
2 long-time tripping delay
3 short-time pick-up (short-circuit protection) Isd
4 short-time tripping delay
5 instantaneous pick-up (short-circuit protection) Ii
6 test connector
7 percent load indication
D
B
1
0
3
7
5
0
D
B
1
0
3
7
4
9
E
5
8
7
1
1
4P 4d
Protection of the fourth pole
E
2
5
9
7
9
x In
Ir
x Io
.8
.85
.9
.95
1
.88
.93
.98
Io
.5
.63
.7
.9
1
.8
TR electronic trip units STR22SE STR22SE OSN STR22GE
Ratings (A) In 20 to 70 C
(1)
40 80 100 160 250
(1)
160 250
(1)
40 100 160 250
(1)
Circuit breaker Compact NS100 b - b - - - - b b - -
Compact NS160 b b b b - b - b b b -
Compact NS250 b b b b b b b b b b b
Overload protection (Long Time)
Current setting Ir =In x 0.4...1 0.250.63 0.4...1
48 settings 48 settings 48 settings
Time delay (s) at 1.5 x Ir 90...180 90...180 1215
(min.max.) at 6 x Ir 5...7.5 5...7.5 -
at 7.2 x Ir 3.2...5.0 3.2...5.0 -
Short-circuit protection (Short Time)
Pick-up (A) Isd =Ir x 2...10 2...10 2...10
Accuracy 15 % 8 settings 8 settings 8 settings
Time delay (ms) fxed fxed fxed
max. resettable time y 40 y 40 y 40
max. break time y 60 y 60 y 60
Short-circuit protection (Instantaneous)
Pick-up (A) Ii fxed u 11 x In fxed u 7 x In fxed u 11 x In
Protection of the fourth pole
Neutral unprotected 4P 3d no protection no protection -
Neutral protection at 0.5 In 4P 3d +N/2 0.5 x Ir 0.8 x Ir -
Neutral protection at In 4P 4d 1 x Ir 1.6 x Ir -
(1) If the STR22SE, STR22SE OSN and STR22GE 250 A trip units are used in high-temperature environments, the setting must take into account the thermal
limitations of the circuit breaker. The overload protection setting may not exceed 0.95 at 60 C or 0.9 at 70 C.
Setting example
What is the overload-protection threshold
of a Compact NS250 circuit breaker equipped with
an STR22SE 160 A trip unit set to Io =0.5 and Ir =0.8 ?
Answer:
In x Io x Ir =160 x 0.5 x 0.8 =64 A.

A-12
D
B
1
0
5
1
1
6
60 250 400 500 600 40
STR23SE 0SN
STR23SE / STR53UE
STR23SE / STR53UE
STR23SV / STR53SV
Protection of systems with an
overloaded neutral
Standard protection with selectivity
Protection of systems supplied
by generators.
Protection of long cables
Protection of systems U >525 V
Protection of distribution
systems
STR trip units
for Compact NS400 to 630
Compact NS400 to 630 circuit breakers, types N, H
and L, 3-pole and 4-pole, may be equipped with any of
the STR23SE, STR23SV, STR53UE and STR53SV
electronic trip units.
The STR53UE and STR53SV trip units offer a wider
range of settings and the STR53UE offers a number of
optional protection, measurement and communications
functions.
Selection of the trip unit depends on the type of distribution system protected and the
operational voltage of the circuit breaker.
Protection for all types of circuits, from 60 to 630 A, is possible with only fve trip-unit
catalogue numbers, whatever the circuit-breaker operational voltage:
U y 525 V: STR23SE, STR23SE OSN or STR53UE
U >525 V: STR23SV or STR53SV.
Trip units do not have a predefned rating. The tripping threshold depends on the
circuit breaker rating and the LT (long time) current setting.
For example, for an STR23SE trip unit set to the maximum value, the tripping
threshold is:
250 A, when installed on a Compact NS400 250 A
630 A, when installed on a Compact NS630.
STR23SE (U y 525 V) and STR23SV (U >525 V)
electronic trip units
Protection
The protection functions may be set using the adjustment dials.
Overload protection
Long-time protection with an adjustable threshold and fxed tripping delay:
Io base setting (6-position dial from 0.5 to 1)
Ir fne adjustment (8-position dial from 0.8 to 1).
Short-circuit protection
Short-time and instantaneous protection:
short-time protection with an adjustable pick-up and fxed tripping delay
instantaneous protection with fxed pick-up.
Protection of the fourth pole
On four-pole circuit breakers, neutral protection is set using a three-position switch to
4P 3d (neutral unprotected), 4P 3d +N/2 (neutral protection at 0.5 In) or 4P 4d
(neutral protection at In).
Protection of an overloaded neutral (OSN):
For 4-pole circuit breakers, special protection of systems with high 3rd order
harmonic contents. In position 4P 4d, the switch sets the neutral protection threshold
to 1.6 x Ir.
Indications
A LED on the front indicates the percent load:
ON - load is >90 % of Ir setting
fashing - load is > 105 % of Ir setting.
Test
A mini test kit or a portable test kit may be connected to the test connector on the
front to check circuit-breaker operation after installing the trip unit or accessories.
b
b
v
v
b
b
b
b
b
b
1 long-time threshold (overload protection) Ir
2 long-time tripping delay
3 short-time pick-up (short-circuit protection) Isd
4 short-time tripping delay
5 instantaneous pick-up (short-circuit protection) Ii
6 test connector
7 percent load indication
E
2
4
0
9
4
Isd Ir
STR 23 SE
Ir
x Io
Io
-
test
+
90
105
%Ir alarm
x In
6 1 3 7
.5
.63
.7
.9
1
.8
.85
.9
.95
1
.88
.93
.98
8
2
3
4
5 6
7
8
10
Isd
x Ir
D
B
1
0
3
7
5
1
t
Isd I 0 Ir li
1
2
3
4
5
Functions and characteristics

A-13
STR53UE (U y 525 V) and STR53SV (U >525 V)
electronic trip units
Protection
The protection functions may be set using the adjustment dials.
Overload protection
Long-time protection with adjustable threshold and tripping delay:
Io base setting (6-position dial from 0.5 to 1)
Ir fne adjustment (8-position dial from 0.8 to 1).
Short-circuit protection
Short-time and instantaneous protection:
short-time protection with adjustable pick-up and tripping delay,
with or without constant It
instantaneous protection with adjustable pick-up.
Protection of the fourth pole
On four-pole circuit breakers, neutral protection is set using a three-position switch to
4P 3d (neutral unprotected), 4P 3d +N/2 (neutral protection at 0.5 In) or 4P 4d
(neutral protection at In).
Overload LED (%Ir)
A LED on the front indicates the percent load:
when ON, the load is >90 % of Ir setting
when fashing, the load is > 105 % of Ir setting.
Fault indications
A LED signals the type of fault:
overload (long-time protection) or abnormal internal temperature (>Ir)
short-circuit (short-time protection) or instantaneous (>Isd)
earth fault (if earth-fault protection option installed) (>Ig)
microprocessor malfunction:
both (>Ig) and (>Isd) LEDs ON
(>Ig) LED ON (if earth-fault protection option (T) installed).
Battery powered. Spare batteries are supplied in an adapter box. The LED indicating
the type of fault goes OFF after approximately ten minutes to conserve battery
power. The information is however stored in memory and the LED can be turned
back ON by pressing the battery/LED test pushbutton. The LED automatically goes
OFF and the memory is cleared when the circuit breaker is reset.
Test
A mini test kit or a portable test kit may be connected to the test connector on the
front to check circuit-breaker operation after installing the trip unit or accessories.
The test pushbutton tests the battery and the (%Ir), (>Ir), (>Isd) and (>Ig) LEDs.
Self monitoring
The circuit breaker trips if a microprocessor fault or an abnormal temperature
is detected.
Options
Four options are available:
earth-fault protection T
ammeter I
zone selective interlocking ZSI
communications option COM.
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
v
v
b
b
b
b
1 long-time threshold (overload protection)
2 long-time tripping delay
3 short-time pick-up (short-circuit protection)
4 short-time tripping delay
5 instantaneous pick-up (short-circuit protection)
6 optional earth-fault pick-up
7 optional earth-fault tripping delay
8 test connector
9 battery and lamp test pushbutton
(1)

Earth-fault protection (T) (see the " Options for
the STR53UE electronic trip unit" section on the
following pages).
With the earth-fault option (T) on the STR53UE
electronic trip unit, an external neutral sensor can be
installed (situation for a three-pole circuit breaker in
a distribution system with a neutral). Available
ratings of external neutral sensors:
150, 250, 400, 630 A.
E
2
1
0
0
4
t
0 Ir Isd Ii
5
4
3
2
1
6
7
I
D
B
1
0
0
6
3
0

A-14
Protection of distribution
systems
STR trip units
for Compact NS400 to 630 (cont.)
Setting example
What is the overload-protection threshold of a Compact
NS400 circuit breaker equipped with
an STR23SE (or STR23SV) trip unit set
to Io =0.5 and Ir =0.8 ?
Answer.
In x Io x Ir =400 x 0.5 x 0.8 =160 A.
The identical trip unit, with identical settings but
installed on a Compact NS630 circuit breaker, will have
an overload-protection threshold of:
630 x 0.5 x 0.8 =250 A.
E
2
5
9
7
9
x In
Ir
x Io
.8
.85
.9
.95
1
.88
.93
.98
Io
.5
.63
.7
.9
1
.8
Trip units U y 525V STR23SE STR23SE OSN STR53UE
U > 525V STR23SV - STR53SV
Ratings (A) of circuit breaker In 20 to 70 C
(1)
150 250 400 630 150 250 400 630
Circuit breaker Compact NS400 N/H/L b b b - b b b -
Compact NS630 N/H/L - - - b - - - b
Overload protection (Long time)
Current setting Ir =In x 0.4...1 0.250.63
adj., 48 set ings adjustable, 48 settings adjustable, 48 settings
Time delay (s) fxed fxed adjustable
(min.max.) at 1.5 x Ir 90...180 90...180 8...15 34...50 69...100 138...200 277...400
at 6 x Ir 5...7.5 5...7 5 0.4...0.5 1.5...2 3...4 6...8 12...16
at 7.2 Ir 3.2...5 0 3.2.. 5.0 0.2...0.74 1...1.4 2...2.8 4...5.5 8.2...11
Short-circuit protection (Short time)
Pick-up (A) Isd =Ir x 2...10 2...10 1.5...10
accuracy 15 % adj, 8 settings adjustable, 8 settings adjustable, 8 settings
Time delay (ms) fxed fxed adjustable, 4 settings + "constant I
2
t" option
max. resettable time y 40 y 40 y 15 y 60 y 140 y 230
max. break time y 60 y 60 y 60 y 140 y 230 y 350
Short-circuit protection (instantaneous)
Pick-up (A) Ii =In x 11 7 1.5...11
fxed fxed adjustable, 8 settings
Protection of the fourth pole
Neutral unprotected 4P 3d no protection no protection no protection
Neutral protection at 0.5 In 4P 3d +N/2 0.5 x Ir 0.8 x Ir 0.5 x Ir
Neutral protection at In 4P 4d 1 x Ir 1.6 x Ir 1 x Ir
Options
Indication of fault type - - b

(standard)
Zone selective interlocking ZSI - - b
(2)
Communications COM - - b
(2)
Built-in ammeter I - - b
(2)
Earth-fault protection T - - b
(2)
(1) If the trip units are used in high-temperature environments, the setting must take into account the thermal limitations of the circuit breaker. The overload
protection setting may not exceed 0.95 at 60 C or 0.9 at 70 C for the Compact NS400, and 0.95 at 50 C, 0.9 at 60 C or 0.85 at 70 C for the Compact NS630.
(2) This option is not available for the STR53SV trip unit.
Functions and characteristics

A-15
Options for the STR53UE electronic trip unit
Earth-fault protection (T)
Ammeter (I)
A digital display continuously indicates the current of the phase with the greatest
load. The value of each current (I1, I2, I3, Ineutral) may be successively displayed by
pressing a scroll button.
LEDs indicate the phase for which the current is displayed.
Ammeter display limits:
minimum current u 0.2 x In. Lower currents are not displayed
maximum current y 10 x In.
Zone selective interlocking (ZSI)
A number of circuit breakers are interconnected one after another by a pilot wire.
In the event of a short-time or earth fault:
if a given STR53UE trip unit detects the fault, it informs the upstream circuit
breaker, which applies the set time delay
if the STR53UE trip unit does not detect the fault, the upstream circuit breaker trips
after its shortest time delay.
In this manner, the fault is cleared rapidly by the nearest circuit breaker.
The thermal stresses on the circuits are minimised and time discrimination is
maintained throughout the installation.
The STR53UE trip unit can handle only the downstream end of a zone selective
interlocking function.Consequently,the ZSI option cannot be implemented between
two Compact NS circuit breakers equipped with STRE53UE trip units.
The ZSI option of the STR53UE trip unit operates only with an upstream circuit
breaker equipped with a Micrologic A, P control unit.
Opto-electronic outputs
Using opto-transistors, these outputs ensure total isolation between the internal
circuits of the trip unit and the circuits wired by the user.
Communications option (COM)
This option transmits data to Digipact distribution monitoring and control modules.
Transmitted data:
settings
phase and neutral currents (rms values)
highest current of the three phases
overload-condition alarm
cause of tripping (overload, short-circuit, etc.).
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
Possible
combinations:
I
I +T
I + COM
I + T + COM
ZSI
ZSI +I
ZSI +I +T
ZSI + I + COM
ZSI + I + T + COM
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
Type Residual
Pick-up Ig =In x 0.2 to 1
Accuracy 15 % adjustable, 8 settings
Time delay adjustable, 4 settings
"constant I
2
t" func ion max. resettable time 60 140 230 350
max. break time y 140 y 230 y 350 y 500

A-16
1 long-time threshold and tripping delay
2 overload alarm (LED)
3 short-time pick-up and tripping delay
4 instantaneous pick-up
5 fxing screw for long-time rating plug
6 test connector
Protection
Protection thresholds and delays are set using the adjustment dials.
Overload protection
True rms long-time protection.
Thermal memory: thermal image before and after tripping.
Setting accuracy may be enhanced by limiting the setting range using a different
long-time rating plug.
Overload protection can be cancelled using a specifc LT rating plug "Off".
Short-circuit protection
Short-time (rms) and instantaneous protection.
Selection of I
2
t type (ON or OFF) for short-time delay.
Neutral protection
On three-pole circuit breakers, neutral protection is not possible.
On four-pole circuit breakers, neutral protection may be set using a three-position
switch: neutral unprotected (4P 3d), neutral protection at 0.5 Ir (4P 3d +N/2) or
neutral protection at Ir (4P 4d).
Indications
Overload indication by alarm LED on the front; the LED goes on when the current
exceeds the long-time trip threshold.
Test
A mini test kit or a portable test kit may be connected to the test connector on the
front to check circuit-breaker operation after installing the trip unit or accessories.
Micrologic 2.0 and 5.0 control units protect power
circuits. Micrologic 5.0 offers time discrimination for
short-circuits as well.
Note.
Micrologic control units are equipped with a transparent lead-
seal cover as standard.
Protection of distribution
systems
Micrologic control units
for Compact NS630b to 3200
E
4
6
0
2
6
A
Functions and characteristics

A-17
Protection Micrologic 2.0
Long time
Current setting (A) Ir =In x 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 0.95 0.98 1
tripping between 1.05 and 1.20 x Ir other ranges or disable by changing long-time rating plug
Time setting t
r
(s) 0.5 1 2 4 8 12 16 20 24
Time delay (s) accuracy: 0 to -30 % 1.5 x Ir 12.5 25 50 100 200 300 400 500 600
accuracy: 0 to -20 % 6 x Ir 0.7
(1)
1 2 4 8 12 16 20 24
accuracy: 0 to -20 % 7.2 x Ir 0.7
(2)
0.69 1.38 2.7 5.5 8.3 11 13.8 16.6
Thermal memory 20 minutes before and after tripping
(1) 0 to -40 % - (2) 0 to -60 %
Instantaneous
Pick-up (A) Isd =Ir x 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 8 10
accuracy: 10 %
Time delay max. resettable time: 20 ms; max break time: 50 ms
Protection Micrologic 5.0
Long time Micrologic 5.0
Current setting (A) Ir =In x 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 0.95 0.98 1
tripping between 1.05 and 1.20 x Ir other ranges or disable by changing long-time rating plug
Time setting t
r
(s) 0.5 1 2 4 8 12 16 20 24
Time delay (s) accuracy: 0 to -30 % 1.5 x Ir 12.5 25 50 100 200 300 400 500 600
accuracy: 0 to -20 % 6 x Ir 0.7
(1)
1 2 4 8 12 16 20 24
accuracy: 0 to -20 % 7.2 x Ir 0.7
(2)
0.69 1.38 2.7 5.5 8.3 11 13.8 16.6
Thermal memory 20 minutes before and after tripping
(1) 0 to -40 % - (2) 0 to -60 %
Short time
Pick-up (A) Isd =Ir x 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 8 10
accuracy: 10 %
Time setting tsd

(s) settings I
2
t Off 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4
I
2
t On 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4
Time delay (ms) at 10 x Ir tsd (max. resettable time) 20 80 140 230 350
(I
2
t off or I
2
t on) tsd (max. break time) 80 140 200 320 500
Instantaneous
Pick-up (A) Ii =In x 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 15 off
accuracy: 10 %
Time delay max. resettable time: 20 ms; max break time: 50 ms
D
B
1
0
5
1
1
7
0 I
t
Ir
tr
Isd
D
B
1
0
5
1
1
8
Ir
tr
Isd
Ii
0 I
t
tsd
I
2
t off
I
2
t on

A-18
Protection of distribution
systems
Micrologic A control units
for Compact NS630b to 3200 (cont.)
1 long-time threshold and tripping delay
2 overload alarm (LED) at 1,125 Ir
3 short-time pick-up and tripping delay
4 instantaneous pick-up
5 earth-leakage or earth-fault pick-up and tripping delay
6 earth-leakage or earth-fault test button
7 long-time rating plug screw
8 test connector
9 lamp test, reset and battery test
10 indication of tripping cause
11 digital display
12 three-phase bargraph and ammeter
13 navigation buttons
Micrologic A control units protect power circuits. They
also offer measurements, display, communication and
current maximeters. Version 6 provides earth-fault
protection, version 7 provides earth-leakage protection.
Note.
Micrologic A control units come with a transparent lead-seal
cover as standard.
Protection
Protection thresholds and delays are set using the adjustment dials.
Overload protection
True rms long-time protection.
Thermal memory: thermal image before and after tripping.
Setting accuracy may be enhanced by limiting the setting range using a different
long-time rating plug.
Overload protection can be cancelled using a specifc LT rating plug "Off".
Short-circuit protection
Short-time (rms) and instantaneous protection.
Selection of I
2
t type (ON or OFF) for short-time delay.
Earth-fault protection
Residual or source ground return earth fault protection.
Selection of I
2
t type (ON or OFF) for delay.
Residual earth-leakage protection (Vigi).
Operation without an external power supply.
q Protected against nuisance tripping.
k DC-component withstand class A up to 10 A.
Neutral protection
On three-pole circuit breakers, neutral protection is not possible.
On four-pole circuit breakers, neutral protection may be set using a three-position
switch: neutral unprotected (4P 3d), neutral protection at 0.5 Ir (4P 3d +N/2), neutral
protection at Ir (4P 4d).
Zone selective interlocking (ZSI)
A ZSI terminal block may be used to interconnect a number of control units to provide
total discrimination for short-time and earth-fault protection, without a delay before
tripping.
Overload alarm
A yellow alarm LED goes on when the current exceeds the long-time trip threshold.
" Ammeter" measurements
Micrologic A control units measure the true (rms) value of currents.
They provide continuous current measurements from 0.2 to 20 In and are accurate
to within 1.5 % (including the sensors).
A digital LCD screen continuously displays the most heavily loaded phase (Imax) or
displays the I1, I2, I3, IN, Ig,In, stored-current (maximeter) and setting values by
successively pressing the navigation button.
The optional external power supply makes it poss ble to display currents <20 % In.
Below 0.05 In, measurements are not signifcant. Between 0.05 and 0.2 In, accuracy
is to within 0.5 % In +1.5 % of the reading.
Communication option
In conjunction with the COM communication option, the control unit transmits the
following:
settings
all ammeter measurements
tripping causes
maximeter readings.
Fault indications
LEDs indicate the type of fault:
overload (long-time protection Ir)
short-circuit (short-time Isd or instantaneous li protection)
earth fault or earth leakage (Ig or In)
internal fault (Ap).
Battery power
The fault indication LEDs remain on until the test/reset button is pressed. Under
normal operating conditions, the battery supplying the LEDs has a service life of
approximately 10 years.
Test
A mini test kit or a portable test kit may be connected to the test connector on the
front to check circuit-breaker operation. For Micrologic 6.0 A and 7.0 A control units,
the operation of earth-fault or earth-leakage protection can be checked by pressing
the test button located above the test connector.
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
E
4
6
0
2
8
Functions and characteristics

A-19
Protection Micrologic 2.0 A
Long time
Current setting (A) Ir =In x 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 0.95 0.98 1
tripping between 1.05 and 1.20 x Ir other ranges or disable by changing long-time rating plug
Time setting t
r
(s) 0.5 1 2 4 8 12 16 20 24
Time delay (s) accuracy: 0 to -30 % 1.5 x Ir 12.5 25 50 100 200 300 400 500 600
accuracy: 0 to -20 % 6 x Ir 0.7
(1)
1 2 4 8 12 16 20 24
accuracy: 0 to -20 % 7.2 x Ir 0.7
(2)
0.69 1 38 2.7 5.5 8.3 11 13.8 16.6
Thermal memory 20 minutes before and after tripping
(1) 0 to -40 % - (2) 0 to -60 %
Instantaneous
Pick-up (A) Isd =Ir x 1.5 2 2 5 3 4 5 6 8 10
accuracy: 10 %
Time delay max resettable time: 20 ms; max break time: 50 ms
Ammeter Micrologic 2.0 A
Continuous current measurements
Display from 20 to 200 % of In I1 I2 I3 IN
accuracy: 1.5 % (including sensors) no auxiliary source (where I >20 % In)
Maximeters I1max. I2max. I3max. IN max.
Protection Micrologic 5.0 / 6.0 / 7.0 A
Long time Micrologic 5.0 / 6.0 / 7.0 A
Current setting (A) Ir =In x 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 0.95 0.98 1
tripping between 1.05 and 1.20 x Ir other ranges or disable by changing long-time rating plug
Time setting t
r
(s) 0.5 1 2 4 8 12 16 20 24
Time delay (s) accuracy: 0 to -30 % 1.5 x Ir 12.5 25 50 100 200 300 400 500 600
accuracy: 0 to -20 % 6 x Ir 0.7
(1)
1 2 4 8 12 16 20 24
accuracy: 0 to -20 % 7.2 x Ir 0.7
(2)
0.69 1 38 2.7 5.5 8.3 11 13.8 16.6
Thermal memory 20 minutes before and after tripping
(1) 0 to -40 % - (2) 0 to -60 %
Short time
Pick-up (A)
accuracy: 10 %
Isd =Ir x 1.5 2 2 5 3 4 5 6 8 10
Time setting tsd (s) settings I
2
t Off 0 0.1 0 2 0.3 0.4
I
2
t On 0.1 0 2 0.3 0.4
Time delay (ms) at 10 x Ir tsd (max. resettable time) 20 80 140 230 350
(I
2
t off or I
2
t on) tsd (max. break time) 80 140 200 320 500
Instantaneous
Pick-up (A) Ii =In x 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 15 off
accuracy: 10 %
Time delay max. resettable time: 20 ms ; max. break time: 50 ms
Earth fault Micrologic 6.0 A
Pick up (A) Ig =In x A B C D E F G H J
accuracy: 10 % In y 400 A 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1
400 A <In <1250 A 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1
In u 1250 A 500 640 720 800 880 960 1040 1120 1200
Time setting tg (s) settings I
2
t Off 0 0.1 0 2 0.3 0.4
I
2
t On 0.1 0 2 0.3 0.4
Time delay (ms) at In or 1200 A tg (max. resettable time) 20 80 140 230 350
(I
2
t off or I
2
t on) tg (max. break time) 80 140 200 320 500
Residual earth leakage (Vigi) Micrologic 7.0 A
Sensitivity (A) In 0.5 1 2 3 5 7 10 20 30
accuracy: 0 to -20 %
Time delay t (ms) settings 60 140 230 350 800
t (max. resettable time) 60 140 230 350 800
t (max. break time) 140 200 320 500 1000
Ammeter Micrologic 5.0 / 6.0 / 7.0 A
Continuous current measurements
Display from 20 to 200 % of In I1 I2 I3 IN Ig In
accuracy: 1.5 % (including sensors) no auxiliary source (where I >20 % In)
Maximeters I1max I2max I3max IN max Igmax In max
Note.
All current-based protection functions require no auxiliary source.
The test / reset button resets maximeters, clears the tripping indication and tests the battery.
D
B
1
0
5
1
1
7
0 I
t
Ir
tr
Isd
D
B
1
0
5
1
1
8
Ir
tr
Isd
Ii
0 I
t
tsd
I
2
t off
I
2
t on
D
B
1
1
8
5
8
4
0 I
t
Ig
tg
I
2
t off
I
2
t on
D
B
1
0
5
1
2
0
0 I
t
In
t

A-20
Micrologic control units
Micrologic P "power"
for Compact NS630b to 1600
Micrologic P control units include all the functions
offered by Micrologic A.
In addition, they measure voltages and calculate power
and energy values.
They also offer new protection functions based on
currents, voltages, frequency and power reinforce load
protection in real time.
Long-time current setting and tripping delay.
Overload signal (LED).
Short-time pick-up and tripping delay.
Instantaneous pick-up.
Earth-leakage or earth-fault pick-up and tripping delay.
Earth-leakage or earth-fault test button.
Long-time rating plug screw.
Test connector.
Lamp + battery test and indications reset.
Indication of tripping cause.
High-resolution screen.
Measurement display.
Maintenance indicators.
Protection settings.
Navigation buttons.
Hole for settings lockout pin on cover.
Note: Micrologic P control units come with a non-transparent
lead-seal cover as standard.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Protection settings
The adjustable protection functions are identical to those of Micrologic A (overloads,
short-circuits, earth-fault and earth-leakage protection).
Fine adjustment
Within the range determined by the adjustment dial, fne adjustment of thresholds (to
within one ampere) and time delays (to within one second) is poss ble on the keypad
or remotely using the COM option.
IDMTL (Inverse Defnite Minimum Time Lag) setting
Coordination with fuse-type or medium-voltage protection systems is optimised by
adjusting the slope of the overload-protection curve. This setting also ensures better
operation of this protection function with certain loads.
Neutral protection
On three-pole circuit breakers, neutral protection may be set using the keypad or
remotely using the COM option, to one of four positions: neutral unprotected (4P 3d),
neutral protection at 0.5 Ir (4P 3d +N/2), neutral protection at Ir (4P 4d) and neutral
protection at 1,6 Ir (4P 3d +1,6N). Neutral protection at 1,6 Ir is used when the
neutral conductor is twice the size of the phase conductors (major load imbalance,
high level of third order harmonics).
On four-pole circuit breakers, neutral protection may be set using a three-position
switch or the keypad: neutral unprotected (4P 3d), neutral protection at 0.5 Ir (4P 3d
+N/2), neutral protection at Ir (4P 4d). Neutral protection produces no effect if the
long-time curve is set to one of the IDMTL protection settings.
Programmable alarms and other protection
Depending on the thresholds and time delays set using the keypad or remotely using
the COM option, the Micrologic P control unit monitors currents and voltage, power,
frequency and the phase sequence. Each threshold overrun is signalled remotely via
the COM option. Each threshold overrun may be combined with tripping (protection)
or an indication carried out by an optional M6C programmable contact (alarm), or
both (protection and alarm).
Load shedding and reconnection
Load shedding and reconnection parameters may be set according to the power or
the current fowing through the circuit breaker. Load shedding is carried out by a
supervisor via the COM option or by an M6C programmable contact.
Measurements
The Micrologic P control unit calculates in real time all the electrical values (V, A, W,
VAR, VA, Wh, VARh, VAh, Hz), power factors and cos j factors.
The Micrologic P control unit also calculates demand current and demand power
over an adjustable time period. Each measurement is associated with a minimeter
and a maximeter.
In the event of tripping on a fault, the interrupted current is stored. The optional
external power supply makes it possible to display the value with the circuit breaker
open or not supplied.
Histories and maintenance indicators
The last ten trips and alarms are recorded in two separate history fles. Maintenance
indications (contact wear, operation cycles, etc.) are recorded for local access.
Indication option via programmable contacts
The M6C (six contacts) auxiliary contacts may be used to signal threshold overruns
or status changes. They can be programmed using the keypad on the Micrologic P
control unit or remotely using the COM option.
Communication option (COM)
The communication option may be used to:
remotely read and set parameters for the protection functions
transmit all the calculated indicators and measurements
signal the causes of tripping and alarms
consult the history fles and the maintenance-indicator register.
maximeter reset.
An event log and a maintenance register, stored in control-unit memory but not
available locally, may be accessed in addition via the COM option.
b
b
b
b
b
D
B
1
0
1
4
8
5
Functions
and characteristics

A-21
Protection Micrologic 5.0 / 6.0 / 7.0 P
+
Long time (rms) Micrologic 5.0 / 6.0 / 7.0 P
D
B
1
1
2
3
8
2
Current setting (A) Ir =In x 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 0.95 0.98 1
Tripping between 1.05 and 1.20 x Ir Other ranges or disable by changing long-time rating plug
Time setting t
r
(s) 0.5 1 2 4 8 12 16 20 24
Time delay (s) Accuracy: 0 to -30 % 1.5 x Ir 12.5 25 50 100 200 300 400 500 600
Accuracy: 0 to -20 % 6 x Ir 0.7
(1)
1 2 4 8 12 16 20 24
Accuracy: 0 to -20 % 7.2 x Ir 0.7
(2)
0.69 1.38 2.7 5.5 8.3 11 13.8 16.6
IDMTL set ing Curve slope SIT VIT EIT HVFuse DT
Thermal memory 20 minutes before and after tripping
(1) 0 to -40 % - (2) 0 to -60 %
Short time (rms)
Pick-up (A) Isd =Ir x 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 8 10
Accuracy: 10 %
Time setting tsd (s) Settings I
2
t Off 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4
I
2
t On - 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4
Time delay (ms) at 10 Ir tsd (max resettable time) 20 80 140 230 350
(I
2
t Off or I
2
t On) tsd (max break time) 80 140 200 320 500
Instantaneous
Pick-up (A) Ii =In x 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 15 off
D
B
1
1
2
3
8
3
Accuracy: 10 %
Time delay Max resettable time: 20 ms
Max break time: 50 ms
Earth fault Micrologic 6.0 P
Pick-up (A)
Accuracy: 10 %
Ig =In x A B C D E F G H J
In y 400 A 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1
400 A <In <1250 A 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1
In u 1250 A 500 640 720 800 880 960 1040 1120 1200
Time setting tg (s) Settings I
2
t Off 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4
I
2
t On - 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4
Time delay (ms) tg (max resettable time) 20 80 140 230 350
D
B
1
1
2
3
8
4
at In or 1200 A (I
2
t Off or I
2
t On) tg (max break time) 80 140 200 320 500
Residual earth leakage (Vigi) Micrologic 7.0 P
Sensitivity (A)
Accuracy: 0 to -20 %
In 0.5 1 2 3 5 7 10 20 30
Time delay Dt (ms) Settings 60 140 230 350 800
t (max resettable time) 60 140 230 350 800
t (max break time) 140 200 320 500 1000
Alarms and other protection Micrologic 5.0 / 6.0 / 7.0 P
Current Threshold Delay
D
B
1
1
2
5
4
0
Current unbalance Iunbalance 0.05 to 0.6 Iaverage 1 to 40 s
Max. demand current Imax demand : I1, I2, I3, IN, 0.2 In to In 15 to 1500 s
Earth fault alarm
It 10 to 100 % In
(1)
1 to 10 s
Voltage
Voltage unbalance Uunbalance 2 to 30 % x Uaverage 1 to 40 s
Minimum voltage Umin 100 to Umax between phases 1.2 to 10 s
Maximum voltage Umax Umin to 1200 between phases 1.2 to 10 s
Power
Reverse power rP 5 to 500 kW 0.2 to 20 s
Frequency
Minimum frequency Fmin 45 to Fmax 1.2 to 5 s
Maximum frequency Fmax Fmin to 440 Hz 1.2 to 5 s
Phase sequence
Sequence (alarm) 1/2/3 or 1/3/2 0.3 s
Load shedding and reconnection Micrologic 5.0 / 6.0 / 7.0 P
Measured value Threshold Delay
D
B
1
1
2
5
4
1
Current I 0.5 to 1 Ir per phases 20 % tr to 80 % tr
Power P 200 kW to 10 MW 10 to 3600 s
(1) In y 400 A 30 %
400 A < In < 1250 A 20 %
In u 1250 A 10 %
Note: all current-based protection functions require no auxiliary source.
Voltage-based protection functions are connected to AC power via a voltage measurement input built into the circuit breaker.

A-22
Micrologic control units
Micrologic P "power"
for Compact NS630b to 1600 (cont.)
Navigation from one display to another is intuitive. The six buttons on the keypad
provide access to the menus and easy selection of values. When the setting cover is
closed, the keypad may no longer be used to access the protection settings, but still
provides access to the displays for measurements, histories, indicators, etc.
Measurements ..........................................................................
Instantaneous values
The value displayed on the screen is refreshed every second.
Minimum and maximum values of measurements are stored in memory (minimeters
and maximeters).
Currents
I rms A 1 2 3 N
A E-fault E-leakage
I max rms A 1 2 3 N
A E-fault E-leakage
Voltages
U rms V 12 23 31
V rms V 1N 2N 3N
U average rms V (U12 +U23 +U31) / 3
U unbalance %
Power, energy
P active, Q reactive, S apparent W, Var, VA Totals
E active, E reactive, E apparent Wh, VARh, VAh Totals consumed - supplied
Totals consumed
Totals supplied
Power factor PF Total
Frequencies
F Hz
Demand metering
The demand is calculated over a fxed or sliding time window that may be
programmed from 5 to 60 minutes. According to the contract signed with the power
supplier, an indicator associated with a load shedding function makes it possible to
avoid or minimise the costs of overrunning the subscribed power. Maximum demand
values are systematically stored and time stamped (maximeter).
Currents
I demand A 1 2 3 N
A E-fault E-leakage
I max demand A 1 2 3 N
A E-fault E-leakage
Power
P, Q, S demand W, Var, VA Totals
P, Q, S max demand W, Var, VA Totals
Minimeters and maximeters
Only the current and power maximeters may be displayed on the screen.
Histories ....................................................................................
The last ten trips and alarms are recorded in two separate history fles that may be
displayed on the screen.
tripping history:
type of fault
date and time
values measured at the time of tripping (interrupted current, etc.)
alarm history:
type of alarm
date and time
values measured at the time of the alarm.
Maintenance indicators (with COMoption) ............................
A number of maintenance indicators may be called up on the screen:
contact wear
operation counter:
cumulative total
total since last reset.
b
v
v
v
b
v
v
v
b
b
v
v
D
B
1
1
4
6
4
1
Default display.
D
B
1
1
4
6
4
2
Display of a maximum current
D
B
1
0
1
1
3
5
Display of a voltage.
D
B
1
0
1
1
3
6
Display of a power.
D
B
1
0
1
1
3
7
Display of a frequency.
D
B
1
0
1
1
4
0
Display after tripping.
D
B
1
0
1
1
3
8
Display of a demand power.
D
B
1
0
1
1
3
9
Display of a tripping history.
Functions
and characteristics

A-23
With the communication option
Additional measurements, maximeters and minimeters
Certain measured or calculated values are only accessible with the COM
communication option:
I peak / 2, (I1 +I2 +I3)/3, I unbalance
load level in % Ir
total power factor.
The maximeters and minimeters are available only via the COM option for use with a
supervisor.
Event log
All events are time stamped.
trips
beginning and end of alarms
modifcations to settings and parameters
counter resets
system faults:
fallback position
thermal self-protection
loss of time
overrun of wear indicators
test-kit connections
etc.
Maintenance register
Used as an aid in troubleshooting and to better plan for device maintenance
operations.
highest current measured
operation counter
number of test-kit connections
number of trips in operating mode and in test mode
contact wear indicator.
Additional technical characteristics
Setting the display language
System messages may be displayed in six different languages. The desired
language is selected via the keypad.
Protection functions
All current-based protection functions require no auxiliary source. Voltage-based
protection functions are connected to AC power via a voltage measurement input
built into the circuit breaker.
Measurement functions
Measurement functions are independent of the protection functions.
The high-accuracy measurement module operates independently of the protection
module, while remaining synchronised with protection events.
Measurement-calculation mode
measurement functions implement the new "zero blind time" concept which
consists in continuously measuring signals at a high sampling rate. The traditional
"blind window" used to process samples no longer exists. This method ensures
accurate energy calculations even for highly variable loads (welding machines,
robots, etc.)
energies are calculated on the basis of the instantaneous power values, in two
manners:
the traditional mode where only positive (consumed) energies are considered
the signed mode where the positive (consumed) and negative (supplied) energies
are considered separately.
Accuracy of measurements (including sensors)
voltage (V) 0.5 %
current (A) 1.5 %
frequency (Hz) 0.1 %
power (W) and energy (Wh) 2 %.
Stored information
The fne setting adjustments, the last 100 events and the maintenance register
remain in the control-unit memory even when power is lost.
Time-stamping
Time-stamping is activated as soon as time is set manually or by a supervisor.
No external power supply module is required (max. drift of 1 hour per year).
Reset
An individual reset, via the keypad or remotely, acts on alarms, minimum and
maximum data, peak values, the counters and the indicators.
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
v
v
b
b
b
b
D
B
1
0
1
5
2
3
Display of an event log on a supervisor.

A-24
Functions and characteristics
Protection of distribution
systems
Micrologic A control units
for Compact NS630b to 1600 (cont.)
Accessories for Micrologic control units
Neutral exernal voltage measurement input (option ENVT)
The neutral voltage input is necessary for Micrologic P power measurements
on 3-pole circuit breakers used on installations with a distr buted neutral.
It is used to connect the neutral to the Micrologic control unit to take into account the
poss ble energy consumption caused by current fowing in the neutral.
External sensors
External sensor for earth-fault protection
The sensor is used with 3P circuit breakers and the Micrologic 6.0 A control unit.
It is installed on the neutral conductor for residual type earth-fault protection.
The rating of the sensor (CT) must be compatible with the rating of the circuit
breaker :
NS630b to NS1600 - 400/1600 CT
NS1600b to NS3200 - 1000/4000 CT.
Rectangular sensor for earth-leakage protection
The sensor is installed around the busbars (phases +neutral) to detect the zero-
phase sequence current required for the earth-leakage protection.
Rectangular sensors are available in two sizes.
Inside dimensions (mm)
280 x 115 up to 1600 A
470 x 160 up to 3200 A.
External sensor for source ground return protection
The sensor is installed around the connection of the transformer neutral point to
earth and connects to the Micrologic 6.0 A control unit to provide the source ground
return (SGR) protection.
Long-time rating plug
Four interchangeable plugs may be used to limit the long-time threshold setting
range for higher accuracy.
The time delay settings indicated on the plugs are for an overload of 6 Ir.
As standard, control units are equipped with the 0.4 to 1 plug.
Setting ranges
Standard Ir =In x0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0 9 0.95 0.98 1
Low-setting option Ir =In x0.4 0.45 0.50 0.55 0.60 0.65 0.70 0.75 0.8
High-setting option Ir =In x0.80 0.82 0.85 0.88 0.90 0 92 0.95 0.98 1
Off plug No long-time protection (Ir =In for Isd setting)
Important: long-time rating plugs must always be removed before carrying out insulation or
dielectric withstand tests.
External 24 V DC power-supply module
The external power-supply module makes it possible to use the display even if the
circuit breaker is open or not supplied (for the exact conditions of use, see the
"Electrical diagrams" part of this catalogue).
This module powers both the control unit (100 mA) and M6C programmable contacts
(100 mA).
If the COM communication option is used, the communication bus requires its own
24 VDC power supply, independent with respect to that of the Micrologic control unit.
With the Micrologic A control unit, this module makes it possible to display currents of
less than 20 % In.
With the Micrologic P, it can be used to display fault currents after tripping.
Characteristics:
power supply:
110/130, 200/240, 380/415 V AC (+10 % -15 %)
24/30, 48/60, 100/125 V DC (+20 % -20 %)
output voltage : 24 V DC, 5 % 200 mA
ripple <1 %
dielectric withstand: 3.5 kV rms between input/output, for 1 minute
overvoltage category: as per IEC 60947-1 cat. 4.
Battery module
The battery module maintains display operation and communication with the
supervisor if the power supply to the Micrologic control units is interrupted.
It is installed in series between the Micrologic control unit and the AD module.
Characteristics:
battery run-time: 4 hours (approximately)
mounted on vertical backplate or symmetrical rail.
b
b
b
b
b
v
v
b
b
b
b
b
b
External sensor (CT)
0
5
6
4
6
7
0
2
5
1
7
3
E
4
7
4
7
7
External sensor for source
ground return protection
0
5
6
4
1
2
P
B
1
0
1
0
2
6
_
3
2

A-25
Lead-seal cover.
0
5
6
4
2
9
Spare parts for Micrologic control units
M6C programmable contacts
These contacts are optional equipment for the Micrologic P control units.
They are described with the indication contacts for the circuit breakers.
Characteristics M6C
Minimum load 100 mA/24 V
Breaking capacity (A)
p.f.: 0.7
V AC 240 5
380 3
V DC 24 1.8
48 1.5
125 0.4
250 0.15
M6C: external 24 V DC power supply required (consumption 100 mA).
Lead-seal covers
A lead-seal cover controls access to the adjustment dials.
When the cover is closed:
it is impossible to modify settings using the keypad unless the settings lockout pin
on the cover is removed
the test connector remains accessible
the test button for the earth-fault and earth-leakage protection function remains
accessible.
Characteristics
transparent cover for basic Micrologic and Micrologic A control units
non-transparent cover for Micrologic P control units.
Spare battery
A battery supplies power to the LEDs identifying the tripping causes. Battery service
life is approximately ten years.
A test button on the front of the control unit is used to check the battery condition.
The battery may be replaced on site when discharged.
b
b
b
b
b
P
B
1
0
0
7
8
1
-
3
2
M6C.

A-26
Functions and characteristics
Protection of distribution
systems
AC and DC single-phase
and two-phase systems
Compact circuit breakers
Number of poles 1 2 1 2 1
Control manual toggle
direct or extended rotary handle
electric
Connections fxed front connec ion
rear connection
wi hdrawable front connec ion
rear connection
Electrical characteristics as per IEC 60947-2 and EN 60947-2
Rated current (A) In 40 C 1 1 1 1 2
Rated insulation voltage (V) Ui
Rated impulse withstand voltage kV) Uimp
Rated operational voltage (V) Ue AC 50/60 Hz 2 2 2
DC 2 2
Type of circuit breaker
Ultimate breaking capacity (kA rms) lcu AC 220 V 2 1 2 1 2
50/60 Hz 277 V 2 2 2
380/415 V 2
440 V 2
500 V 1
525 V 1 22
660/690 V 1 1
DC 250 V (1P) 1 1
500 V (2P) 1 1
Service breaking capacity (kA rms) lcs % Icu 1 1 1 1 1
Suitability for isolation
Utilisation category
Durability (C-O cycles) mechanical 2 2 2 2 1
electrical 277 V In/2 2 2 2 2 1
In 1 1 1 1
Electrical characteristics as per NEMA AB1
Breaking capacity (kA) 240 V 2 1 2 1 2
V AC 50/60 Hz 277 V 2 2 2
480 V 2 2
600 V 1 1
Protection and measurements
Type of trip units
Ratings In 1 2 2 1 12 1 1 2 2
Overload protection (thermal) long time Ir
threshold 1 2 2 1 12 1 1 2 2
Short-circuit protection (magne ic) instantaneous lm
pickup value indicated for AC
(1)
1 1 1 12
real value for DC 2 2 1 12 12
Add-on earth-leakage protection add-on Vigi module
combination with Vigirex relay
Additional indication and control auxiliaries
Indication contacts
Voltages releases MX shunt release
MN undervoltage release
Remote communication by bus
Device status indication via communicating auxiliary contacts
Installation
Accessories terminal extensions and spreaders
terminal shields and interphase barriers
escutcheons
Dimensions (mm) W x H x D 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Weight (kg) 1 2 1 2
Source changeover system
Interlocking systems
(1) The thresholds for TMD and TMG 1-pole and 2-pole magnetic trip units up to 63 A are
indicated for AC. The real DC thresholds are indicated on the following line.
P
B
1
0
1
0
4
7
_
1
7
Compact NS160N single-pole
P
B
1
0
1
0
4
8
_
3
0
Compact NS160N two-pole

A-27
NS100 NS160 NS250
1 2 1 2 1
b b b b b
- - - - -
- - - - -
b b b b b
b b b b b
- - - - -
- - - - -

100 100 160 160 250
750 750 750 750 750
8 8 8 8 8
277 690 277 690 277
250 500 250 500 -
N H N H N H N H N
22 25 40 85 100 25 40 85 100 25
2 25 40 - - 25 40 - - 25
1 - - 25 70 - - 36 70 -
- - 25 65 - - 35 65 -
- - 18 50 - - 30 50 -
2 - - 18 35 - - 22 35 -
- - 8 10 - - 8 10 -
2 1 50 85 85 100 50 85 85 100 -
2 - - 85 100 - - 85 100 -
100 % 100 % 100 % 100 % 100 %
b b b b b
A A A A A
20000 20000 20000 20000 10000
2 2 20000 20000 20000 20000 10000
10000 10000 10000 10000 5000
N H N H N H N H N
2 25 40 85 100 25 40 85 100 25
2 25 40 - - 25 40 - - 25
- - 25 65 - - 25 65 -
- - 10 35 - - 10 35 -

built-in thermal-magnetic built-in hermal-magnetic built-in thermal-magnetic
16 20 25 30 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 160 200 250
fxed fxed fxed
16 20 25 30 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 160 200 250
fxed fxed fxed
190 190 300 300 500 500 500 640 800 1000 1250 850 850 850
260 260 400 400 700 700 700 800 1000 1200 1250 - - -


- - -
b b b

- b - b -
- b - b -
- b - b -

- b - b -
b b b b b
b b b b b
b b b b b
35 x 161 x 86 70 x 161 x 86 35 x 161 x 86 70 x 161 x 86 35 x 161 x 86
0.7 1.2 0.7 1.2 0.7

- - - - -

A-28
Functions and characteristics
Protection of distribution
systems
1000 V systems
Compact circuit breakers
Number of poles
Rating of sensors (A) 1 2
Control manual toggle
direct or extended rotary handle
electric
Connections fxed front connection
rear connection
plug-in (on base) front connection
rear connection
withdrawable (on chassis) front connection
rear connection
Electrical characteristics
Rated operational voltage (V) Ue AC 50/60 Hz 11
Ultimate breaking capacity (kA rms) lcu AC 1000 V 1
Service breaking capacity lcs % Icu 1
Electrical characteristics as per IEC 60947-2 and EN 60947-2
Rated current (A) In 40 C 1 2
Rated insulation voltage (V) Ui 12
Rated impulse withstand voltage kV) Uimp
Rated operational voltage (V) Ue AC 50/60 Hz 1
Ultimate breaking capacity (kA rms) lcu AC 1000 V 1
Service breaking capacity lcs % Icu 1
Suitability for isolation
Short-time withstand current (kA rms)
V AC 50/60 Hz
lcw 0.5 s
1 s
Utilisation category
Durability (C-O cycles) mechanical 1
electrical

1000 V In/2
In 2
Pollution degree
Protection and measurements
Interchangeable trip units 2
Overload protection long time Ir (In x )
Short-circuit protection short time Isd (Ir x )
instantaneous Ii (In x )
Ear h-fault protection lg (In x )
Residual ear h-leakage protection In
Zone selective interlocking ZSI
Protection of the fourth pole
Add-on earth-leakage protection combination with Vigirex relay
Current measurements
Additional indication and control auxiliaries
Indication contacts
Voltage releases MX shunt release
MN undervoltage release
Remote communication by bus
Device-status indication
Device remote operation
Transmission of settings
Indication and identifcation of protection devices and alarms
Transmission of measured current values
Installation
Accessories terminal extensions and spreaders
terminal shields and interphase barriers
escutcheons
Dimensions (mm) fxed 3P 1 11
W x H x D 4P
Weight (kg) fxed 3P 1
4P
Source changeover system
Interlocking systems
For ratings above 400 A,
see the Masterpact
catalogue.
0
5
3
1
8
2
1000 V Compact NS400

A-29
NS400 1000 V For ratings above 400 A, see the Masterpact catalogue
3
150, 250, 400

b

b

b

b
consult us
consult us
consult us
consult us
consult us

1150
1 10
100 %

150, 250, 400
1250
8
1000
1 10
100 %

b


standardised
1 standardised
A
15000

1 2 4000
2000
3

STR23SP

b

b

b
-

b
-
-

b
-


b

b

b


b

b
-
-
-

b

b
b
480 x 140 x 110
-
13
-

consult us

A-30
Functions and characteristics
Protection of distribution
systems
400 Hz applications
Tripping thresholds
The 400 Hz current settings are obtained by multiplying the 50 Hz values by the
following coeffcient:
K1 for thermal trip units;
K2 for magnetic trip units.
On adjustable trip units, these adaptation coeffcients are independent of the unit
adjustment knob position.
Thermal trip units
The current settings are lower at 400 Hz than at 50 Hz (K1 <1).
Magnetic trip units
The current settings are conversely higher at 400 Hz than at 50 Hz (K2 >1).
Adjustable trip units should be set to minimum, or use Compact circuit breakers
equipped with low magnetic trip units (type G).
Electronic trip units
The use of electronics offers the advantage of greater operating stability when the
frequency is varied. However, the devices are still subjected to frequency related
temperature effects which may sometimes pose restrictions on their use.
Column K1 of the table gives the maximum permissible current to be used for the
current setting (knob position).
Thermal-magnetic trip units
Circuit breaker Trip unit Thermal setting K1 Magnetic K2
at 40 C setting
NS100N TM16G 16 0.95 63 1.6
TM25G 25 0.95 80 1.6
TM40G 40 0.95 80 1.6
TM63G 63 0.95 125 1.6
NS250N TM16D 16 0.95 240 1.6
TM25D 25 0.95 300 1.6
TM40D 40 0.95 500 1.6
TM63D 63 0.95 500 1.6
TM80D 80 0.9 650 1.6
TM100D 100 0.9 800 1.6
TM125D 125 0.9 1000 1.6
TM160D 160 0.9 1250 1.6
TM200D 200 0.9 1000
(1)
1.6
TM250D 250 0.9 1250
(1)
1.6
(1) for TM200D and TM250D, Im must be set to its maximum
Electronic trip units
Compact adaptation coeffcients
Circuit breaker Trip unit Rating
Ir at 50 Hz
(A at 40 C)
Long-time
Ir maxi
K1
Short-time
Irm at 50 Hz
(A)
K2
NS100N STR22SE 40...100 0.4 to 1 2 to 10 Ir 1
NS250N STR22SE 100...250 0.4 to 0.9 2 to 10 Ir 1
NS400N STR23SE 400 0.4 to 0.8 1.5 to 10 Ir 1
NS630N STR23SE 630 0.4 to 0.8 1.5 to 10 Ir 1
NS400N STR53SE 400 0.4 to 0.8 1.5 to 10 Ir 1
NS630N STR53SE 630 0.4 to 0.8 1.5 to 10 Ir 1
C1001N STR35SE 1000 0.4 to 0.75 1.5 to 10 Ir 0.97
C1251N STR35SE 1250 0.4 to 0.75 1.5 to 10 Ir 0.97
b
b

A-31
Breaking capacity of Compact NS and
Compact circuit breakers at 400 Hz
At 440 V, 400 Hz
Circuit breaker Breaking capacity
NS100N 12 kA
NS250N 4,5 kA
NS400N 10 kA
NS630N 10 kA
C1001N 25 kA
C1251N 25 kA
MN or MX auxiliary releases
For Compact NS100-630
For circuit breakers on 400 Hz systems, only 125 V DC rated releases can be used.
The release must be supplied by the 400 Hz system via a rectifer bridge (to be
selected from the table below) and an additional resistor with characteristics
depending on the system voltage and the type of circuit breaker.
U (V) 400 Hz Rectifer Additional resistor
220/240 V Thomson 110 BHz or 4.2 k-5 W
General Instrument W06 or
Semikron SKB at 1,2/1,3
380/420 V Semikron SKB at 1,2/1,3 10.7 k-10 W
Note: other models of rectifer bridges can be used if their characteristics are at least equivalent
to those stated above.
For Compact C1001-1251
The following auxiliary releases are designed to operate at 400 Hz.
U (V) 400 Hz Catalogue number
MN 110/130 V 44925
MN 208/250 V 44926
MN 380/415 V 44932
MX 380/415 V 44914

For Compact NS630b-3200
The standard auxiliary releases can be used at 400 Hz, up to an ambiant
temperature of 55 C.
D
B
1
1
0
9
3
6
R
MN/MX
125 V DC
400 Hz
U volt
Connection

A-32
Protection of distribution
systems
DC systems
A complete DC offer
Compact NS direct-current (DC) circuit breakers are
used to protect and control low-voltage distr bution
systems. They are installed in main low-voltage
switchboards (MLVS) and in distr bution switchboards
(as incomers and outgoers). They can use all the
accessories and auxiliaries for the AC ranges and are
thus suitable for most DC systems and applications.
For full details, please refer to the "Direct current 16 to
4000 A" catalogue.
D
B
1
0
4
4
6
1
NS250 DC rating plate.
Compact NS 16 to 630 A
The Compact NS range is designed for DC voltages from 24 to 750 V and offers:
a wide selection of models suited to the many applications:
1, 2, 3 and 4 poles up to 160 A
3 and 4 poles from 250 to 630 A
high breaking capacities, with three performance levels N, H and DC:
N
- 50 kA in a 1-pole version, for systems y 250 V
- 85 kA in a 2-pole version, for systems y 500 V
H
- 85 kA in a 1-pole version, for systems y 250 V
- 100 kA in a 2-pole version, for systems y 500 V
DC
- 100 kA in a 3 or 4-pole version, for systems y 750 V
fewer frame sizes: just two pole pitches (35 and 45 mm) for easy integration in
installation systems (enclosures, machines, etc.)
accessories for insulation and series or parallel connection of poles, suited to the
particularities of DC applications
fxed and withdrawable versions (3 and 4 poles, DC type).
Breaking capacity Icu for 250 V per pole and L/R = 15 ms
(1)
(1P: 250 V, 2P: 500 V, 3P: 750 V)
b
v
v
b
v
v
v
b
b
b
D
B
1
0
5
1
4
8
(1) L/R = time constant of the distribution system (see "Direct current 16 to 4000 A" catalogue).
Functions
and characteristics

A-33
P
B
1
0
1
0
4
7
-
1
5
R
NS160 DC -1P.
P
B
1
0
1
0
4
8
-
2
2
R
NS160 DC - 2P.
P
B
1
0
1
0
5
5
-
3
0
R
NS160 DC - 3P.
P
B
1
0
0
9
0
5
-
4
0
R
NS630 DC - 4P.

A-34
Protection of distribution
systems
DC systems
Selection guide for DC circuit breakers
There are three types of DC distribution systems (see
the table).
The operational voltage in conjunction with one of the
three systems determines the number of poles taking
part in current interruption.
Types of DC distribution systems
Selection of a circuit breaker depends essentially on the distribution-system
parameters presented below which are used to determine the corresponding
characteristics:
type of system - determines the type of product and the number of poles
connected in series for each polarity
rated voltage - determines the number of series poles taking part in current
interruption
nominal current - determines the rated current of the circuit-breaker
maximum short-circuit current at the point of installation - determines the breaking
capacity.
b
b
b
b
Types of systems
Earthed systems Isolated systems
The source has one earthed polarity
(1)
The source has an earthed mid-point
Diagrams and different faults
Fault analysis (neglecting resistance of earth electrodes)
Fault A maximum Isc at U
only protected polarity concerned
all poles of protected polarity must have
breaking capacity u Isc max. at U
b
b
b
maximum Isc at U/2
only positive polarity concerned
all poles of positive polarity must have
breaking capacity u Isc max. at U/2
b
b
b
no consequences
the fault must be indicated by an IMD
(insulation-monitoring device) and cleared
(standard IEC/EN 60364)
b
b
Fault B maximum Isc at U
if only one polarity (the positive here) is
protected, all poles of protected polarity must
have breaking capacity u Isc max. at U
if both polarities are protected, to enable
disconnection, all poles of the two polarities
must have breaking capacity u Isc max. at U
b
b
b
maximum Isc at U
both polarities are concerned
all poles of the two polarities must have
breaking capacity u Isc max. at U
b
b
b
maximum Isc at U
both polarities are concerned
all poles of the two polarities must have
breaking capacity u Isc max. at U
b
b
b
Fault C No consequences same as fault A
all poles of the negative polarity must have
breaking capacity u Isc max. at U/2
b
b
same as fault A with the same obligations b
Double fault
A and D or C and
E
Double fault not possible,
system trips on frst fault
Double fault not possible,
system trips on frst fault
maximum Isc at U
only positive polarity (cases A and D) or
negative (C and E) concerned
all poles of each polarity must have breaking
capacity u Isc max. at U
b
b
b
Most unfavourable cases
Fault A and fault B (if only one polarity is
protected)
Fault B Double fault A and D or C and E
Conclusion: selection of number of poles and breaking capacity
Layout of protection poles
on only one polarity
(1)
b identical for each polarity b identical for each polarity b
Number of series poles
Per polarity all on same polarity b equal b equal b
Total 1, 2 or 3 without disconnection
2, 3 or 4 with disconnection
b
b
2 or 4
(2)
b 2 or 4
(2)
b
Breaking capacity
all poles of the protected polarity u Isc max.
at U
b all poles of both polari ies u Isc max. at U
all poles of each polarity u Isc max. at U/2
b
b
all poles of each polarity u Isc max. at U b
Disconnection of both polarities
(3)
Possible by adding a pole to the non-protected
polarity
ensured b ensured b
Creation
See the selection table opposite
(1) Positive or negative, depending on the polarity connected to the exposed conductive parts.
(2) A 3P circuit breaker can be used if a 2P version does not exist. In this case, the central pole is not connected.
(3) Circuit breaker suitable for multi-pole operation.
D
B
1
0
5
1
7
7
D
B
1
0
5
1
7
6
D
B
1
0
5
1
7
5
Functions
and characteristics

A-35
Solutions depending on the distribution system and the voltage
Series connection of poles
Type of distribution system
Type Earthed Isolated
Source One polarity (negative here) connected to earth
(or exposed conductive parts)
Mid-point connected to earth Isolated polarities
Protected polarities 1 (disconnection of 1P) 2 (disconnection of 2P) 2 2
Diagrams
(and types of faults)
D
B
1
0
5
1
7
8
D
B
1
0
5
1
7
9
D
B
1
0
5
1
8
0
D
B
1
0
5
1
8
1
Selection of circuit breaker and pole connection
Compact NS
24 V y Un y 250 V
D
B
1
0
5
1
8
2
D
B
1
0
5
1
8
3
D
B
1
0
5
1
8
3
D
B
1
0
5
1
8
3
Single-pole. Two-pole
(1)
. Two-pole
(1)
. Two-pole
(1)
.
250 V < Un y 500 V
D
B
1
0
5
1
8
4
D
B
1
0
5
1
8
5
D
B
1
0
5
1
8
3
D
B
1
0
5
1
8
6
Two-pole
(1).
Three-pole. Two-pole
(1)
. Four-pole.
500 V < Un y 750 V
D
B
1
0
5
1
8
7
D
B
1
0
5
1
8
8
D
B
1
0
5
1
8
6
Three-pole. Four-pole. Four-pole.
(1) A 3P circuit breaker can be used if a 2P version does not exist. In this case, the central pole is not connected.

A-36
Protection of distribution
systems
DC systems
Circuit breaker characteristics
Compact circuit breaker
Number of poles
Electrical characteristics as per IEC 60947-1/ 60947-2 and EN 60947-1 / 60947-2
Rated current at 40 C In (A)
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V)
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kV peak)
Rated operational voltage Ue (V DC)
Type of circuit breaker
Ultimate breaking capacity
(L/R =5 ms and L/R =15 ms)
Icu (kA rms) V DC 48-125 V (1P)
(1)
250 V (1P)
(1)
500 V (2P)
(1)
750 V (3P)
(1)
Service breaking capacity Ics % Icu
Rated making capacity Icm % Icu
Utilisation category
Breaking time (ms)
Suitability for isolation
Pollution degree (as per IEC 60664-1)
Protection against overcurrents (see trip-unit table page A-38)
Trip units Built-in
Interchangeable
Protection Overloads
Short-circuits
Durability
(O/C cycles) Mechanical
Electrical 250 V In
250 V In/2
500 V In
500 V In/2
750 V In
750 V In/2
Indication and control auxiliaries
Auxiliary contacts
Voltage release MX shunt release
MN undervoltage release
Installation and connections
Fixed Front connection
Rear connection
Plug-in (base) Front connection
Rear connection
Withdrawable (chassis) Front connection
Rear connection
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions
H x W x D (mm) connected in series
Fixed 1P
2P
3P
4P
Weight (kg)
connected in series
Fixed 1P
2P
3P
4P
(1) Number of poles taking part in current interruption.
Example. The NS100N circuit breaker exists in the following versions:
- 1 pole with an Icu of 50 kA, for systems y 250 V
- 2 poles with an Icu of 85 kA, for systems y 500 V; 1 pole can be used in a 250 V system.
P
B
1
0
1
0
4
7
-
1
4
P
B
1
0
1
0
4
8
-
2
0
P
B
1
0
1
0
5
5
-
2
7
P
B
1
0
0
9
0
5
-
3
6
1 2 1 2
1 1 2
2 2
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1
1
1
1



1
1
1 2
1
1 2
1
1 2




1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 11
1 1 1 1 1 1 22 1 11

1 2 1 2
1 1 1 1
2 1 2 2 1 2
Functions
and characteristics

A-37









1
12 1
2 1
2






1



2
2 2

2

2













1
2


1
2




NS100 NS160 NS250 NS400 NS630
1 2 3/4 1 2 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4
100 160 250 400 550
800 800 800 800 800
8 8 8 8 8
250 500 750 250 500 750 750 750 750
N H N H DC N H N H DC DC DC DC
50 85 85 100 100 50 85 85 100 100 100 100 100
50 85 85 100 100 50 85 85 100 100 100 100 100
- - 85 100 100 - - 85 100 100 100 100 100
- - - - 100 - - - - 100 100 100 100
100 %
100 %
A
<10 ms
b
3
b b b b - b b b b - - - -
- - - - b - - - - b b b b
b b b b b b b b b b - - -
b b b b b b b b b b b b b
10000 5000
5000 1000
10000 2000
5000 1000
10000 2000
5000 1000
10000 2000
b
b
b
b
b
- - - - b - - - - b b b b
- - - - b - - - - b b b b
- - - - b - - - - b b b b
- - - - b - - - - b b b b
161 x 35 x 86 - - 161 x 35 x 86 - - -
- 161 x 70 x 86 - - 161 x 70 x 86 - -
- - 161 x 105 x 86 - - 161 x 105 x 86 255 x 140 x 110
- - 161 x 140 x 86 - - 161 x 140 x 86 225 x 185 x 110
0.7 - - 0.7 - - -
- 1.2 - - 1.2 - -
- - 1.6 to 1.9 - - 1.6 to 1.9 6.0
- - 2.1 to 2.3 - - 2.1 to 2.3 7.8

A-38
Protection of distribution
systems
DC systems
Trip-unit characteristics
Depending on the version, Compact NS DC circuit
breakers are equipped with:
b 1P/2P:
TM-D built-in thermal-magnetic trip units
b 3P/4P:
v up to 250 A, TM-D, TM-DC or TM-G interchangeable
thermal-magnetic trip units
v for 400 and 630 A,
MP1, MP2, MP3 built-in magnetic trip units.
Types of trip units
D
B
1
0
5
1
8
9
Trip units for Compact NS
TM thermal-magnetic trip unit up to 250 A
Up to 250 A for Compact NS, protection is provided by thermal-magnetic trip units.
For 1 or 2 poles, trip units are built in
TM-D up to 160 A: fxed thermal threshold and magnetic pick-up
For 3 or 4 poles, trip units are interchangeable
TM-D up to 63 A: adjustable thermal threshold and fxed magnetic pick-up
TM-DC from 80 to 250 A: adjustable thermal threshold and fxed or adjustable
(200 and 250 A) magnetic pick-up
TM-G, up to 63 A: adjustable thermal threshold and fxed low magnetic pick-up
to protect long cables.
b
b
b
b
b
D
B
1
0
4
5
3
7
D
B
1
0
5
1
7
1
overload protection threshold.
short-circuit protection pick-up.
1
2
Functions
and characteristics

A-39
Trip units for Compact NS100 - NS160 - NS250
Single-pole and two-pole (built-in trip units)
Type of trip unit TM-D
Rating In (A) at 40 C 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160
Compact circuit breaker NS100N/H b b b b b b b b b - -
NS160N/H - - - - - - - - - b b
Overload protection (thermal)
Tripping threshold Ir (A) at 40 C) Fixed
16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160
Protection against short-circuits (magnetic)
Pick-up Im (A) Fixed
Compact circuit breaker NS100/160N/H Marked AC value
(1)
190 190 300 300 500 500 500 640 800 1000 1250
True DC value 260 260 400 400 700 700 700 800 1000 1200 1250
Three-pole 3P-3d and four-pole 4P-4d (interchangeable trip units)
Type of trip unit TM-D TM-DC TM-G
Rating (A) In (A) at 40 C 16 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 250 16 25 40 63
Compact circuit breaker NS100DC b b b b b b b b - - - - b b b b
NS160DC b b b b b b b b b b - - b b b b
NS250DC - - - - - - b b b b b b - - - -
Overload protection (thermal)
Tripping threshold (A) Ir (at 40 C) Adjustable
0.8 to 1 x In
Protection against short-circuits (magnetic)
Pick-up (A) Im Fixed Adjustable Fixed
Compact circuit breaker NS100/160/250DC Marked AC value
(1)
190 300 400 500 500 500 - - - - - - 63 80 80 125
True DC value 260 400 550 700 700 700 800 800 1250 1250 5 to 10 x In 80 100 100 150
(1) The pick-up values for single-pole and two-pole, TMD and TMG magnetic trip units up to 63 A are marked with AC values. A correction coeffcient is required to
obtain the DC pick-up values indicated on the next line.
The magnetic-protection pick-up values for TM-DC trip units are indicated directly in DC values.
MP magnetic trip unit for 400 and 630 A
Above 250 A, the protection of Compact NS 400 A and 630 A circuit breakers is
ensured
by built-in magnetic trip units supplied mounted on the circuit breaker and offering
one of three protection levels MP1, MP2 and MP3.
Compact NS400 - NS630 trip units
Three-pole 3P-3d and four-pole 4P-3d (built-in trip units)
Type of trip unit MP1 MP2 MP3
Circuit breaker Compact NS400DC b b
Compact NS630DC b b b
Protection against short-circuits (magnetic)
Pick-up (A) Im Adjustable
8001600 12502500 20004000
D
B
1
0
4
5
3
8

A-40
Protection of distribution
systems
Incoming circuit breakers in nal
distribution
These are incoming circuit breakers, specially
designed to operate upstream of Multi 9 modular
circuit breakers.
Features include:
b reinforced breaking capacity at 380/415 V, by
cascading up to 25 kA
b easy installation in Pragma and Prisma G
enclosures:
v standard 45 mm front cut-out
v circuit breaker clips onto a DIN rail
v reduced depth (82.5 mm).
A switch-disconnector version is also available
(NSA125NA and NSA160NA).
0
4
8
0
1
6
Compact NSA160
Compact circuit breakers NSA160
Number of poles 3, 4
Control manual (toggle, b
direct or extended rotary handle) b
electric -
Connections fxed front connection b
rear connection -
withdrawable front connection -
rear connection -
Mounting on DIN rail b
Front-panel cut-out height 45 mm
Electrical characteristics as per IEC 60947-2
Rated current (A) In 40 C 160
Rated insulation voltage (V) Ui 500
Rated impulse wi hstand volt. (kV)Uimp 8
Rated operational voltage (V) Ue AC 50/60 Hz 500
DC 250
Type of circuit breaker E N
Ultimate breaking capacity Icu AC 220 / 240 V 25 70
(kA rms) 50/60 380 / 415 V 16 36
Hz 440 V 10 18
DC 125 V 5 10
250 V (2P) 5 10
Service breaking capacity Ics % Icu 50 % 100 %
Utilisation category A
Suitability for isolation b
Durability (C-O cycles) mechanical 10000
electrical (In - 440 V) 5000
Protection
Built-in thermal-magnetic trip unit
Ratings In 16 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160
Thermal overload protection Ir fxed threshold
16 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160
Magnetic short-circuit fxed pick-up
protection lm 600 600 600 600 1000 1000 1000 1250 1250 1250
Add-on earth-leakage add-on Vigi module
protection combination wi h Vigirex relay
Indication and control auxiliaries
Indication contacts 1 OF +1 SD
Voltage releases MN or MX
Installation and connections
Connections terminals 1.5 to 70 mm cables
Accessories terminal shields b
depth adjuster b
Dimensions (mm) Compact 3-poles 90 x 120 x 82.5
W x H x D 4-poles 120 x 120 x 82.5
Vigicompact 3-poles 210 x 120 x 82.5
4-poles 240 x 120 x 82.5
Weight (kg) Compact 3-poles 1.1
4-poles 1.4
Vigicompact 3-poles 2.6
4-poles 3.1
Source changeover system
Interlocking systems -
Functions and characteristics

A-41
Vigi earth-leakage protection module
The Vigi earth-leakage protection module may be installed to the right of the circuit
breaker. Connections with the circuit breaker are poss ble to the top or bottom
of the Vigi module (two versions). The connection is supplied with the Vigi module.
Auxiliaries and accessories
Available auxiliaries include:
1 ON/OFF indication contact (OF)
1 trip-indication contact (SD)
1 voltage release (MN undervoltage release or MX shunt trip)
1 extended rotary handle with door locking, directly accessible from outside
the enclosure.
Depth adjuster
This accessory is required to align the front of Multi 9 devices when they are installed
next to a Compact NSA125 or NSA160. Maximum width 324 mm (36 modules).
b
b
b
b
0
4
8
0
1
8
Vigicompact NSA
Characteristics
Number of poles 3, 4
Sensitivity (A) 0.03 / 0.3 / 1 / 3
Time delay intentional (ms) 0 60
(1)
150
(1)
max. break time <40 <140 <150
Rated voltage (V) 50/60 Hz 200 to 440 V
Reset pushbutton
Test pushbutton
Protection against nuisance tripping b
DC-component withstand class A
(1) If the sensitivity is set to 30 mA, there is no time delay, whatever the time-delay setting.

A-42
Motor protection up to 37 kW
Motor rating (kW) 0.37 37
Compact NS80
Breaking H 70
capacity (kA rms)
380/415 V
General circuit-breaker characteristics page A-44
The Compact NS80H-MA circuit breaker is specially designed for motor protection.
Accompanying trip unit page A-44
A built-in MA magnetic trip unit provides short-circuit protection.
Motor protection up to 250 kW
Motor rating (kW) 1.1 110 18.5250
Compact NS100 NS160/250 NS400/630
Breaking N 36 36 50
capacity (kA rms) SX 50 50 -
380/415 V H 70 70 70
L 150 150 150
General circuit-breaker characteristics page A-6
Compact NS100 to 630 circuit breakers for motor protection are the same as those for
distribution systems, but are ftted with specifc motor trip units.
Accompanying trip units page A-45 to page A-49
MA magnetic trip units provide short-circuit protection. Interchangeable ME electronic trip units
provide protection against short-circuits, overloads and phase unbalance.
Motor protection up to 750 kW
Motor rating (kW) 160750
Compact NS630b to 1600
Breaking N 50
capacity (kA rms) H 70
380/415 V L 150
General circuit breaker characteristics page A-8
Compact NS630b to 1600 circuit breakers equipped with Micrologic control units are the same
as those for distribu ion systems.
Accompanying control units page A-16
Micrologic electronic control units may be used on all Compact NS630b to 1600 circuit breakers.
Micrologic 2.0 A and 5 0 A electronic control units provide protection against short-circuits and
overloads. Micrologic 7.0 A provides the same protection functions, plus earth-leakage
protection.
Motor protection
Overview of solutions
The circuit breakers presented here provide protection
against short circuits and are suitable for isolation as
defned by standard IEC 60947-2.
For complete protection of the motor and its control
device, overload protection may be provided by either
the circuit breaker or a separate Telemecanique
thermal relay.
The control device may be of the direct on-line type
(with or without reversing) or of the star-delta type.
Combinations are governed by standard IEC 60947-4.1.
Protection coordination (as defned by
IEC 60947-4)
Whatever the power of the motor, the coordination
between the circuit breaker, contactor and relay
can be of either type 1 or 2.
Selection depends on operational requirements
concerning continuity of service and the technical
skills of servicing personnel.
All type 2 Merlin Gerin/Telemecanique
combinations have been tested under the
conditions defned by standards and they are
certifed ASEFA/LOVAG.
P
B
1
0
1
0
5
1
_
1
3
0
4
6
7
5
1
P
B
1
0
1
0
4
9
_
1
2
E
2
6
9
8
8
Functions and characteristics
D
B
1
1
2
5
3
0

A-43
Selection of a trip unit or Micrologic control unit
D
B
1
0
6
8
8
1
P (kW) (400 V, 50 Hz)
Ir (A)
Compact
NS100 NS250
Compact
NS80H-MA
Compact
NS400 NS630
MA
MA
STR22ME
0.37
1.5
18.5
40
5.5
12 50
37
80 100 160 200
110
220
160
320
250
500 800
560
1000
750
1350
1.1
2.5
Compact
NS630b NS1600
Micrologic 2.0 A / 5.0 A / 7.0 A
STR43ME
MA

A-44
Motor protection
Compact NS80H-MA
This circuit breaker is specially designed for the
protection of motors rated up to 37 kW:
b due to its high current-limiting capacity, it effectively
protects motor starters (type-2 coordination as per IEC
60947-4, with contactors)
b small size for easy installation in motor control centre
(MCC) switchboards.
0
4
6
7
5
1
Compact NS80H-MA
Compact circuit breakers NS80H-MA
Number of poles 3
Control manual (toggle, b
direct or extended rotary handle) b
electric -
Connections fxed front connection b
rear connection -
withdrawable front connection -
rear connection -
Electrical characteristics as per IEC 60947-2
Rated current (A) In 65 C 80
Rated insulation voltage (V) Ui 750
Rated impulse wi hstand voltage (kV) Uimp 8
Rated operational voltage (V) Ue AC 50/60 Hz 690
Ultimate breaking
capacity (kA rms)
Icu AC 50/60 Hz 220 / 240 V 100
380 / 415 V 70
440 V 65
500 V 25
525 V 25
660/690 V 6
Service breaking capacity Ics % Icu 100 %
Utilisation category A
Suitability for isolation b
Durability (C-O cycles) mechanical 20000
electrical 440 V In/2 10000
In 7000
Electrical characteristics as per Nema AB1
Breaking capacity (kA) 240 V 100
480 V 65
600 V 10
Protection
Magnetic trip unit built-in
Rating In 1.5 2.5 6.3 12.5 25 50 80
Instantaneous short-circuit Im adjustable pick-up
protection 6 14 x In
Ear h-leakage protection combination with Vigirex relay
Indication and control auxiliaries
Indication contacts 1 OF +1 SD
Voltage releases MN or MX
Installation and connections
Connections built-in terminals
Terminal extensions and spreaders -
Terminal shields b
Interphase barriers -
DIN rail plate b
Dimensions (mm) W x H x D 90 x 120 x 80
Weight (kg) 1.0
Functions and characteristics

A-45
Compact NS100 to 630 circuit breakers, equipped with
an MA magnetic trip unit with adjustable thresholds,
offer:
b short-circuit protection
b suitability for isolation.
Compact NS100 to 630 circuit breakers and the trip
unit are supplied already assembled.
Compact NS100 to 630 circuit breakers
with MA magnetic trip units
P
B
1
0
1
0
4
9
_
2
7
Compact NS250H-MA
P
B
1
0
1
0
5
1
_
3
2
Compact NS400H-MA
General circuit-breaker characteristics page A-6
MA trip units
Rating (A) at 65 C In 2.5 6.3 12.5 25 50 100 150 220 320 500
Compact N/H/L NS100 b b b b b b - - - -
circuit breaker NS160 - - - b b b b - - -
NS250 - - - - - b b b - -
H/L NS400 - - - - - - - - b -
NS630 - - - - - - - - - b
Short-circuit protection (magnetic)
Pick-up Im setting setting setting
NS100 6...14 x In - -
NS160/250 - 9...14 x In -
NS400 (HMA 320) - - 6...14 x In
NS400 (LMA 320) - - 5...10 x In
NS630 H/L MAE500 - - 6...13 x In

A-46
Motor protection
Compact NS100 to 250
circuit breakers with STR22ME
electronic trip unit
Compact NS100 to 250 circuit breakers
See the circuit breakers for distribution systems on page A-6.
STR22ME electronic trip unit
Protection
Overload protection
LT (long time) protection with adjustable Ir threshold, in compliance with tripping
class 10 as defned by IEC 60947-4.
Short-circuit protection
Short-time and instantaneous protection:
short-time protection with fxed pick-up (Im = 13 x Ir) and tripping delay
instantaneous protection with fxed pick-up (15 x In).
Phase-unbalance protection
This function complies with the stipulations of standard IEC 60947-4.1 and trips the
circuit breaker whenever a phase-current unbalance of 40 % or more occurs. The
circuit-breaker opening time is between 3.5 and 6 seconds.
Overload LED (%Ir)
A LED on the front indicates the percent load:
OFF: I <1.05 Ir
fashing: I u 1.05 Ir.
Test
A mini test kit or a portable test kit may be connected to the test connector on the
front to check circuit-breaker operation after installing the trip unit or accessories.
Optional SDTAM contactor tripping module
(Early-break thermal-fault signal)
This module can be installed in place of the MN or MX release. It operates 300 ms
before the circuit breaker trips on an overload.
The SDTAM module can be used to open a contactor when an overload occurs,
thereby avoiding the opening of the circuit breaker.
It can also be used without a contactor to provide an overload indication on the
STR22ME trip unit, thereby making it possible to differentiate between tripping on
overloads and short-circuits.
Characteristics
compatible with the following control voltages:
24 to 72 V DC and 24 to 48 V AC
110 to 240 V AC / DC
replaces the MN and MX voltage releases.
b
b
b
b
b
v
v
b
Compact NS100 to 250 circuit breakers, equipped with
an STR22ME electronic trip unit with adjustable
thresholds, offer:
b short-circuit protection
b phase-unbalance protection
b overload protection
b suitability for isolation.
P
B
1
0
1
0
5
0
_
3
3
Compact NS250 equipped with
an STR22ME electronic trip unit
Functions and characteristics

A-47
long-time threshold
tripping class 10 as defned by IEC 60947-4
short-time pick-up
short-time tripping delay
instantaneous pick-up
test connector
percent load indication
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
E
2
6
9
8
5
t
0 Ir 13Ir I
1
2
3
4
5
E
9
4
5
2
1
Overload protection settings (A)
Rating (A) thresholds (A)
20 12 12.6 13.4 14.2 15 16 17 18 19 20
25 15 15.7 16.7 17.7 18.7 20 21.2 22.5 23.7 25
40 24 25.5 27 28.5 30 32 34 36 38 40
50 30 31.5 33.5 35.5 37.5 40 42.5 45 47.5 50
80 48 51 54 57 60 64 68 72 76 80
100 60 63 67 71 75 80 85 90 95 100
150 90 95 101 107 113 120 127 135 142 150
220 132 140 148 157 166 177 187 198 209 220
STR22ME trip unit
Ratings (A) 20 to 70 C In 20100 150 220
NS100N/H/L b - -
NS160N/H/L b b -
NS250N/H/L b b b
Overload protection (Long Time)
Current setting Ir adjustable, 10 settings
0.6...1 x In
Tripping class 10
(IEC 60947-4)
Time delay (s) fxed
(minmax.) at 1.5 x Ir 120320
at 6 x Ir 615
at 7.2 Ir 410
Motor-overload indication LED
Phase-unbalance protection in compliance with IEC 60947-4.1
Tripping hreshold u 40 % unbalance
Time delay 3 5 to 6 seconds
Short-circuit protection (Short Time)
Pick-up Isd fxed
13 x Ir
Accuracy 20 %
Max. resettable time (ms) fxed
10
Max. break time 60
Short-circuit protection (Instantaneous)
Pick-up Ii fxed
15 x In
Options
SDTAM module b

A-48
Motor protection
Compact NS400 to 630
circuit breakers with STR43ME
electronic trip unit
Compact NS400 to 630 circuit breakers, equipped with
an STR43ME electronic trip unit with adjustable
thresholds, offer:
b short-circuit protection
b phase-unbalance protection
b overload protection
b suitability for isolation.
Compact NS400 to 630 circuit breakers
See the circuit breakers for distribution systems on page A-6.
STR43ME electronic trip unit
Protection
Overload protection
True (rms) long-time protection with an adjustable threshold:
Io base setting (5 settings from 0.5 to 0.8) and Ir fne adjustment
(8 settings from 0.8 to 1)
adjustable tripping delay, in compliance with tripping classes 10A, 10 and 20 as
defned by IEC 60947-4.
The STR43ME offers two motor-cooling time constants, associated with the motor
starting class:
short cooling time constant (the same as the heating time constant), providing
maximum continuity of service and satisfactory motor protection
long cooling time constant (four times the heating time constant), providing
maximum motor protection.
Short-circuit protection
Short-time and instantaneous protection:
short-time prot
This function complies with the stipulations of standard IEC 60947-4.1 and trips
the circuit breaker whenever a phase-current unbalance of 40 % or more occurs.
The circuit-breaker opening time is 4 seconds 10 %.
Indications: Overload LED (%Ir)
A LED on the front indicates the percent load:
OFF: I <1.05 Ir
fashing: I u 1.05 Ir
Fault indications
LEDs indicate the type of fault that caused tripping:
overload (long-time protection) or abnormal component temperature (>Ir)
short-circuit (short-time protection) or instantaneous (>Isd)
phase unbalance (LED on the right)
microprocessor malfunction:
all four (%Ir), (>Ir), (>Isd) and (phase unbalance) LEDs ON.
Battery powered. Spare batteries are supplied in an adapter box. When a fault
occurs, the LED indicating the type of fault goes OFF after approximately ten
minutes to conserve battery power. The information is however stored in memory
and the LED can be turned back ON by pressing the battery/LED test pushbutton.
The LED automatically goes OFF and the memory is cleared when the circuit
breaker is reset.
Test
A mini test kit or a portable test kit may be connected to the test connector on the
front to check circuit-breaker operation after installing the trip unit or accessories.
The test pushbutton tests the battery and the LEDs.
Self monitoring
The circuit breaker trips if a microprocessor fault or an abnormal temperature is
detected.
Options
Three options are available:
ammeter (I)
contactor tripping module (SDTAM)
communication (COM).
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
v
b
b
b
P
B
1
0
1
0
5
2
_
3
6
Compact NS630 equipped with an
STR43ME electronic trip unit
Functions and characteristics

A-49
long-time threshold
tripping class
short-time pick-up
short-time tripping delay
instantaneous pick-up
test connector
percent load indication
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Possible
combinations:
I
I + COM
SDTAM
SDTAM + I
SDTAM + I + COM
b
b
b
b
b
Options for STR43ME trip unit
Ammeter (I)
A digital display continuously indicates the current of the phase with the greatest
load. The value of each current I1, I2, I3 and the long-time current setting Ir may be
successively displayed by pressing a scroll button.
LEDs indicate the phase for which the current is displayed.
Ammeter display limits
b minimum current u 0.2 x In. Lower currents are not displayed
b maximum current y 10 x In.
Optional SDTAM contactor tripping module
(Early-break thermal-fault signal)
See the information on this optional module on page A-42.
Communication (COM)
This option transmits data to Digipact distribution monitoring and control modules.
Transmitted data:
b settings
b phase currents (rms values)
b highest current of the three phases
b overload-condition alarm
b cause of tripping (overload, short-circuit, etc.).
E
2
6
9
8
7
0 Ir Isd Ii I
1
2
3
4
5
t
STR43ME trip unit
Ratings (A) 20 to 70 C Ir 120 200 320 500
Circuit NS400N/H/L b b b -
breakers NS630N/H/L - - - b
Overload protection (Long Time)
Current setting Ir adjustable, 40 settings - 0.4...0.8 x In
Tripping class 10A, 10, 20
(IEC 60947-4)
Time delay (s) adjustable
(min. ... max.) at 1.5 x Ir 144198 270357 433595
at 6 x Ir 5 87.3 10.913.1 17.421.8
at 7.2 Ir 45 7.39.1 1215
Phase-unbalance protection in compliance with IEC 60947-4.1
Tripping hreshold u 40 % unbalance
Time delay 4 s 10 %
Short-circuit protection (Short Time)
Pick-up Isd adjustable, 8 settings - 6...13 x Ir
Accuracy 15 %
Time delay (ms) fxed
max. resettable time 10
max. break time 60
Short-circuit protection (Instantaneous)
Pick-up Ii fxed - 13 x Ir max.
Other functions
Motor-overload LED b
Indications module b
Options
Ammeter (I) b
SDTAM module b
Communication (COM) b
E
3
2
5
6
6
STR 43 ME
Io
x In
-
test
+
3 1
90 93
95
98
1
88
85
8
9 10
11
12
13
8
7
6
x Io
Ir Isd
x Ir
%Ir >Ir >Isd
A
Ir I1 I2 I3
Isd Ir li
tr
tsd
class
6 7
71 8
63
56
5
8
20
10
10A
20
10
10A
tr
2
IEC 947-4-1

A-50
Compact NSC100
Rated current (A) 12.5 100
UL 508 / IEC 60947-2 / CSA22-2
Breaking
capacity (kA rms)
380/480 V
N 18
General circuit-breaker characteristics page A-51
Compact NSC100 circuit breakers are specially designed to protect industrial control panels.
Accompanying trip unit page A-52
The built-in TMD thermal-magnetic trip unit provides:
b overload protection (adjustable-threshold hermal device)
b short-circuit protection (fxed-pick-up magnetic device).
Compact NS100 to 630
Rated current (A) 12.5 12.5 ... 12.5 ... 60 ... 250 ...
100 160 250 400 630
Compact NS100 NS160 NS250 NS400 NS630
UL 508 / IEC 60947-2 / CSA22-2 IEC 60947-2
Breaking N 35 35 35 42 42
capacity (kA rms) SX 50 50 50 - -
380/480 V H 65 65 65 65 65
General circuit-breaker characteristics page A-6
Compact NS100 to 630 circuit breakers are designed for protection of distribution systems and
are also suitable for protec ion of industrial control panels.
Accompanying trip unit page A-10 to page A-15
The trip units are interchangeable.
Compact NS100 to 250 circuit breakers are equipped with TMD thermal-magnetic or STR
electronic trip units.
Compact NS400 to 630 circuit breakers are equipped exclusively with STR electronic trip units.
Compact NS circuit breakers are specially designed to
protect incoming feeders and groups of outgoing
circuits on industrial control panels:
b compliance with standards applicable worldwide
including IEC 60947-2 and UL 508 / CSA 22-2 no. 14
b overload and short-circuit protection
b isolation with positive contact indication, making it
possible to service machines safely by isolating them
from all power sources
b installation in universal and functional type
enclosures
b NA switch-disconnector version.
Protection of industrial control
panels
Overview of solutions
Functions and characteristics
E
4
4
3
5
6
0
5
4
5
5
6
P
B
1
0
1
0
4
9
_
1
2
P
B
1
0
1
0
5
1
_
1
3

A-51
Circuit breaker NSC100N
Compact NS100N circuit breakers are specially
designed to protect incoming feeders and groups of
outgoing circuits on industrial control panels.
The NSC100NA switch-disconnector version is also
available.
Compact circuit breaker NSC100N
Number of poles 3, 4
Control manual (toggle, b
direct or extended rotary handle) b
electric -
Connections fxed front connection b
rear connection -
with-
drawable
front connection -
rear connection -
Mounting on DIN rail b
Electrical characteristics as per IEC 60947-2
Rated current (A) In 40 C 100
Rated insula ion Ui 750
voltage (V)
Rated impulse Uimp 8
withstand voltage (kV)
Rated operational voltage (V) Ue AC 50/60 Hz 690
DC 250
Ultimate breaking capacity Icu AC 220/240 V 42
(kA rms) 50/60 380/415 V 18
Hz 440 V 18
500 V 10
525 V 10
DC 125 V 5
250 V (2P) 5
Service breaking capacity Ics % Icu 100 %
Utilisation category A
Suitability for isolation b
Durability (C-O cycles) mechanical 20000
electrical 440 V In/2 10000
In 7000
Electrical characteristics as per UL 508
Breaking capacity (kA) AC 50/60 Hz 240 V 42
480 V 18
600 V 10
Protection
Built-in thermal-magnetic trip unit
Ratings In 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 70 80 100
Instantaneous short-circuit lm fxed pick-up
protection (A) 600 600 600 600 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1250
Add-on earth-leakage add-on Vigi module
protection combination with Vigirex relay
Indication and control auxiliaries
Auxiliary contacts b
Early-make or early-break contact b
Voltage releases MN or MX
Installation and connections
Connection built-in terminals
Accessories terminal shields b
interphase barriers -
escutcheons b
Dimensions (mm) 3 P 90 x 120 x 80
W x H x D 4 P 120 x 120 x 80
Weight (kg) 3 P 1.0
4 P 1.3
Vigi earth-leakage protection module
The Vigi earth-leakage protection module may be installed to the right of the circuit
breaker. Connections with the circuit breaker are poss ble to the top or bottom of the
Vigi module (two versions). The connection is supplied with the Vigi module.
Characteristics
Number of poles 3, 4
Sensitivity (A) 0.03 / 0.3 / 1 / 3
Time delay intentional (ms) 0 60
(1)
150
(1)
max. break time <40 <140 <150
Rated voltage (V) 50/60 Hz 200 to 440 V
Reset pushbutton
Test pushbutton
Protection against nuisance tripping b
DC-component withstand class A
(1) If the sensitivity is set to 30 mA, there is no time delay, whatever the time-delay setting.
D
B
1
1
5
6
4
1
Compact NSC100N
D
B
1
1
5
6
4
2
Vigicompact NSC100N

A-52
Protection of industrial control
panels
Trip units, auxiliaries,
installation enclosures
Functions and characteristics
STR electronic trip units are designed for:
short-circuit protection
overload protection
phase-failure protection (STR22ME and STR43ME).
TMD thermal-magnetic trip units are designed for:
short-circuit protection
overload protection.
Type NA devices are switch-disconnectors which must always be protected
upstream in accordance with applicable installation standards.
Circuit breakers trip units UL/CSA approvals
NSC100N TMD "Manual Motor Controller:
NA Across the line starter &
General use"
NS100/160/250 N/SX/H STR22ME "Manual Motor Controller:
NA Across the line starter"
TMD "Manual Motor Controller:
STR22SE/GE General Use"
NS400/630 N/H STR43ME
NA
STR23SE
STR53UE
Auxiliaries
All auxiliaries can be added to the circuit breaker by the user:
padlocking devices (in the OFF position)
rotary handle
status-indication auxiliary contacts (ON, OFF and tripped)
shunt (MX) or undervoltage (MN) releases
early-make or early-break contacts.
Rotary handle
Available in direct or extended versions for mounting up to 590 mm behind front.
Versions include:
black front with black handle
yellow front with red handle (for machine tools or emergency off as per IEC 204 /
VDE 0013).
All rotary handles can be padlocked in the OFF position.
Optional door interlock, recommended for MCC panels (motor control centres).
Early-make or early-break contacts
These auxiliary contacts make it possible to de-energise the downstream auxiliary
circuits of the control panel as well as the auxiliary circuits supplying the MN release,
if applicable.
Installation in an enclosure
Compact circuit breakers can be installed in a metal enclosure together with other
devices (contactors, motor-protection circuit breakers, LEDs, etc.)
Minimum enclosure dimensions
Circuit breakers Height (mm) Depth (mm) Width (mm)
NSC100N 300 150 200
NS100 N/SX/H 457 130 208
NS160 N/SX/H 457 130 208
NS250 N/SX/H 457 130 208
NS400 N/H - - -
NS630 N/H - - -
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
Trip-unit selection
E
5
8
7
1
3
P (hp) (480 V, 3P)
Ir (A)
Compact
NS100...NS250
Compact
NSC100N
Compact
NS400...NS630
TMD
STR22ME
STR43ME / STR23SE / STR53UE
3
12
20
32
15
25
30
40
30
48
40
63
50
70
60
80
75
100
125
160
150
205
10
16
150
220
250
320
400
500
E
4
4
4
5
8
W
D
H
Installation enclosure

A-53
UL508 / CSA 22-2 no. 14 marking
The UL508 / CSA 22-2 no. 14 approval is for a Manual
Motor Controller (across the line starter or general
use).
The circuit breakers are 100 % rated.
UL / CSA logo
Cable cross-section
and tightening torques
Breaking capacity
UL / CSA logo
Cable cross-section
and tightening torques
Breaking capacity
Horsepower rating
D
B
1
1
5
6
4
3
wire size
tightening torque
lb-inch Nm
14 AWG to 3/0 AWG Cu
12 AWG to 4/0 AWG Al
50
temperature rating
75C
5.5
LISTED MAN. MOTOR. CTRL.
34XL
NSC100N-NA
Vac 115 230 460 575
ratings (A) hp
1 ph 3 ph 1 ph 3 ph 1 ph 3 ph 1 ph 3 ph
16
20
25
32
40
50
63
70
80
100
1
1.5
2
2
3
3
5
5
7.5
10
2
3
5
5
7.5
10
10
10
3
10
10
15
15
15
20
7.5
5
2
3
3
5
5
7.5
10
10
15
20
25
30
30
5
7.5
10
10
15
20
25
30
30
40
10
10
15
20
30
30
40
50
60
75
7.5
10
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
40
10
15
20
30
30
40
60
60
75
100

tripping current 125% 100% rated

This MMC is suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering
not more than the short-circuit current rating of this MMC
indicated here below, or the upstream protective device
interrupting capability, whichever is less, when protected by
any protective device for Group fusing or Group installation.
SC current rating kA 50/60 Hz
Vac
240
480
600
42
25
10
NSC100 device marking
(circuit breaker with built-in trip unit)
E
4
2
6
5
0
SC current rating kA 50/60 Hz
Vac
240
480
600
tripping current 125% 100% rated
wire size
tightening torque
lb-inch Nm
14 AWG to 3/0 AWG Cu
12 AWG to 4/0 AWG Al
130 11.3
LISTED MAN. MOTOR. CTRL.
34XL
NS100-160-250 N/H/NA
85
25
10
85
65
10
85
35
10
85
65
10
temperature rating
75C
N H N H
NS100 NS250
4 AWG to 2 AWG Cu,Al 180 20
1 AWG to 350 kcmil Cu,Al 230 26
Terminal kit
reference
3P 4P
29242 29243
29259 29260

Equipped with TMD/DE or STR trip unit

This MMC is suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering
not more than the short-circuit current rating of this MMC
indicated here below, or the upstream protective device
interrupting capability, whichever is less, when protected by
any protective device for Group fusing or Group installation.
NS160
85
35
18
85
65
18
N H
0
5
6
2
4
E
NS100 to 250 device marking
(circuit breaker with interchangeable trip unit)
E
4
2
6
5
1
test
+ -
IEC 947.4 / cl.10
A
Ir
198
209
148
157
166 177
187
140
220 132
Ir 13Ir
7,2 Ir
7,0 s
STR 22 ME In=220A
>
1,05 Ir
Vac
115
230
460
575
15
50
50
50
40
75
200
150
1ph 3ph
hp
220A
100% rated
Trip-unit marking

A-54
Circuit breakers equipped with an add-on Vigi module
(Vigicompact)
Rated current (A) 100 630
Vigicompact NSC100 N NS100 to 250
NSA160 N/E NS400 and 630
NS125 E
General circuit breaker characteristics page A-6, page A-40 and page A-51
Compact NS100 to 630 and NSA160 circuit breakers are presented in the Protection of
distribution systemssection and the Compact NSC100 circuit breaker is presented in the
Protection of industrial control panelssection.
Accompanying Vigi modules
Ear h-leakage protection is achieved by installing a Vigi module directly on the circuit breaker
terminals.
Circuit breakers equipped with a control unit offering integrated
earth-leakage protection and an external rectangular sensor
Rated current (A) 630 3200
Compact NS630b to 1000 N/H/L NS1600b to 3200
NS1250 and 1600 N/H
General circuit breaker characteristics page A-8
Compact NS630b to 3200 circuit breakers are presented in the Protection of distribution
systemssection.
Accompanying control units page A-18
Micrologic 7.0 A electronic control units offer earth-leakage protection as standard.
Earth-leakage protection using a Vigirex relay
Earth-leakage relay Separate toroids Rectangular sensors
Compact circuit breaker + Vigirex relay combination
Vigirex relays may be used to add external earth-leakage protection to Compact NS circuit
breakers. The circuit breakers must be equipped wi h an MN or MX voltage release. Vigirex
relays are very useful when special time-delay or tripping-threshold values are required, or when
there are major installation constraints (circuit breaker already installed and connected, limited
space available, etc.).
Vigirex-relay characteristics:
sensitivity adjustable from 30 mA to 250 mA and 9 time-delay settings (0 to 4.5 second)
closed toroids up to 630 A (30 to 300 mm in diameter), split toroids up to 250 A (46 to 110 mm
in diameter) or rectangular sensors up to 3200 A
400 Hz distribution systems.
Options:
trip alarm by a fail-safe contact
pre-alarm LED and contact, etc.
Compliance with standards:
IEC 60947-2, appendix M
IEC/EN 60755: general requirements for residual current operated protective devices
IEC/EN 6100-4-2 to 4-6: immunity tests
CISPR11: radio-frequency radiated and conducted emission tests
UL1053 and CSA22.2 No. 144 for RH10, RH21 and RH99 relays at supply voltages up to and
including 220/240 V.
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
Functions and characteristics
Earth-leakage protection
Overview of solutions
Earth-leakage protection is obtained by:
b ftting a Vigi module on the circuit breaker (Compact
NS100 to 630)
b installing a Micrologic 7.0 A control unit (Compact
NS630b to 3200)
b using a Vigirex relay and separate sensors (all
Compact circuit breakers).
0
4
4
3
3
3
0
4
8
0
1
8
E
4
5
1
7
8
P
B
1
0
1
2
0
6
_
2
0
0
4
4
3
2
20
5
1
3
5
2
0
5
9
4
7
6
S
-
2
7

A-55
sensitivity setting
time-delay setting (for selective earth-fault protection)
lead-seal fxture for controlled access to settings
test button simulating an earth-fault for regular checks on
the tripping function
reset button (reset required after earth-fault tripping)
rating plate
housing for SDV auxiliary contact
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Note.
The Vigi module for the Compact NSA160 circuit breaker is presented on page A-41 .
Plug-in circuit breaker
The Vigi module can be installed on a plug-in base.
Special accessories are required (see the section on
part numbers).
Vigicompact NSA160 and NSC100 circuit breakers
with earth-leakage protection
See page A-41 and page A-51, respectively.
Vigicompact NS100 to 630 circuit breakers
with earth-leakage protection
Addition of the Vigi module does not alter circuit breaker characteristics:
compliance with standards
degree of protection, class II front-face isolation
positive contact indication
electrical characteristics
trip-unit characteristics
installation and connection modes
indication, measurement and control auxiliaries
installation and connection accessories.
Dimensions and weights NS100/160 NS250 NS400/630
Dimensions 3 poles 105 x 236 x 86 135 x 355 x 110
W x H x D (mm) 4 poles 140 x 236 x 86 180 x 355 x 110
Weight (kg) 3 poles 2.5 2.8 8.8
4 poles 3.2 3.4 10.8
Vigi earth-leakage protection module
Compliance with standards:
IEC 60947-2, appendix B
French decree dated 14 November 1988
IEC 60255-4 and IEC 60801-2 to 5 covering protection against nuisance tripping
due to transient overvoltages, lightning strikes, switching of devices on the
distribution system, electrostatic discharges, radiofrequency interference.
IEC 60755, class A, immunity to DC components up to 6 mA
VDE 664, operation down to -25 C.
Remote indications
Vigi modules may be equipped with an auxiliary contact (SDV) to remotely signal
tripping due to an earth fault.
Power supply
Vigi modules are self-supplied internally by the distribution-system voltage and
therefore do not require any external source. They continue to function even when
supplied by only two phases.
Vigi module selection table
Vigi ME Vigi MH Vigi MB
Number of poles 3, 4
(1)
3, 4
(1)
3, 4
(1)
NS125 E
b b
-
NS100
b b
-
NS160
b b
-
NS250 -
b
-
NS400 - -
b
NS630 - -
b
Protection characteristics
Sensitivity fxed adjustable adjustable
In (A) 0.3 0.03 - 0.3 - 1 - 3 - 10 0.3 - 1 - 3 - 10 - 30
Time delay
Inten ional fxed adjustable adjustable
delay (ms) <40 0 60
(2)
150
(2)
310
(2)
0 60 150 310
Max. breaking <40 <40 <140 <300 <800 <40 <140 <300 <800
time (ms)
Rated voltage 200...440 200... 440 - 440...550 200...440 - 440...550
V AC 50/60 Hz
(1) Vigi 3P modules may also be used on 3P circuit breakers used for single-phase or two-phase
protection.
(2) If the sensitivity is set to 30 mA, there is no time delay, whatever the time-delay setting.
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
Add-on Vigi module (Vigicompact)
for Compact NS100 to 630
0
4
4
3
3
3
Vigicompact NS250N
E
2
1
0
0
7

vigi
200/440V 50/60Hz
2 4 6
1 3 5
T
NS 250
before d electric test
remove th s cover
avant test di lectr que
enlever ce couvercle
N
310
150
60
0
0 03 ( t 0 )
vigi MH
3
1
0 3
t(ms)
In(A)
10
HS
T R
1 2 3 4 5 6 7

A-56
Functions and characteristics
Control and isolation
Overview of solutions
Switch-disconnectors
E
9
4
9
1
5
Masterpact
NW or NT
Masterpact
NT
Circuit breaker-
disconnector
Switch-
disconnector
Masterpact
Compact NS Interpact IN
Compact NS
Interpact INS Compact NS
Multi 9
Vario
NG125 Interpact INS
standardised symbols
E
5
8
8
8
0
E
4
5
1
7
9
0
5
2
1
6
4
P
B
1
0
1
0
4
3
_
1
0
8
6
1
0
6
d
E
4
5
1
8
2
0
3
5
0
5
0
0
5
6
3
8
5
0
5
4
3
6
1
0
5
4
6
2
9
Masterpact
NW

A-57
Compact switch-disconnectors are used to control and
isolate electrical distribution circuits. In addition to
these basic functions, other functions for safety, remote
control and convenience include:
b earth-leakage protection
b auxiliary MN/MX releases
b remote operation
b ammeter, etc.
Compact switch-disconnectors may be interlocked with
another Compact switch-disconnector or circuit
breaker to constitute a source-changeover system.
8
6
0
8
7
Compact NS250 switch-disconnector
0
5
3
0
3
9
Compact switch-disconnector
equipped with a Vigi earth-
leakage module
0
5
3
0
4
1
Compact switch-disconnector equipped
with a motor mechanism
0
4
4
3
1
3

MN/MX
voltage
release

A-58
Compact switch-disconnectors
Number of poles
Control manual toggle
direct or extended rotary handle
electric
Connections fxed front connection
rear connection
withdrawable front connection
rear connection
Built-in connectors for 1.5 to 90 mm
2
cables
Mounting on DIN rail
Front-panel cutout 45 mm high
Electrical characteristics as per IEC 60947-3 and EN 60947-3
Conventional thermal current (A) Ith 60 C 12 1
Rated insulation voltage (V) Ui
Rated impulse withstand voltage (kV) Uimp
Rated operational voltage (V) Ue AC 50/60 Hz
DC 2 2
Rated operational current le AC 50/60 Hz
220/240 V 12 12 1 1
380/415 V 12 12 1 1
440/480 V 12 12 1 1
Short-circuit making capacity lcm (kA peak) minimum (switch-disconnector alone) 2 1
maximum (with protection circuit
breaker upstream)
Short-time withstand current lcw (A rms) 1 s 1
3 s 1
20 s
Suitability for isolation
Durability (C-O cycles) mechanical 1
electrical AC 440 V AC22A
440 V AC23A
DC 250 V DC23A
Positive contact indication
Pollution degree
Protection
Add-on earth-leakage protec ion add-on Vigi module
combination with Vigirex relay
Additional indication and control auxiliaries
Indication contacts 1 1
Voltage releases
Installation and connection
Accessories

Dimensions (mm) fxed, front connection 2/3P 12 2
W x H x D 4P 12 12
Weight (kg) fxed, front connection 3P 1 1
4P 1
Source-changeover system (see section on " source-changeover systems" )
Manual source-changeover systems
Installation standards require upstream protection.
However, due to their high-set magnetic release,
Compact NSA125NA and NSA160NA switch-
disconnectors are self protected.
Control and disconnection
Compact NSA125NA and NSA160NA
switch-disconnectors
Functions and characteristics
8
6
0
8
5
Compact NSA125NA

A-59
NSA125NA NSA160NA
3, 4 3, 4
b b
b b
- -
b b
- -
- -
- -
1
2
b b
b b
b b

125 160
500 500
8 8
500 500
250 250
AC22A AC23A AC22A AC23A
22 2 125 125 160 160
1 125 125 160 160
125 125 160 160
2.1
330

1 1500
1500
2 580
b
10000
22 5000
2 5000
2 2 5000
b
3

b
b

1 OF +1 SD
MN or MX

terminal shields
depth adjuster
2 90 x 120 x 82.5
120 x 120 x 80
1.1
1.4

b

A-60
Compact switch-disconnectors
Number of poles 2 2 2
Control manual toggle
direct or extended rotary handle
electric
Connections fxed front connection
rear connection
plug-in (on base) front connection
rear connection
withdrawable (on chassis) front connection
rear connection
Electrical characteristics as per IEC 60947-3 and EN 60947-3
Conventional thermal current (A) Ith 60 C 1 1 1 2
Rated insulation voltage (V) Ui
Rated impulse withstand voltage (kV) Uimp
Rated operational voltage (V) Ue AC 50/60 Hz
DC 2
Rated operational current le AC 50/60 Hz
220/240 V 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2
380/415 V 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2
440/480 V
(2)
1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2
500/525 V 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2
660/690 V 1 1 1 1 2 2
DC
250 V (1 P) 1 1 1 1 2 2
500 V (2 P in series) 1 1 1 1 2 2
Short-circuit making capacity lcm (kA peak) minimum (switch-disconnector alone) 2 1 2 1
maximum (with protection
circuit breaker upstream)
Short-time withstand current lcw (A rms) 1 s 1 1 2
3 s 1 1 2
20 s 1 1 2 2
Suitability for isolation
Durability (C-O cycles) mechanical 2 2 1 1
electrical AC 690 V AC22A 2 1 1
440 V AC23A 2 2 2 1 2 2 12 2 2
DC 250 V DC23A 2 2 2 1 2 2 12 2 2
Positive contact indication
Pollution degree
Protection
Add-on earth-leakage protec ion add-on Vigi module
combination with Vigirex relay
Additional indication and control auxiliaries
Indication contacts
Voltage releases MX shunt release
MN undervoltage release
Voltage-presence indicator
Current-transformer module
Ammeter module
Insulation-monitoring module
Remote communication by bus
Device status indications (communica ing auxiliary contacts)
Device remote operation (communicating motor mechanism)
Installation
Accessories terminal extensions and spreaders
terminal shields and interphase barriers
escutcheons
Dimensions (mm) fxed, front connection 2/3P 12 1 1 1 1 2 11
W x H x D 4P 12 12 1 1 1 1 2 11
Weight (kg) fxed, front connection 3P 1 1 2
4P 1 2 2 2 2
Source-changeover system (see section " on source-changeover systems" )
Manual source-changeover systems
Remote-operated and automatic source-changeover systems
Control and disconnection
Compact NSC100NA and
NS100NA to 630NA
switch-disconnectors
Installation standards require upstream protection.
However, due to their high-set magnetic release,
Compact NSC100NA and NS100NA to 630NA switch-
disconnectors are self protected.
Functions and characteristics
8
6
0
8
7
Compact NS100NA
(1) 2P in 3P case
(2) Suitable for 480 V NEMA

A-61
NSC100NA NS100NA NS160NA NS250NA NS400NA NS630NA
3, 4 2
(1)
, 3, 4 2
(1)
, 3, 4 2
(1)
, 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4
b b b b b b
b b b b b b
- b b b b b
b b b b b b
- b b b b b
- b b b b b
- b b b b b
- b b b b b
- b b b b b

100 100 160 250 400 630
750 750 750 750 750 750
8 8 8 8 8 8
690 690 690 690 690 690
250 500 500 500 500 500
AC22A AC23A AC22A AC23A AC22A AC23A AC22A AC23A AC22A AC23A AC22A AC23A
22 2 100 100 100 100 160 160 250 250 400 400 630 630
1 100 100 100 100 160 160 250 250 400 400 630 630
100 100 100 100 160 160 250 250 400 400 630 630
2 100 100 100 100 160 160 250 250 400 400 630 630
- - 100 100 160 160 250 250 400 400 630 630
DC22A DC23A DC22A DC23A DC22A DC23A DC22A DC23A DC22A DC23A DC22A DC23A
2 1 - - 100 100 160 160 250 250 400 400 630 630
2 - - 100 100 160 160 250 250 400 400 630 630
2.1 2.6 3.6 4.9 7.1 8.5
330 330 330 330 330 330

1 1500 1800 2500 3500 5000 6000
1500 1800 2500 3500 5000 6000
2 580 690 960 1350 1930 2320
b b b b b b
20000 50000 40000 20000 15000 15000
22 7000 50000 40000 20000 15000 15000
2 7000 30000 (50000 - In/2) 20000 (40000 - In/2) 10000 (20000 - In/2) 6000 (12000 - In/2) 4000 (8000 - In/2)
2 2 7000 30000 (50000 - In/2) 20000 (40000 - In/2) 10000 (20000 - In/2) 6000 (12000 - In/2) 4000 (8000 - In/2)
b b b b b b
3 3 3 3 3 3

b b b
b b b

b b b
b b b
b b b
- b b
- b b
- b b
- b b

b b b
- b b
b b b
b b b
b b b
2 90 x 120 x 80 105 x 161 x 86 140 x 255 x 110
120 x 120 x 80 140 x 161 x 86 185 x 255 x 110
0.9 1.5 to 1.8 5.2
1.2 2.0 to 2.2 6.8

b (locking) b b
b b

A-62
Functions and characteristics
Control and disconnection
Compact NS630bNA to NS1600NA
switch-disconnectors
Installation standards require upstream protection.
Compact switch-disconnectors
Number of poles
Control manual toggle
direct or extended rotary handle
electric
Connections fxed front connection
rear connection
withdrawable (on chassis) front connection
rear connection
Electrical characteristics as per IEC 60947-3 and EN 60947-3
Conventional thermal current (A) Ith 60 C
Rated insulation voltage (V) Ui
Rated impulse withstand voltage (kV) Uimp
Rated operational voltage (V) Ue AC 50/60 Hz
Rated operational current le AC 50/60 Hz
220/240 V 1 12 1
380/415 V 1 12 1
440/480 V
(1)
1 12 1
500/525 V 1 12 1
660/690 V 1 12 1
Short-circuit making capacity lcm (kA peak) 2 2 2 2 2
Short-time withstand current lcw (A rms) 0.5 s 2 2 2 2 2
20 s
Suitability for isolation
Durability (C-O cycles) mechanical 1 1 1 1 1
electrical AC 440 V AC23A/In 2 2 2 2 1
Positive contact indication
Pollution degree
Protection
Add-on earth-leakage protec ion combination with Vigirex relay
Additional indication and control auxiliaries
Indication contacts
Voltage releases MX shunt release
MN undervoltage release
Remote communication by bus
Device status indications (communica ing auxiliary contacts)
Device remote operation (communicating motor mechanism)
Installation
Accessories terminal extensions and spreaders
terminal shields and interphase barriers
escutcheons
Dimensions (mm) fxed 3P 2 21 1
W x H x D 4P 2 2 1
Weight (kg) fxed 3P 1
4P 1
Source-changeover system (see section " on source-changeover systems" )
Manual source-changeover systems, remote-operated and automatic
E
4
5
1
7
9
Compact NS800NA
Functions and characteristics
(1) Suitable for 480 V NEMA.

A-63
NS630bNA NS800NA NS1000NA NS1250NA NS1600NA
3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4
b b b b b
b b b b b
b b b b b
b b b b b
b b b b b
b b b b b
b b b b b

630 800 1000 1250 1600
800 800 800 800 800
8 8 8 8 8
690 690 690 690 690
AC23A AC23A AC23A AC23A AC23A
22 2 630 800 1000 1250 1600
1 630 800 1000 1250 1600
630 800 1000 1250 1600
2 630 800 1000 1250 1600
630 800 1000 1250 1600
52 52 52 52 52
25 25 25 25 25
2 4 4 4 4 4
b b b b b
10000 10000 10000 10000 10000
2 2000 2000 2000 2000 1000
b b b b b
3 3 3 3 3

b

b
b
b

b
b
b
b
b
327 x 210 x 147
327 x 280 x 147
14
18

b

A-64
Control and disconnection
Compact NS1600bNA to 3200NA
switch-disconnectors
Installation standards require upstream protection.
However, Compact NS1600b to 3200NA switch-
disconnectors are self-protected for all currents higher
than 130 kA peak.
Compact switch-disconnectors
Number of poles
Control manual toggle
direct or extended rotary handle
electric
Connections fxed front connec ion
rear connection
withdrawable (on chassis) front connec ion
rear connection
Electrical characteristics as per IEC 60947-3 and EN 60947-3
Conventional thermal current (A) Ith 60 C 1 2 2 2
Rated insulation voltage (V) Ui
Rated impulse withstand voltage (kV) Uimp
Rated operational voltage (V) Ue AC 50/60 Hz
Rated operational current le AC 50/60 Hz
220/240 V 1 2 2 2
380/415 V 1 2 2 2
440/480 V
(1)
1 2 2 2
500/525 V 1 2 2 2
660/690 V 1 2 2 2
Short-circuit making capacity lcm (kA peak) 1 1 1 1
Short-time withstand current lcw (A rms) 3 s 2 2 2 2
Integrated instantaneous protection (kA peak 10 %) 1 1 1 1
Suitability for isolation
Durability (C-O cycles) mechanical
electrical AC 440 V AC23A/In 1 1 1 1
Positive contact indication
Pollution degree
Protection
Add-on earth-leakage protec ion combination with Vigirex relay
Additional indication and control auxiliaries
Indication contacts
Voltage releases MX shunt release
MN undervoltage release
Installation
Accessories escutcheons
Dimensions (mm) fxed 3P 2 1
W x H x D 4P 1
Weight (kg) fxed 3P 2
4P
Source-changeover system (see section " on source-changeover systems" )
Manual source-changeover systems, remote-operated and automatic
Functions and characteristics
E
4
5
1
8
2
Compact NS2000NA
(1) Suitable for 480 V NEMA.

A-65
NS1600bNA NS2000NA NS2500NA NS3200NA
3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4
b b b b
- - - -
- - - -
b b b b
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -

1600 2000 2500 3200
800 800 800 800
8 8 8 8
690 690 690 690
AC23A AC23A AC23A AC23A
22 2 1600 2000 2500 3200
1 1600 2000 2500 3200
1600 2000 2500 3200
2 1600 2000 2500 3200
1600 2000 2500 3200
135 135 135 135
32 32 32 32
1 130 130 130 130
b b b b
6000 6000 6000 6000
2 1000 1000 1000 1000

b b b b
3 3 3 3

b

b
b
b
b
350 x 420 x 160
350 x 535 x 160
23
36

-

A-66
P
B
1
0
0
8
4
3
Source-changeover systems
Presentation
Commercial and service sector:
operating rooms in hospitals
b safety systems for tall buildings
b computer rooms (banks, insurance companies, etc )
b lighting systems in shopping centres
Manual source-changeover system
This is the most simple type. It is controlled manually by an operator and
consequently the time required to switch from the normal to the replacement source
can vary.
A manual source-changeover system is made up of two or three mechanically
interlocked manually-operated circuit breakers or switch-disconnectors.
Remote-operated source-changeover system
This is the most commonly employed system for devices with high ratings (above
400 A). No human intervention is required. Transfer from the normal to the
replacement source is controlled electrically.
A remote-controlled source-changeover system is made up of two or three circuit
breakers or switch-disconnectors linked by an electrical interlocking system that may
have different confgurations. In addition, a mechanical interlocking system protects
against electrical malfunctions or incorrect manual operations.
Automatic source-changeover systems
An automatic controller may be added to a remote-operated source-changeover
system for automatic source control according to programmable operating modes.
This solution ensures optimum energy management:
transfer to a replacement source according to external requirements
management of power sources
regulation
emergency source replacement, etc.
The automatic controller may be ftted with an option for communication with
a supervisor.
Communication option
The communication option must not be used to control the opening or closing
of source-changeover system circuit breakers. It should be used only to transmit
measurement data or circuit breaker status.
The eco COM option is perfectly suited to these equipments.
b
b
b
b
Industry:
b assembly lines
b engine rooms on ships
b critical auxiliaries in thermal power stations
Infrastructures:
b port and railway installations
b runway lighting systems
b control systems on military sites
P
B
1
0
0
8
4
4
P
B
1
0
0
9
4
5
P
B
1
0
0
8
4
6
P
B
1
0
0
8
4
7
Functions and characteristics

A-67
Mechanical interlocking
Interlocking of two or three toggle-controlled devices
Two devices can be interlocked using this system. Two identical interlocking systems
can be used to interlock three devices installed side by side, in which case one
device is in the ON position and the two others are in the OFF position.
The system is locked using one or two padlocks (shackle diameter 5 to 8 mm).
Combinations of Normal and Replacement devices
There are two interlocking-system models:
Compact NS100 to 250
Compact NS400 to 630 (can also be used for a Compact NS100 to 250).
Devices must be either all fxed or all withdrawable.
Interlocking of two devices with rotary handles
The rotary handles are padlocked with the devices in the OFF position.
The mechanism inhibits the two devices being closed at the same time, but does
allow for both to be open (OFF) at the same time.
Combinations of Normal and Replacement devices
All Compact NS100 to 1600 circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors with rotary
handles can be interlocked. Interlocking of a Compact NS100 to 630 with a Compact
NS630b to 1600 is not possible.
Interlocking of a number of devices using keylocks
(captive keys)
Interlocking uses two identical keylocks with a single key. This solution enables
interlocking between two devices that are physically distant or that have signifcantly
different characteristics, for example between a low and a medium-voltage device,
or between Compact NS circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors.
A system of wall-mounted units with captive keys makes possible a large number
of combinations between many devices.
Combinations of Normal and Replacement devices
All Compact NS100 to 1600 circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors with rotary
handles or motor mechanisms can be interlocked.
Interlocking of two devices on a base plate
A base plate designed for two Compact devices can be installed horizontally or
vertically on a mounting rail. Interlocking is carried out on the base plate by a
mechanism located behind the devices. Access to the device controls and trip units
is not blocked.
Combinations of Normal and Replacement devices
All manually operated Compact NS100 to 630 circuit breakers and switch-
disconnectors can be interlocked.
Devices must be fxed or plug-in versions, with or without earth-leakage protection
or measurement modules.
b
b
A manual source-changeover system can be installed
on two to three manually-operated circuit breakers or
switch-disconnectors. Interlocking is mechanical.
Interlocks prevent connection to both sources at the
same time, even momentarily.
E
2
1
2
8
7
Interlocking of two toggle-controlled devices
E
2
1
3
9
9
ON
ON
O
N O
I
F F O
O
t i ped
i ped
N O
I
F O
O
e et
Interlocking of two devices with rotary handles
E
2
6
7
6
6
O
OFF
ON
I
N
O
OFF
ese
Interlocking with keylocks
E
3
3
9
4
3
Interlocking on base plates

A-68
Source-changeover systems
Electrical interlocking
Electrical interlocking is carried out by an electrical control device.
For Compact NS up to 630 A, electrical interlocking is implemented by the IVE unit
integrating control circuits and an external terminal block. The integrated control
circuits implement the time delays required for correct source transfer.
For Compact NS630b to 1600, this function can be implemented in one of two ways:
using the IVE unit
by an electrician based on the diagrams presented in the Electrical diagrams
part of this catalogue.
Characteristics of the IVE unit
external connection terminal block:
inputs: circuit breaker control signals
outputs: status of the SDE contacts on the Normal and Replacement source
circuit breakers
2 connectors for the two Normal and Replacement source circuit breakers:
inputs:
- status of the OF contacts on each circuit breaker (ON or OFF)
- status of the SDE contacts on the Normal and Replacement source circuit
breakers
outputs: power supply for operating mechanisms
control voltage:
24 to 250 V DC
48 to 415 V 50/60 Hz - 440 V 60 Hz.
The IVE unit control voltage must be same as that of the circuit breaker operating
mechanisms.
b
b
b
v
v
b
v
v
b
v
v
Electrical interlocking is used with the mechanical
interlocking system.
It electrically interlocks the two circuit breakers and
implements the time delays required for proper
operation of the system.
An automatic controller may be added to take into
account information from the distribution system.
Necessary equipment
For Compact NS100 to 630, each circuit breaker must be equipped with:
a motor mechanism
an OF contact
an SDE contact.
The components are supplied ready for assembly and the circuit breakers prewired.
The prewiring must not be modifed.
For Compact NS630b to 1600, each circuit breaker must be equipped with:
a motor mechanism
an available OF contact
a CE connected-position contact (carriage switch) on withdrawable circuit
breakers
an SDE contact.
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
D
B
1
0
1
5
7
3
IVE unit.
Functions and characteristics

A-69
Standard congurations
D
B
1
1
0
9
0
3
Compact NS
Types of mechanical interlocking Possible combinations Typical electrical diagrams Diagram no.
2 devices
QN QR Compact NS100 to 630:
0 0 b electrical interlocking without emergency
1 0 power off (EPO) auxiliaries: 51201177
0 1 v with EPO by MN 51201178
v with EPO by MX 51201179
Compact NS630b to 1600:
b electrical interlocking with lockout after fault:
v permanent replacement source (without IVE) 51201180
v with EPO by MX (without IVE) 51201181
v with EPO by MN (wi hout IVE) 51201182
v permanent replacement source (with IVE) 51201183
v with EPO by MX (with IVE) 51201184
v with EPO by MN (wi h IVE) 51201185
b automatic control without lockout after fault:
v permanent replacement source (without IVE) 51201186
v engine generator set (without IVE) 51201187

A-70
Source-changeover systems
Remote-operated systems
A remote-operated source-changeover system is made up of:
1 circuit breaker QN equipped with a motor mechanism and auxiliary contacts, connected to the
Normal source
2 circuit breaker QR equipped with a motor mechanism and auxiliary contacts, connected to the
Replacement source
3 mounting base plate with mechanical interlocking (NS100 to 630) or an interlocking system
using rods or cables (NS630b to 1600)
4 electrical interlocking unit. IVE for NS100 to 630 or an electrical system provided by the installer
for NS630b to 1600. Electrical interlocking system example: part no. 51156903 in the source-
changeover system catalogue.
Switching between sources can be automated by adding:
5 ACP auxiliary control plate
6 BA or UA controller, or an electrical system provided by the installer for NS630b to 1600.
Electrical system example: part no. 51156904 and 51156904 in the source-
changeover system catalogue.
Accessory:
7 coupling accessory (downstream connection) for NS100 to 630.
Source-changeover system without a controller
In this case, the automatic-control system to initiate changeovers between the
Normal and Replacement sources under predefned conditions must be provided by
the installation designer.
Source-changeover system with a controller
In this case, changeovers between the Normal and Replacement sources under
predefned conditions are initiated by a Merlin Gerin controller.
Coupling accessory
This accessory may be used with the source-changeover system (with or without a
controller) to facilitate connections.
Compact NS630b to 1600
Interlocking by rods Interlocking by cables
P
B
1
0
0
9
3
0
_
6
7
Remote-operated source-changeover system
0
5
3
0
6
0
Auxiliary control plate
0
5
3
0
5
8
Controller
E
7
9
3
6
8
O
I
O F F
d d
O
I
O F F
d d
E
7
9
3
6
9
O
I
O F F
d d
O

O F F
d d
E
3
2
6
9
9
QR
QN
2
4
1
3
E
3
2
7
0
0
0 O F
0 OFF
N
5
N
N / I
OFF / O
a t
UR
ON I
O F / O
ault
=
UN =
ER I GE I
t p
m nu
N
st
N
u
t p
m nu
UN
ON I
O F / O
au t
UR
ON / I
OFF O
f ult
U =O
N =
MER ING R N
o e n g
N
t st
S
5
6
E
3
2
7
0
1
7
Functions and characteristics

A-71
Associated controllers
By combining a remote-operated source-changeover
system with an integrated BA or UA automatic
controller, it is poss ble to automatically control source
transfer according to user-selected sequences.
These controllers can be used on source-changeover
systems comprising 2 circuit breakers.
For source-changeover systems comprising 3 circuit
breakers, the automatic control diagram must be
prepared by the installer as a complement to to
diagrams provided in the electrical diagrams section
of this catalogue.
P
B
1
0
0
8
5
5
BA controller.
P
B
1
0
0
8
5
6
UA controller
Controller BA UA
4-position switch
Compatible circuit breaker All Compact NS circuit breaker
Automatic operation b b
Forced operation on "Normal" source b b
Forced operation on "Replacement" source b b
Stop (bo h Normal and Replacement sources OFF) b b
Automatic operation
Monitoring of the "Normal" source and automatic transfer b b
Generator set startup control b
Delayed shutdown (adjustable) of engine generator set b
Load shedding and reconnection of non-priority circuits b
Transfer to the Replacementsource if one of the phases
of the Normalphase is absent
b
Test
By opening the P25M circuit breaker supplying the controller b
By pressing the test button on the front of the controller b
Indications
Circuit breaker status indication on the front of the controller:
on, off, fault trip
b b
Automatic mode indication contact b b
Other functions
Selection of type of "Normal" source
(single-phase or three-phase)
(1)
b
Voluntary transfer to "Replacement" source
(e.g. energy-management commands)
b b
During peak-tariff periods (energy-management commands)
forced operation on "Normal" source if "Replacement" source
not operational
b
Additional control contact (not in controller).
Transfer to "Replacement" source only if contact closed
(e.g. used to test the frequency of UR)
b b
Setting of maximum startup time for he replacement source b
Options
Communication option b
Power supply
Control voltages
(2)
110 V b b
220 to 240 V 50/60 Hz b b
380 to 415 V 50/60 Hz b b
440 V 60 Hz b b
Operating thresholds
Undervoltage
0.35 Un y voltage y 0.7 Un
b b
Phase failure
0.5 Un y voltage y 0.7 Un
b
Voltage presence
voltage u 0.85 Un
b b
IP degree of protection (EN 60529) and IK degree of protection against
external mechanical impacts (EN 50102)
Front IP40 b b
Side IP30 b b
Connectors IP20 b b
Front IK07 b b
Characteristics of output contacts (dry, volt-free contacts)
Rated thermal current (A) 8
Minimum load 10 mA at 12 V
Output contacts:
Position of the Auto/Stop switch
b b
Load shedding and reconnection order b
Generator set start order b
AC DC
U ilisa ion category (IEC 60947-5-1) AC12 AC13 AC14 AC15 DC12 DC13
Operational current (A) 24 V 8 7 5 6 8 2
48 V 8 7 5 5 2 -
110 V 8 6 4 4 0.6 -
220/240 V 8 6 4 3 - -
250 V - - - - 0.4 -
380/415 V 5 - - - - -
440 V 4 - - - - -
660/690 V - - - - - -
(1) For example, 220 V single-phase or 220 V three-phase.
(2) The controller is powered by the ACP auxiliaries control plate. The same voltage must be
used for the ACP plate, the IVE unit and the operating mechanisms. If this voltage is the same
as the source voltage, then the Normal and Replacement sources can be used directly for the
power supply. If not, an isolation transformer must be used.

A-72
Communication
Compact NS100 to 630
In addition to existing communication possibilities, new communication solutions are
available for the range:
Advantys OTB Modbus interface module with 12 inputs/8 outputs built in and
expandable by adding optional modules from the Twido range
Power Meter units (PM700, PM800) which can be used to set up four levels of
functional units:
local display of currents, voltages, power, power factors, energy, total harmonic
distortion (instantaneous and maximum THD values). The Power Meter units must
be used in conjunction with a TCU measurement module,
remote display of all the above values via a local network or the internet via a
Modbus/TCP IP gateway (type MPS100, EGX200, etc.). The Power Meter units
must be equipped with a Modbus interface,
status indications. The Power Meter units must be equipped with IO22 alarm
input/output module and the circuit breaker must be equipped with OF (on/off) and
SDE (fault-trip indication) auxiliary contacts,
remote opening and closing. A motor-mechanism module must be added to the
circuit breaker equipped for status indications
MPS100 TCP IP/Modbus gateway with six digital inputs to connect OF and SDE
auxiliary contacts (see automatic notifcation on page A-81).
The existing solutions remain available:
communicating auxiliaries
They replace the standard auxiliaries and connect directly to the Digipact bus.
Three equipment levels:
communicating auxiliary contacts, comprising:
- OF (on/off), SD (trip indication) and SDE (fault-trip indication) contacts
- electronic module
- prefabricated wiring.
communicating auxiliary contacts and motor-mechanism module, comprising:
- OF (on/off), SD (trip indication) and SDE (fault-trip indication) contacts
- MCH motor-mechanism module (220 V AC)
(1)
- electronic module
- prefabricated wiring.
communicating carriage switches for the chassis, comprising:
- CE / CD (connected/disconnected position) contacts
- electronic module
- wiring connector
SC150 interface
Using the SC150 interface, it is possible to integrate a device equipped with non-
communicating auxiliaries into a supervison system.
The SC150 interface is used to connect:
the auxiliary contacts on the circuit breaker (OF, SD, SDE, SDV, CD, CE)
the remote-operation system (on, off, reset)
the communication output for the STR53UE and STR43ME electronic trip units
equipped with the COM option.
Software
To make use of the information provided by the communicating devices, it is
necessary to use software incorporating a Modbus driver. Schneider Electric offers
two solutions: the RCU utility and SMS software.
RCU utility
This is a set of Modbus drivers that, in conjunction with a PC, can be used to:
view device status (on/off and fault trip),
view variables: currents, voltages, power, power factors, energy, total harmonic
distortion (instantaneous and maximum THD values),
remotely open and close the device.
SMS (System Management Software)
SMS is power-management software to control and monitor LV and MV electrical
installations.
The SMS family includes a number of products offering different features for all types
of applications.
SMS can communicate with all intelligent devices in the electrical installation
including:
Power Meter and Circuit Monitor products
LV circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors
Sepam units.
b
b
v
v
v
v
b
b
v
v
v
b
v
v
v
b
b
b
b
b
b
(1) For voltages other than 220 V AC, use a standard motor-mechanism module (non-
communicating) together with an SC150 indication and control interface.
Communication with the circuit breaker or switch-
disconnector is possible using a number of hardware
solutions:
b Advantys OTB Modbus interface module with built-in
inputs/outputs
b Power Meter units (PM700, PM800)
b Micro Power Server MPS100 TCP IP/Modbus
gateway with six digital alarm inputs.
These solutions are compatble with existing
installations equipped with communicating contacts.
The Compact NS range can take advantage of the
features of the MPS100, including automatic
notifcation of alarms via e-mail and SMS messages.
SC150 indication and control
interface.
P
B
1
0
1
0
3
8
-
2
6
Advantys OTB Modbus.
0
6
2
0
5
2
-
2
8
Power Meter.
E
9
0
4
6
3
-
2
5
E
9
1
6
8
5
-
5
4
Micro Power Server MPS100.
0
5
3
1
7
2
-
2
5
Compact NS equipped
with communicating
auxiliary contacts and
motor-mechanism module.
0
5
4
4
8
1
-
2
2
Withdrawable Compact NS
on its chassis equipped
with communicating
auxiliary contacts.
0
5
4
5
1
6
-
1
0
Functions and characteristics

A-73
Overview of functions
: wiring
: communication bus
: Modbus bus
: Ethernet
D
B
1
1
2
3
8
1


2



F O
2
1


2



F O
2
1


2



OO
I N
2
1


2



OO
I N
2
1

6
m t
B
1
4 5 5
6 6
1
5 51

C
5 A
5
6 C
5 A
5



2
5



h O
I
u h O
2
1
1
m t
2
4
4 5 5 /
175 515

E
A
1 E
A


1 3
M



I )
P kW)
E ( Wh)
H rm n cs


1 3
Communication
bus
SC150
Device
Software
DC150
Power Meter
PM700...PM800
OF/SDE
Compact NS
MPS100
TCP IP/Modbus
gateway
Modbus bus
Communication
interface
Compact NS
with communicating
contacts and motor
mechanism.
Compact circuit breaker
with standard auxiliary
contacts and motor
mechanism.
Compact NS
+ TCU block
OF/SDE
MCH
OF/SDE
Circuit
breaker
C60 + OF
Compact NS
+ TCU block
Advantys
OTB Modbus
44 inputs
6 inputs for alarm
Micrologic
Compact NS
Masterpact
Modem
GSM
Compact equipped with:
Advantys OTB PM700/800 Communicating SC150
Modbus + interfaces auxiliaries
Device identifcation
Address b b b b
Indication of status conditions
OF (on/off) b b b b
SD (trip indication) b - b b
SDE (fault-trip indication) b b b b
CE/CD (connected/disconnected position) b - b b
Controls
ON/OFF - b b b
LED reset - - b b
Protection settings
Reading of the protection settings - - - b
Operating and maintenance aids
Measurements Currents - b - b
Voltages, power, power
factors,
- b - -
energy, THD - b - -
Fault readings Type of fault - - - b
Indications Operation counter - - - b

A-74
Communication
Compact NS630b to 1600
COM option in Compact
The COM option is required for integration of the circuit
breaker or switch-disconnector in a supervision
system.
Compact uses the Digipact or Modbus communications
protocol for full compatibility with the SMS PowerLogic
electrical-installation management systems. An
external gateway is available for communication on
other networks:
b Profbus
b Ethernet
Digipact "device"
communication module.
Digipact "chassis"
communication module
For fxed circuit breakers, the COM option is made up of:
a "device" communication module, installed behind the Micrologic control unit and
supplied with its set of sensors (OF, SD, SDE micro-contacts for manually operated
devices; OF, SDE micro-contacts for electrically operated devices) and its kit for
connection to a communicating motor-mechanism module.
For withdrawable circuit breakers, the COM option is made up of:
a "device" communication module, installed behind the Micrologic control unit and
supplied with its set of sensors (OF, SD, SDE micro-contacts for manually operated
devices; OF, SDE micro-contacts for electrically operated devices) and its kit for
connection to a communicating motor-mechanism module
a "chassis" communication module supplied separately with its set of sensors
(CE, CD and CT contacts).
Status indication by the COM option is independent of the circuit breaker indication
contacts. These contacts remain available for conventional uses.
Digipact or Modbus " device" communication module
This module is independent of the control unit. It receives and transmits information
on the communication network. An infra-red link transmits data between the control
unit and the communication module. Consumption:
30 mA, 24 V.
Digipact or Modbus " chassis" communication module
This module is independent of the control unit. The Modbus "chassis"
communication module makes it possible to address the chassis and to maintain the
address when the circuit breaker is in the disconnected position.
Consumption: 30 mA, 24 V.
Communicating motor-mechanism module
A bus link is used to transmit remote ON/OFF orders to the circuit breaker.
A communicating motor-mechanism module must be used.
The remote-tripping function (MX or MN) is independent of the communication
option. It therefore has no connectors for the "device" communication module.
b
b
b
Modbus "chassis"
communication module
Modbus "device"
communication module
1 "device" communication module
2 "chassis" communication module
3 OF, SD, SDE "device" sensors
4 CE, CD and CT "chassis" sensors
5 communicating motor-mechanism module
0
5
6
4
3
1
0
5
6
4
0
1
E
4
5
1
8
3
0
5
6
4
3
1
D
B
1
0
5
1
9
2
Functions and characteristics

A-75
Overview of functions
Compact circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors are compatible with the Digipact
or Modbus COM option.
The COM option may be used with all types of control units to:
identify the device
indicate status conditions
control the device.
Depending on the different types of Micrologic (S, A, P) control units, the COM option
also offers:
setting of the protections functions
analysis of the AC-power parameters for operating-assistance and maintenance
purposes
b
b
b
b
b
E
4
7
0
7
1
Module Event Time
POWERLOGIC System Manager Demo
Ready
File Edit View Setup Tools Control Display Reports Window Help
ONLINE DEMO 9 30 No working system
5 seconds Sampling Mode MANUAL
0,00
0,20
0,40
0,60
0,80
1,00
1,20
H2 H3 H4 H5 H6 H7 H8 H9 H10 H11 H12
l
a
t
n
e
m
a
d
n
u
F
%
Harmonics
Phase A N Voltage Harmonics Analysis
Phase 1 N
Ha monics(RMS)
H2 0 01
H3 0 45
H4 0 03
H5 0 45
H6 0 04
H7 1 27
H8 0 05
H9 0 42
H10 0 01
H11 1 03
H12 0 07
H1 118 09
OK
Fundamental
RMS
RMS H
Peak
CF
THD
Switch-disconnector
with
Circuit breaker
with
communication bus communication bus
Digipact Modbus Digipact Modbus
Device identifcation
Address b b S A P S A P
Rating - - A P A P
Type of device - - P
Type of control unit - - A P A P
Type of long-time rating plug - - A P A P
Status indications
ON/OFF OF b b S A P S A P
SD (trip indication) b b S A P S A P
SDE (fault-trip indication) - - S A P S A P
CE/CD (connected/
disconnected position)
b b S A P S A P
Protections settings
Reading of protections settings A P A P
Writing of fne settings in the range P P
imposed by the adjustment dials
Reading/writing of alarms P P
(load shedding and reconnect, etc.)
Operating and maintenance aids
Measurements
current A P A P
voltages, frequency, power, etc. P P
programming of demand metering P
Fault readings
type of fault A P
interrupted current P
Histories and logs
trip history P
alarm history P
event logs P
Indicators
counter operation A P A P
Maintenance register P
Note:
S = Micrologic 2.0 and 5.0
A = Micrologic with ammeter
P = Micrologic "Power"
See the description of the Micrologic control units for further details on protection.

A-76
Communication
Compact NS630b to 1600 (cont.)
Compact in a communication network
Devices
Circuit breakers equipped with Micrologic control units may be connected to either a
Digipact or Modbus communication bus. The information made available depends
on the type of Micrologic control unit (A, P) and on the type of communication bus
(Digipact or Modbus).
Switch-disconnectors can be connected to the Digipact or Modbus communication
bus. The information made available is the status of the switch-disconnector.
Communication bus
Digipact bus
The Digipact bus is the internal bus of the low-voltage switchboard in which the
Digipact communicating devices are installed (Compact with Digipact COM, PM150,
SC150, UA150, etc.). This bus must be equipped with a DC150 data concentrator
(see the Powerlogic System catalogue).
Addresses
Addressing is carried out by the DC150 data concentrator.
Number of devices
The maximum number of devices that may be connected to the Digipact bus is
calculated in terms of communication points. These points correspond to the
amount of traffc the bus can handle. The total number of points for the various
devices connected to a single bus must not exceed 100.
If the required devices represent more than 100 points, add a second Digipact
internal bus.
Communicating device Number of points
DC150 data concentrator 4
Micrologic + Digipact COM 4
PM150 4
SC150 4
UA150 4
Length of bus
The maximum recommended length for the Digipact internal bus is 200 meters.
Bus power source
Power is supplied by the DC150 data concentrator (24 V).
E
9
4
5
2
5
Compact
N M
N 1
1 3
OK 2 V 4
RS 485
RS 232C, Ethernet
Compact
Data concentrator
DC150
Digipact Bus Modbus Bus
Device
Communication
bus
Communication
interface
Software
Functions and characteristics

A-77
Modbus bus
The Modbus RS 485 (RTU protocol) system is an open bus on which communicating
Modbus devices (Compact with Modbus COM, Power Meter PM700, PM800,
Sepam, Vigilohm, etc.) are installed. All types of PLCs and microcomputers may be
connected to the bus.
Addresses
The Modbus parameters (address, baud rate, parity) are entered using the keypad
on the Micrologic A, P. For a switch-disconnector, it is necessary to use the RSU
(Remote Setting Utility) Micrologic utility.
The software layer of the Modbus protocol can manage up to 255 addresses
(1 to 255).
The device communication module comprises three addresses linked to:
circuit breaker manager
measurement manager
protection manager.
The chassis communication module comprises one address linked to:
the chassis manager.
The division of the system into four managers secures data exchange with the
supervision system and the circuit breaker actuators.
The manager addresses are automatically derived from the circuit breaker address
@xx entered via the Micrologic control unit (the default address is 47).
b
b
b
b
Logic addresses
@xx Circuit breaker manager (1 to 47)
@xx +50 Chassis manager (51 to 97)
@xx +200 Measurement manager (201 to 247)
@xx +100 Protection manager (101 to 147)
Number of devices
The maximum number of devices that may be connected to the Modbus bus
depends on the type of device (Compact with Modbus COM, PM700, PM800,
Sepam, Vigilohm, etc.), the baud rate (19200 is recommended), the volume of data
exchanged and the desired response time. The RS 485 physical layer offers up to 32
connection points on the bus (1 master, 31 slaves).
A fxed device requires only one connection point (communication module on the
device).
A drawout device uses two connection points (communication modules on the
device and on the chassis).
The number must never exceed 31 fxed devices or 15 drawout devices.
Length of bus
The maximum recommended length for the Modbus bus is 1200 meters.
Bus power source
A 24 V DC power supply is required (less than 20 % ripple, insulation class II).
Communication interface
The Modbus bus may be connected to the central processing device in any of three
manners:
direct link to a PLC. The communication interface is not required if the PLC is
equipped with a Modbus port;
direct link to a computer. The Modbus (RS 485) / Serial port (RS 232)
communication interface is required;
connection to a TCP/IP (Ethernet) network. The Modbus (RS 485) / TCP/IP
(Ethernet) communication interface is required.
b
b
b
Software
To make use of the information provided by the communicating devices, software
with a Modbus driver must be used.
Micrologic utilities
This is a set of Modbus drivers that may be used with a PC to:
display the variables (I, U, P, E, etc.) with the RDU (Remote Display Utility)
read/write the settings with the RSU (Remote Setting Utility)
remotely control (ON / OFF) the device with the RCU (Remote Control Utility).
These utilities are available on request.
b
b
b
System Manager Software (SMS)
SMS is a power management software for the control and monitoring of LV and MV
electrical installations.
The SMS family includes a number of products for all types of applications, from
standalone systems to networked power management of multiple buildings.
SMS can communicate with all intelligent devices of the electrical installation
including:
Power Meter and Circuit Monitor products
LV circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors
Sepam units.
b
b
b

A-78
Communication
Compact NS1600b to 3200
COM option in Compact
For fxed circuit breakers, the COM option is made up of a "device" communication
module, installed behind the Micrologic control unit and supplied with its set of
sensors (OF, SD, SDE micro-contacts).
Status indication by the COM option is independent of the circuit breaker indication
contacts. These contacts remain available for conventional uses.
Digipact or Modbus " device" communication module
This module is independent of the control unit. It receives and transmits information
on the communication network. An infra-red link transmits data between the control
unit and the communication module.
Consumption: 30 mA, 24 V.
1 "Device" communication module
2 OF, SD, SDE "device" sensors
The COM option is required for integration of the circuit
breaker or switch-disconnector in a supervision
system.
Compact uses the Digipact or Modbus communications
protocol for full compatibility with the SMS PowerLogic
electrical-installation management systems.
An external gateway is available for communication on
other networks:
b Profbus
b Ethernet
Digipact "device"
communication module.
Modbus "device"
communication module
E
5
9
4
3
8
O F
FF
2
1
OF
SD
SDE
Communication
bus
COM
module
0
5
6
4
3
1
0
5
6
4
3
1
Functions and characteristics

A-79
Overview of functions
Compact circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors are compatible with the Digipact
or Modbus COM option.
The COM option may be used with all types of control units to:
identify the device
indicate status conditions
control the device.
Depending on the different types of Micrologic (S, A) control units, the COM option
also offers:
setting of the protections functions
analysis of the AC-power parameters for operating-assistance and maintenance
purposes.
b
b
b
b
b
E
4
7
0
7
1
Module Event Time
POWERLOGIC System Manager Demo
Ready
File Edit View Setup Tools Control Display Reports Window Help
ONLINE DEMO 9 30 No working system
5 seconds Sampling Mode MANUAL
0,00
0,20
0,40
0,60
0,80
1,00
1,20
H2 H3 H4 H5 H6 H7 H8 H9 H10 H11 H12
l
a
t
n
e
m
a
d
n
u
F
%
Harmonics
Phase A N Voltage Harmonics Analysis
Phase 1 N
Ha monics(RMS)
H2 0 01
H3 0 45
H4 0 03
H5 0 45
H6 0 04
H7 1 27
H8 0 05
H9 0 42
H10 0 01
H11 1 03
H12 0 07
H1 118 09
OK
Fundamental
RMS
RMS H
Peak
CF
THD
Switch-disconnector
with communication
bus
Circuit breaker with
communication bus
Digipact Modbus Digipact Modbus
Device identifcation
Address b b S A S A
Rating - - A A
Type of control unit - - A A
Type of long-time rating plug - - A A
Status indications
ON/OFF OF b b S A S A
SD (trip indication) b b S A S A
SDE (fault-trip indication) - - S A S A
Protections settings
Reading of protections settings A A
Operating and maintenance aids
Measurements
current A A
Fault readings
type of fault A
Indicator
counter operation A A
Note:
S = Micrologic 2.0 and 5.0
A = Micrologic with ammeter
See the description of the Micrologic control units for further details on protection.

A-80
The MPS100 Micro Power Server:
b notifes maintenance staff when any preset alarm or
trip is activated by the Micrologic trip unit, automatically
sending an e-mail and/or SMS
b data logs are periodically forwarded by e-mail
b the e-mails are sent via an Ethernet local area
network (LAN) or remotely via modem.
Micro Power Server makes data collection easy
for monitoring Masterpact / Compact circuit breakers
Now, more than ever, there is a need to monitor electrical distribution systems in
industrial and large commercial applications. The key to managing all equipment,
maximising effciencies, reducing costs and increasing up time is having the right
tools.
Micro Power Server MPS100 is designed to withstand harsh electrical environments
and provide a consistent fow of easy to interpret information.
Micro Power Server is designed for unattended operation
within the main LV switchboard
The MPS100 is a self-contained facility information server that serves as a stand-
alone device for power system monitoring.
It is used to transfer power system information via a standard web browser over
an Ethernet local area network (LAN) or via modem, making it poss ble to view
power system information on a PC with an Ethernet connection.
In either capacity, the Micro Power Server functions as a web server for Micrologic
trip unit and Power Meter supervision, automatically notifying (e-mail
and/or SMS) maintenance staff when any preset alarm or trip is activated in
the Micrologic trip unit.
Benefts
view your main LV switchboard without installing software on your local PC,
eliminating the need for a dedicated PC with specifc software
Micro Power Server allows centralised monitoring, so you no longer waste
precious time walking around the facility to collect data
view your main LV switchboard via a modem connection (GSM or switched
network), avoiding the need for a LAN
maintenance people are automatically notifed at any time, wherever they are,
so you do not have to stay in front of a monitor all day long
data logs can be periodically forwarded by sending e-mails to the relevant people
(maintenance, accounting, application service provider) automatically
possibility to monitor/notify six external events (limit switches, auxiliary switches...)
back-up of Micrologic trip unit settings in the memory of the MPS100, so you know
where to retrieve it when necessary.
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
Communication
Compact and the MPS100
Micro Power Server
E
9
0
4
6
3
E
9
1
6
8
5
-
6
0
MPS100 Micro Power Server.
0
5
6
9
9
3
Main LV switchboard.
D
B
1
0
0
4
3
5
Monitoring of the main LV switchboard via Web pages
embedded in the MPS100 and accessible via a standard Web
browser.
Functions and characteristics

A-81
Typical architecture
It is possible to combine the different types of architecture.
Supported Modbus devices
Micrologic trip units
Power Meters (PM700, PM800).
Maximum recommended connected devices is 10.
Features
access to the power system via a standard PC web browser
real-time data displayed with an intuitive and user friendly interface
(dashboard)
Ethernet Modbus TCP/IP connectivity directly to the LAN or via modem (Point to
Point Protocol services)
SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) client (capacity to send e-mail)
local logging of data such as energy, power, current
set-up and system confguration through MPS100 embedded HTML pages
user interface translatable in any language, factory settings in English and French
6 inputs/2 outputs (no-volt contact)
DHCP (Dynamic Host Confguration Protocol) client.
Technical characteristics
Power supply 24 V DC 15 %, consumption =250 mA
Operating temperature 0 to +50 C
Rugged compact metal housing 35 x 218 x 115 mm (H x W x D)
Additional information available at: http://194.2.245.4/mkt/microser.nsf
User name: MPS, Password: MPS100
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
0
5
6
9
9
3
-
3
4
D
B
1
0
3
8
0
8
Modbus I/O MPS100
Modem
GSM
e mail
SMS
ISP
WEB
Modem
Automatic notification
Modbus I/O
MPS100
Monitoring from office PC
Modbus I/O
MPS100
Modem
GSM
Modem
Monitoring from home PC
Hub
LAN LAN
+
-
+
-
+
-
OF
SDE
E
8
9
5
4
4
-
1
4
Micrologic trip unit.
P
B
1
0
0
7
0
8
Power Meter.
E
9
5
4
0
5
R
Short Message Service (SMS).
Main Switchboard at
Plaza hotel.
Air conditioning breaker
tripped on ground fault
lg = 350 A.
06:37 on 10/12/2002

A-82
Functions and characteristics
Electrical and mechanical
accessories
Compact NS80H-MA
E
5
8
5
1
6
o
i
om a t
NS 80 H MA
Ui 5 V U mp 8kV
Ue ( )
cu k )
2 /
/ 15
4
5 25
66 /690
250
00
2
6
ca A
Ics = 100% u
TE BS E UNE
I C 94 2
ON
I
O
OF
u h
to
ON
I
r pped
reset
O
OFF
5 8
MX SHT C
C2
2 0 50
pu
to
r
2
1
2
Sealable terminal
shield
Sealable terminal
shield
Auxiliary
contact
Auxiliary
contact
Extended rotary
handle
Direct rotary
handle
Voltage release
DIN-rail
plate
Functions and characteristics

A-83
Compact NSC100N, NSA160
Front accessory for NSC100N (45 mm standard door cutout)
E
5
8
5
1
7
c mpact
N A 2
U 0V U mp 6kV
Ue V) I u ( A)
2 0 24
3 0 415
4 0
5
5
6
0
5
cs 0% u
U E V E S CEI U E
EC 47 2
45 mm front
E
5
8
5
1
8
ON
I
t ipped
eset
O
OFF
5 8
om act
S 12
U 0V Ui p 6kV
Ue ( )
cu k )
20/2 0
80 415
40
25
25
16
10
s 0% u
U E DE BS EI NE
EC 9 7 2
MX/ SHT C
C
0 4 0 z
Sealable terminal
shield
Sealable terminal
shield
Auxiliary
contact
Extended rotary
handle
Voltage release

A-84
Electrical and mechanical
accessories
Compact NS80H-MA,
NSC100N and NSA160
Installation
Compact NS80H-MA and NSC100N circuit breakers may be mounted vertically,
horizontally or fat on their back without any derating of characteristics. They are
designed for easy installation in the various types of switchboards of each market
and country.
Mounting on a DIN rail is poss ble using a special adapter.
The NSA160 circuit breaker may be mounted exclusively on a DIN rail.
These three circuit breakers are available in the fxed, front-connection version.
Front connection of bare cables
Compact NS80H-MA, NSC100N and NSA160 circuit
breakers are equipped as standard with connectors for
bare copper or aluminium cables from 1.5 to 70 mm
2
.
Distribution connector
This connector screws directly to the standard
connectors. It is used to connect up to three cables:
fex ble cables from 1 to 10 mm
2
rigid cables from 1.5 to 16 mm
2
with crimped or self-crimping ferrules from 1.5 to
4 mm
2
.
Insulation of live parts
Terminal shields
Insulating accessories used for protection against
direct contact with power circuits (degree of protection
IP40, IK07). They are supplied with sealing
accessories.
For voltages u 500 V, terminal shields are mandatory.
b
b
b
Functions and characteristics
E
5
9
2
7
8
Installation positions
E
5
4
4
5
5
E
4
3
5
9
5
NS80H-MA and NSC100N:
mounting on backplate or
mounting plate.
E
4
3
5
9
6
NS80H-MA and NSC100N:
mounting on DIN rail
(optional).
NSA160: mounting on DIN
rail (standard).
E
4
3
5
9
7
Standard 45 mm front,
optional on NSC100N,
standard on NSA160.
E
3
9
4
3
2
Distribution connector
E
5
8
5
5
3
Terminal shields

A-85
Indication contacts
A single type of contact, complying with the IEC 60947-5 international
recommendation, provides different indication functions, depending on where it is
inserted in the device.
OF (ON/OFF) - indicates the position of the circuit breaker contacts
SD (trip indication) - indicates that the circuit breaker has tripped due to:
an overload
a short-circuit
an earth-leakage fault (Compact NSC100N and NSA160)
operation of a voltage release.
Returns to de-energised state when the circuit breaker is reset.
SDV (earth-leakage fault indication) - inserted in the Vigi module on Compact
NSC100N and NSA160 devices, it indicates that the circuit breaker has tripped due
to an earth fault. Returns to de-energised state when the circuit breaker is reset.
All the above auxiliary contacts are also available in low-level versions capable of
switching very low loads (e.g. for the control of PLCs or electronic circuits).
Characteristics
Contacts Standard Low level
Rated thermal current (A) 6 5
Minimum load 100 mA at 24 V 1 mA at 4 V
Utilisation cat. (IEC 60947-5-1) AC12 AC15 DC12 DC14 AC12 AC15 DC12 DC14
Operational 24 V 6 6 6 1 5 3 5 1
current (A) 48 V 6 6 2.5 0.2 5 3 2.5 0.2
110 V 6 5 0.6 0.05 5 2.5 0.6 0.05
220/240 V 6 4 - - 5 2 - -
250 V - - 0.3 0.03 5 - 0.3 0.03
380/440 V 6 2 - - 5 1.5 - -
480 V 6 1.5 - - 5 1 - -
660/690 V 6 0.1 - - - - - -
Remote tripping
MX or MN voltage releases are used to trip the circuit breaker.
MN undervoltage release
This release trips the circuit breaker when the control voltage drops below a tripping
threshold:
tripping threshold between 0.35 and 0.7 times the rated voltage
circuit breaker closing is possible only if the voltage exceeds 0.85 times the rated
voltage.
Circuit breaker tripping by an MN release meets the requirements of standard
IEC 60947-2.
Time-delay unit for an MN release (Compact NS80H-MA)
Eliminates nuisance tripping due to transient voltage dips lasting y 200 ms:
It is used in conjunction with:
a 250 V DC MN release, control voltage 220/240 V AC
a 48 V DC MN release, control voltage 48 V AC.
MX shunt release
Trips the circuit breaker when the control voltage rises above 0.7 x Un.
Control signals can be of the impulse type (u 20 ms) or maintained.
Operation
When the circuit breaker has been tripped by an MN or MX release, it must be reset
locally.
MN or MX tripping takes priority over manual closing.
In the presence of a standing trip order, closing of the contacts, even temporary,
is not possible.
Mechanical characteristics
endurance is equal to 50 % of the mechanical endurance of the circuit breaker
the releases clip in behind the front cover
connection using wires up to 1.5 mm
2
to integrated terminal blocks.
Electrical characteristics
consumption:
pick-up (MX): < 5 VA
seal-in (MN): < 5 VA
response time: <50 ms.
b
b
v
v
v
v
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
v
v
b
Common-point changeover contacts provide remote circuit
breaker status information. They can be used for indications,
electrical locking, relaying, etc.
0
4
4
3
1
4
Indication contacts
0
5
4
5
5
0
MX or MN voltage release

A-86
Rotary handles
There are two types of rotary handle:
direct rotary handle
extended rotary handle.
There are two models:
standard with a black handle
VDE with a red handle and yellow front for machine-tool control.
Direct rotary handle (NS80H-MA and NSC100N)
Degree of protection IP40, IK07.
The direct rotary handle maintains:
visibility of and access to trip unit settings
suitability for isolation
indication of the three positions O (OFF), I (ON) and tripped
access to the push to trip button
circuit breaker locking capability in the OFF position by one to three padlocks,
shackle diameter 5 to 8 mm (not supplied).
It replaces the circuit breaker front cover.
Accessories transform the standard direct rotary handle for the following situations:
motor control centre (MCC) switchboards:
door opening disabled when the circuit breaker is ON
circuit breaker closing is disabled if the door is open
a higher degree of protection (IP43, IK07)
machine-tool control, complying with CNOMO E03.81.501, IP54, IK08.
Extended rotary handle
Degree of protection IP55, IK08.
This handle makes it possible to operate circuit breakers installed at the back of
switchboards, from the switchboard front.
It maintains:
suitability for isolation
indication of the three positions O (OFF), I (ON) and tripped
access to trip unit settings, when the switchboard door is open
circuit breaker locking capability in the OFF position by one to three padlocks,
shackle diameter 5 to 8 mm (not supplied).
The door cannot be opened if the circuit breaker is ON or locked.
The extended rotary handle is made up of:
a unit that replaces the front cover of the circuit breaker (secured by screws)
an assembly (handle and front plate) on the door that is always secured in the
same position, whether the circuit breaker is installed vertically or horizontally
an extension shaft that must be adjusted to the distance (min/max distance
between back of circuit breaker and door is 185/600 mm).
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
v
v
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
Electrical and mechanical
accessories
Compact NS80H-MA,
NSC100N and NSA160 (cont.)
0
5
4
5
5
8
Compact NS80H-MA with a direct rotary handle
0
5
4
5
6
3
Compact NS80H-MA with an extended rotary handle
Functions and characteristics

A-87
Locking systems
Locking in the OFF position guarantees isolation as per IEC 60947-2.
Padlocking systems can receive up to three padlocks with shackle diameters
ranging from 5 to 8 mm (padlocks not supplied).
Outgoing-circuit identifcation
Compact NS80H-MA and NSC100N devices come with clip-in labels for hand-
written indications.
It is also possible to use pre-printed Telemecanique labels
(part number AB1-** (8 digits)).
E
5
8
5
5
2
Toggle locking using a removable device
E
1
8
5
9
5
D
E
P
P .
O
M
P
P . P
E
D
h s u p
o t
p i r t
O
Identifcation accessories

A-88
Electrical and mechanical
accessories
Compact NS100 to 630 (xed version)
D
B
1
0
5
1
0
6
1
0
1
0
A
4
8
1
A
4
8
1
1
omp
2 H
U
22
240
38 /
415
440
50 /
0
0
7
0
I C 2
U E V E
e
c
I
8
10 5
x 5 A
I
1
5
I
TM I C 2
U E V E
8
10 5
x 5 A
I
1
5
I
TM
O
N
NS2
Ui Ui
/ 4 0
/ 1 5
50
50
I
O
p
I
p
2
1
p O
N 2 i
i
4 081 5
50
50
I
O
N
r
220
R
m
t t
+
5
6
I
I 2 0
SE
m
t t
+
00
1
6
8
0
I
Im 3
I
m
E
l
t t
+
91 5
6
9
I
3
10
I
5
6
8
0
I
p O
S2 i
i
0 0 1 5
501
0
I
r
O
N
Voltage release
Auxiliary contact
Connectors
Interphase barriers
Sealable terminal
shield
Sealable terminal
shield
Voltage-presence
indicator
Extended rotary
handle
Direct rotary
handle
Motor-mechanism
module
One-piece
spreader
Insulation-monitoring
module
Current-transformer
module
Ammeter module
Trip units
Rear insulating
screens
terminal extensions
and spreaders
Rear connectors
Rear insulating
screens
O
N
t
r
O
Functions and characteristics

A-89
Compact NS100 to 630
(plug-in and withdrawable versions)
These withdrawable circuit breakers can be equipped with the same rotary handles,
motor mechanisms and measurement and indication modules as the fxed versions.
D
B
1
0
5
1
0
5
o
12 1 0
comp c
5
m V
220 2
0 1
0
0 2
0
2
1 0
0
0
10
c
9 E V E S E E E A
e A
%
5
5
m
5 A
50
5
m
o
0 9 E V E S E E E A
5
5
m
5 A
50
5
m
o
0
comp c
5
m V
220 2
0 1
0
0 2
0
2
1 0
0
0
10
c
9 E V E S E E E A
e A
%
5
5
m
5 A
50
5
m
o
0 9 E V E S E E E A
5
5
m
5 A
50
5
m
Sealable terminal
shield
Chassis
side plate
Plug-in base
Power
connections
Control-wire
connection plate
Manual auxiliary connector
Circuit-breaker
side plate
Interphase
barriers
Plug-in base
sealable
terminal shield
Interphase barriers
Plug-in base
shield adapter
Connectors Crimp lugs
Crimp lugs
Terminal
extensions
and
spreaders
Connectors
Connected /
disconnected
contacts
Voltage-presence
indicator
Vigicompact
power connections
Circuit-breaker
side plate
Sealable terminal
shield
Terminal extensions
and spreaders
Plug-in base
shield adapter
Plug-in base
sealable
terminal shield
Drawout
control
wires

A-90
Installation
Fixed circuit breakers
Compact circuit breakers may be mounted vertically, horizontally or fat on their back
without any derating of characteristics. They are designed for easy installation in the
various types of switchboards of each market and country.
Circuit breaker on a plug-in base
Protection against direct contacts with power circuits
circuit breaker plugged in =IP4
circuit breaker removed =IP2
circuit breaker removed, base equipped with shutters =IP4
Parts of a plug-in confguration
Compact circuit breaker
set of power connectors added to the circuit breaker
plug-in base for mounting on a backplate or on rails
insulating screen, for use when the circuit breaker is installed on a backplate with
front connections
safety trip, installed on the circuit breaker, that causes automatic tripping if the
circuit breaker is ON, before engaging or withdrawing it. The safety trip does not
prevent circuit breaker operation, even when it has been removed.
mandatory short terminal shields.
Accessories
Insulating accessories can be used to:
protect against direct contact
increase insulation between phases.
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
Electrical and mechanical
accessories
Compact NS100 to 630
The plug-in confguration makes it possible to:
b extract and/or rapidly replace the circuit breaker
without having to touch connections
b allow for the addition of future circuits
at a later date.
0
4
5
3
4
5
Fixed Compact NS250H
E
5
9
2
7
8
Installation positions
0
4
1
6
3
2
Compact NS250H on a plug-in base
E
5
9
2
7
9
Installation positions
E
5
8
5
2
9
Mounting on a backplate
(solid or slotted)
E
5
8
5
3
0
Mounting on rails
E
5
8
7
1
4
Mounting on DIN rail (with
adapter)
E
1
8
8
5
0
Mounting on a Prisma functional mounting plate.
E
2
1
0
1
8
Mounting through a front
panel
E
2
1
0
1
9
Mounting on rails
E
2
1
0
1
7
Mounting on a backplate
Functions and characteristics

A-91
Circuit breaker on a withdrawable chassis
The chassis is made up of two side plates installed on the base and two other plates
mounted on the circuit breaker.
Accessories
auxiliary contacts for installation on the fxed part, indicating the connected and
disconnected positions
toggle collar for circuit breakers with a toggle mounted through a front panel,
intended to maintain the degree of protection whatever the position of the circuit
breaker (supplied with a toggle extension)
keylock which, depending on the bolt ftted, can be used to:
prevent insertion for connection
lock the circuit breaker in the connected or disconnected positions.
telescopic shaft for extended rotary handles.
Front and rear connections
Fixed, plug-in and withdrawable Compact devices may all be equipped with front and
rear connections.
Fixed device
Plug-in and withdrawable devices
b
b
b
v
v
b
b disconnected position - the power circuits are
disconnected, but the circuit breaker is still on the
chassis and may still be operated (ON, OFF, push-to-
trip).
b the circuit breaker may be locked using 1 to 3
padlocks (shackle diameter 5 to 8 mm), to prevent
connection.
b the auxiliaries can be tested (with manual auxiliary
connector).
0
4
1
8
7
9
Compact NS250H on a withdrawable chassis
E
5
9
2
7
9
Installation positions
E
2
1
2
8
2
Connected Disconnected Removed
E
5
8
7
3
3
Front connection
E
5
8
7
1
6
Rear connection
E
5
8
7
1
7
Front connection
E
5
8
7
1
8
Rear connection
E
5
8
7
1
9
Rear connection through
a backplate

A-92
Electrical and mechanical
accessories
Compact NS100 to 630 (cont.)
Connection of fxed devices
Front connection of bars or cables
with lugs
The Compact NS100 to NS630 devices are equipped
as standard with terminals comprising snap-in nuts
with screws (M8 for NS100 to 250, M10 for NS400 to
630) for direct connection to insulated bars or cables
with lugs.
Additional terminal extensions (right-angle, edgewise,
spreaders) are available for all connection
requirements. Spreaders (52.5 or 70 mm pitch) may be
ftted on the Compact NS400 to 630.
Lugs
Lugs are different for copper and aluminium cables.
They are supplied with interphase barriers and are
compatible with the long terminal shields.
the small lugs for copper cables may be used for
cables with the following cross-sectional areas:
120, 150 or 185 mm
2
(NS100 to 250)
240 or 300 mm
2
(NS400 to 630).
Crimping by hexagonal barrels or punching.
the small lugs for aluminium cables may be used for
cables with the following cross-sectional areas:
150 or 185 mm
2
(NS100 to 250)
240 or 300 mm
2
(NS400 to 630).
Crimping by hexagonal barrels.
Spreaders
Spreaders increase the pitch of the terminals.
They are not compatble with terminal shields on the
Compact NS100 to 250.
The one-piece spreader increases the pitch, thus
making it possible to use the connection accessories of
a larger device (e.g. a Compact NS100 to 250 can be
ftted with the accessories of a Compact NS400 to
630). The one-piece spreader also provides protection
against direct contact (see page A-95).
b
v
v
b
v
v
E
5
4
4
5
6
E
5
8
5
3
1
E
5
8
7
2
0
E
5
8
5
3
2
E
5
8
5
3
3
E
5
8
5
3
4
Right-angle terminal
extensions
E
5
8
5
3
5
Straight terminal extensions
for NS100 to 250
E
5
8
5
3
6
Edgewise terminal
extensions for NS400 to 630
E
5
8
5
3
7
Small lug for copper cables
E
5
8
5
3
8
Small lug for aluminium
cables
E
5
8
5
3
9
Spreaders
E
5
8
7
2
1
One-piece spreader
Functions and characteristics

A-93
Front connection of bare cables
Bare-cable connectors for Compact NS devices may
be used for both copper and aluminium cables.
1-cable connectors for Compact NS100 to 250
The connectors snap directly on to the device terminals
or clip onto right-angle and straight terminal extensions
as well as spreaders.
1-cable and 2-cable connectors for Compact
NS400 to 630
The connectors are screwed to device terminals or
right-angle terminal extensions.
Distribution connectors for Compact NS100 to 250
These connectors are screwed directly to device
terminals. Interphase barriers are supplied with
distribution connectors, but may be replaced by long
terminal shields. Each connector can receive six cables
with cross-sectional areas ranging from 1.5 to 35 mm
2

each.
Polybloc distribution block for Compact
NS100 to 630
The Polybloc connects directly to the device terminals
and is used to connect up to six or nine fexible or rigid
cables with cross-sectional areas not exceeding
10 mm
2
, to each pole. Connection is made to spring
terminals without screws.
Rear connection
Rear connections for bars or cables with lugs are
available in two lengths. Bars may be positioned fat,
on edge or at 45 angles depending on how the rear
connections are positioned.
The rear connections are simply ftted to the device
connection terminals. All combinations of rear
connection lengths and positions are possible on a
given device. The device is mounted on a backplate.
For the connection of cables without lugs, the 1-cable
connectors for Compact NS100 to 250 may be simply
clipped onto the rear connections.
E
5
4
4
5
6
E
5
4
4
5
7
E
5
8
5
4
0
E
5
8
7
2
2
E
5
8
7
2
3
E
5
4
4
6
8
1-cable connector
for NS100 to 250
E
5
4
4
6
9
1-cable connector
for NS400 to 630
E
5
4
4
7
0
2-cable connector
for NS400 to 630
E
5
4
4
7
1
Distribution connector
for NS100 to 250
E
5
4
4
7
2
Polybloc distribution block
for NS100 to 250
E
5
8
7
2
4
Two lengths
E
5
8
7
2
5
Four positions
E
5
8
7
2
6
Connection
of bare cables
to NS100 to 250.

A-94
Electrical and mechanical
accessories
Compact NS100 to 630 (cont.)
E
5
4
4
5
6
Connection of plug-in devices
Connection of bars or cables with lugs
The plug-in base is equipped with terminals which, depending on their orientation,
serve for front and rear connection. For rear connection of a base mounted on a
backplate, the terminals must be replaced by insulated, long right-angle terminal
extensions.
For Compact NS630 devices, connection most often requires the 52.5 or 70 mm
pitch spreaders.
Connection accessories
See the Connection of fxed devices section.
Connection of bare cables
All terminals may be equipped with bare-cable connectors. See the Connection of
fxed devices section.
E
5
4
4
5
7
E
5
8
7
1
7
Front connection
E
5
8
7
2
7
Front connection with
spreaders
E
5
8
7
1
8
Rear connection
E
5
8
7
1
9
Rear connection of a base
mounted on a backplate
D
B
1
0
5
1
5
8
Plug-in base for Compact
NS100 to 250 equipped with
1-cable connectors
E
5
8
7
2
9
Plug-in base for Compact
NS400 to 630 equipped with
2-cable connectors
Functions and characteristics

A-95
One-piece spreader
Connection of large cables may require an increase in
the distance between the device terminals. The one-
piece spreader is an accessory that can also be ftted
on Interpact INS switch-disconnectors. It offers the
following features:
increases the pitch of the circuit breaker terminals to
correspond to that of the next largest frame size
compatible with all the connection accessories
available for the next largest frame size (connectors,
terminal extensions, etc.)
enhances insulation between phases in comparison
with standard spreaders.

NS100 to 250 NS400 to 630
Pitch without 35 45
spreaders (mm)
Pitch with standard 45 52.5 or 70
spreaders (mm)
Pitch with one-piece 45 -
spreader (mm)
Mounting
When equipped with a one-piece spreader, Compact
NS circuit breakers may be installed either at the back
of a switchboard or on the front panel with a raiser.
devices with different frame sizes can thus be
aligned in the switchboard
the same mounting plate can be used for all devices
(including Interpact INS switch-disconnectors).
b
b
b
b
b
0
5
6
3
8
4
One-piece spreader
E
5
8
7
3
1
Mounting at the back of a
switchboard
E
5
8
7
3
2
Mounting behind the front
panel with a raiser
D
B
1
1
7
5
7
5
Connection and insulation
accessories are identical to
those for Interpact INS
switch-disconnectors

A-96
0
4
9
2
2
1
Compact NS equipped with terminal shields.
Electrical and mechanical
accessories
Compact NS100 to 630 (cont.)
Insulation of live parts
Terminal shields
Terminal shields are sealable insulating accessories
used for protection against direct contact with power
circuits (degree of protection IP40, IK07). They are
supplied with sealing accessories.
Terminal-shield selection
fxed circuit breaker, front connection - long terminal
shields
fxed circuit breaker, rear connection - short terminal
shields
for voltages u 500 V, terminal shields are mandatory
for voltages >600 V, special connection kit with
terminal shields and insulating screens
for Compact NS400 to 630 with spreaders, special
terminal shields for spreaders
for withdrawable circuit breaker (plug-in and chassis
type), short terminal shields on the device are
mandatory. Terminal shields on the base are possible.
Long terminal shields for plug-in bases are used to:
protect against direct contact with power circuits
(degree of protection IP40, IK07)
increase insulation between phases.
Insulating accessories for plug-in bases include:
an adapter offering the same connection poss bilities
as the circuit breaker
long terminal shields for the plug-in base.
Interphase barriers
Safety accessories for maximum insulation at the
power-connection points:
they clip easily onto the circuit breaker
not compatible with terminal shields
special version for plug-in bases.
Rear insulating screens
Safety accessories for insulation between connections
and the backplate. Compatible with terminal shields or
interphase barriers.
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
E
5
8
5
4
1
Terminal shields
E
5
8
5
4
2
Interphase barriers
E
5
8
5
4
3
Rear insulating screens
Functions and characteristics

A-97
Connection of electrical auxiliaries
Fixed confguration
Auxiliary circuits exit the device through a knock-out in the front cover.
Plug-in and withdrawable confgurations
Automatic auxiliary connectors
Auxiliary circuits exit the circuit breaker via one to three automatic auxiliary
connectors (nine wires each). These are made up of:
a moving part, connected to the circuit breaker via a support (one support per
circuit breaker)
a fxed part, mounted on the plug-in base, equipped with connectors for bare
cables up to 2.5 mm
2
.
Selection of automatic auxiliary connectors.
For Compact NS400 to 630, connection wires for the options installed with trip unit
STR53UE also exit via the automatic auxiliary connectors.
Manual auxiliary connector for withdrawable confgurations
Withdrawable circuit breakers may be equipped with one to three plugs with nine
wires each. In disconnected position, the auxiliaries remain connected and can
therefore be tested by operating the circuit breaker.
b
b
Each auxiliary is equipped with a terminal block with numbered
terminals for connection of wires up to:
b 1.5 mm
2
for auxiliary contacts and voltage releases
b 2.5 mm
2
for the motor-mechanism module.
Compact NS100 to 250 Compact NS400 to 630
E
2
8
4
4
3
MN/MX
OF1 SD SDE OF2
SDV
motor mechanism
OR
rotary handle
Compact NS100/160/250
E
2
8
4
4
4
MN/MX
OF1 OF2 SD SDE OF3
SDV
motor mechanism
OR
rotary handle
Compact NS400 to 630
E
1
8
5
8
5
E
1
8
5
8
6
E
2
1
3
9
7
connector 1
OF1
SD
MN/MX
connector 2
OF2/SDV
SDE/MT
MT
E
2
1
3
9
8
connector 1
OF1
SD
MN/MX
connector 2
OF2
SDE/MT
MT
connector 3
OF3/SDV
COM
T
E
1
8
5
8
7
Nine-wire manual auxiliary
connector

A-98
Electrical and mechanical
accessories
Compact NS100 to 630 (cont.)
Indication contacts
Common-point changeover contacts are used to remote circuit breaker status
information and can thus be used for indications, electrical locking, relaying, etc.
They comply with the IEC 60947-5 international recommendation.
Functions
OF (ON/OFF) - indicates the position of the circuit breaker contacts
SD (trip indication) - indicates that the circuit breaker has tripped due to:
an overload
a short-circuit
an earth-leakage fault
operation of a voltage release
operation of the push to trip button
disconnection when the device is ON.
Returns to de-energised state when the circuit breaker is reset.
SDE (fault indication) - indicates that the circuit breaker has tripped due to:
an overload
a short-circuit
an earth-leakage fault.
Returns to de-energised state when the circuit breaker is reset.
SDV (Earth-leakage fault indication) - indicates that the circuit breaker has tripped
due to an earth fault.
Returns to de-energised state when the circuit breaker is reset.
CAM (early-make or early-break function) - indicates the position of the rotary
handle. Used in particular for advanced opening of safety trip devices (early break)
or to energise a control device prior to circuit breaker closing (early make)
CE / CD (connected/disconnected position) - microswitch type carriage switches
for withdrawable circuit breakers
Installation
OF, SD, SDE and SDV functions - a single type of contact provides all these
different indication functions, depending on where it is inserted in the device. The
contacts clip into slots behind the front cover of the circuit breaker (or the Vigi module
for the SDV function).
The SDE function on a circuit breaker equipped with a thermal-magnetic trip unit
requires the SDE actuator.
CAM function - the contact fts into the rotary-handle unit (direct or extended).
CE / CD (connected/disconnected) function - two parts must be ftted on the fxed
and moving parts of the chassis.
Electrical characteristics of auxiliary contacts
b
b
v
v
v
v
v
v
b
v
v
v
b
b
b
b
b
b
All the auxiliary contacts opposite are also available
in low-level versions capable of switching very low
loads (e.g. for the control of PLCs or electronic
circuits).
0
4
4
3
1
4
Changeover contacts
Contacts Standard Low level
Rated thermal current (A) 6 5
Minimum load 100 mA at 24 V 1 mA at 4 V
Utilisation cat. (IEC 60947-5-1) AC12 AC15 DC12 DC14 AC12 AC15 DC12 DC14
Operational 24 V 6 6 6 1 5 3 5 1
current (A) 48 V 6 6 2.5 0.2 5 3 2.5 0.2
110V 6 5 0.6 0.05 5 2.5 0.6 0.05
220/240 V 6 4 - - 5 2 - -
250 V - - 0.3 0.03 5 - 0.3 0.03
380/440 V 6 2 - - 5 1.5 - -
480 V 6 1.5 - - 5 1 - -
660/690 V 6 0.1 - - - - - -
Functions and characteristics

A-99
Rotary handles
There are two types of rotary handle:
direct rotary handle
extended rotary handle.
There are two models:
standard with a black handle
VDE with a red handle and yellow front for machine-tool control.
Direct rotary handle
Degree of protection IP40, IK07.
The direct rotary handle maintains:
visibility of and access to trip unit settings
suitability for isolation
indication of the three positions O (OFF), I (ON) and tripped
access to the push to trip button
circuit breaker locking capability in the OFF position by one to three padlocks,
shackle diameter 5 to 8 mm (not supplied).
It replaces the circuit breaker front cover.
Accessories transform the standard direct rotary handle for the following
situations:
motor control centre (MCC) switchboards:
door opening disabled when the circuit breaker is ON
circuit breaker closing is disabled if the door is open
a higher degree of protection (IP43, IK07)
machine-tool control, complying with CNOMO E03.81.501, IP54, IK08.
Extended rotary handle
Degree of protection IP 55, IK08.
This handle makes it poss ble to operate circuit breakers installed at the back of
switchboards, from the switchboard front.
It maintains:
suitability for isolation
indication of the three positions O (OFF), I (ON) and tripped
access to trip unit settings, when the switchboard door is open
circuit breaker locking capability in the OFF position by one to three padlocks,
shackle diameter 5 to 8 mm (not supplied).
The door cannot be opened if the circuit breaker is ON or locked.
The extended rotary handle is made up of:
a unit that replaces the front cover of the circuit breaker (secured by screws)
an assembly (handle and front plate) on the door that is always secured in the
same position, whether the circuit breaker is installed vertically or horizontally
an extension shaft that must be adjusted to the distance. The min/max distance
between the back of circuit breaker and door is:
185 to 600 mm for Compact NS100 to 250
210 to 625 mm for Compact NS400 to 630.
For withdrawable confgurations, the extended rotary handle is also available with a
telescopic shaft with two stable positions.
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
v
v
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
v
v
0
4
5
3
4
9
Compact NS250L with a direct rotary handle
0
4
4
3
1
6
Compact NS250L with an extended rotary handle

A-100
Remote tripping
MX or MN voltage releases are used to trip the circuit breaker.
MN undervoltage release
This release trips the circuit breaker when the control voltage drops below a tripping
threshold:
tripping threshold between 0.35 and 0.7 times the rated voltage
circuit breaker closing is possible if the voltage exceeds 0.85 times the rated
voltage.
For a lower value, circuit breaker closing cannot be guaranteed.
Circuit breaker tripping by an MN release meets the requirements of standard
IEC 60947-2.
Time-delay unit for an MN release
Eliminates nuisance tripping due to transient voltage dips lasting 200 ms.
It is used in conjunction with:
a 250 V DC MN release, control voltage 220/240 V AC
a 48 V DC MN release, control voltage 48 V AC.
MX shunt release
Trips the circuit breaker when the control voltage rises above 0.7 x Un.
Control signals can be of the impulse type (u 20 ms) or maintained.
Operation
When the circuit breaker has been tripped by an MN or MX release, it must be reset
locally.
MN or MX tripping takes priority over manual closing.
In the presence of a standing trip order, closing of the contacts, even temporary,
is not possible.
Mechanical characteristics
endurance is equal to 50 % of the mechanical endurance of the circuit breaker
the releases clip in behind the front cover
connection using wires up to 1.5 mm
2
, to integrated terminal blocks.
Electrical characteristics
consumption:
pick-up (MX): < 10 VA
seal-in (MN and MNR): < 5 VA.
response time: <50 ms.
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
v
v
b
Electrical and mechanical
accessories
Compact NS100 to 630 (cont.)
0
4
4
3
1
3
MX or MN voltage release
Functions and characteristics

A-101
1 contact position indicator (suitability for isolation)
2 outgoing-circuit identifcation labels
3 spring status indicator (charged, discharged)
4 locking device (keylock)
5 locking device (OFF position), using 1 to 3 padlocks,
shackle diameter 5 to 8 mm, not supplied
6 manual spring-charging lever
7 I (ON) pushbutton
8 O (OFF) pushbutton
9 manual/auto mode selection switch. The position of this
switch can be indicated remotely
10 operations counter (Compact NS400/630)
Motor-mechanism module
When equipped with a motor-mechanism module, Compact NS circuit breakers
feature very high mechanical endurance as well as easy and sure operation:
all circuit breaker indications and information remain visible and accessible,
including trip-unit settings and indications
suitability for isolation is maintained and padlocking remains possible
double insulation of the front face.
Applications
local motor-driven operation, centralised operation, automatic distribution control
normal/standby source changeover or switching to a replacement source to
optimise energy costs
load shedding and reconnection to optimise energy costs
synchrocoupling.
Automatic operation
circuit breaker ON and OFF controlled by two impulse-type or maintained control
signals
automatic spring charging following voluntary tripping (by MN or MX),
with standard wiring
mandatory manual reset following tripping due to an electrical fault.
Manual operation
transfer to manual mode using a switch (9) with possibility of remote mode
indication
circuit breaker ON and OFF controlled by 2 pushbuttons
recharging of stored-energy system by pumping the lever 9 times
padlocking in OFF position.
Installation and connection
All installation (fxed, plug-in/withdrawable) and connection poss bilities are
maintained.
Motor-mechanism module connections are made behind its front cover to integrated
terminals, for cables up to 2.5 mm.
Accessories
keylock for locking in OFF position
operations counter for the Compact NS400 and NS630, indicating the number of
ON and OFF cycles. The counter must be installed on the front of the motor-
mechanism module.
Characteristics
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
(1) For NS100/250, motor "vibratory" type consider inrush
current as 2 In during 10 ms cycling.
0
4
7
3
1
3

Compact NS250H with motor mechanism
D
B
1
1
7
5
7
6

D
B
1
1
7
5
7
7
Motor mechanism MT100 to MT630
Response time (ms) opening <600
closing <80
Rate cycles/minute max. 4
Control voltage (V) DC 24/30 - 48/60
110/130 - 250
AC 50/60 Hz 48 (50 Hz) - 110/130
220/240 - 380/440
Consumption
(1)
DC (W) opening y 500
closing y 500
AC (VA) opening y 500
closing y 500
Electrical endurance
Circuit breaker +motor-mechanism module, in thousands of operations
(IEC 60947-2), at 440 V.

A-102
Functions and characteristics
Indications and measurement
Voltage presence indicator
The indicator detects and indicates that circuit breaker terminals are supplied with
power.
Installation
in the long or short terminal shields, via the knockouts
not compatible with the motor-mechanism module
upstream or downstream of the circuit breaker
degree of protection IP40, IK04.
Electrical characteristics
Operates on all networks with voltages ranging from 220 to 550 V AC.
Current-transformer module
This module enables direct connection of a measurement device such as an
ammeter or a Digipact power meter (not supplied).
Installation
directly on the downstream circuit breaker terminals
degree of protection IP40, IK04
class II insulation between front and the power circuits
connection to 6 integrated connectors for cables up to 2.5 mm
2
.
Electrical characteristics
transformer with 5 A secondary winding.
accuracy class 3 for the following output-power consumptions:
rating 100 A: 1.6 VA
rating 150 A: 3 VA
rating 250 A: 5 VA
rating 400/630A: 8 VA.
Current-transformer module with voltage measurement
outputs
For direct connection of a digital power monitoring unit: Power Meter PM700,
PM800, etc. (not supplied).
Installation
mounts directly on the downstream terminals of the circuit breaker
degree of protection: IP40 and IK04
class II insulation of front with respect to the power circuits
built-in connectors for cables from 1.5 to 2.5 mm
2
.
Electrical characteristics
rated operational voltage Ue: 530 V
frequencies of measured values: 5060 Hz
three CTs with 5 A secondary windings for the rated primary current IN
class 0.5 to 1 for rated power consumption values at the output:
- 125 A, 150 A and 250 A ratings: class 1 for 1.1 VA
- 400/600 A rating: class 0.5 for 2 VA
use a cable of 2.5 mm
2
section up to 2.5 m long.
four voltage measurement outputs including protection with automatic reset.
voltage measurement output impedance 3500 25 %,
maximum current 1 mA.
Ammeter and Imax ammeter modules
Ammeter module
Measures and displays (dial-type ammeter) the current of each phase (selection of
phases by 3-position switch in front).
Imax ammeter module
Measures and displays (dial-type ammeter) the maximum current fowing in the
middle phase. The Imax value can be reset on the front.
Installation
identical for both types of ammeter module
directly on the downstream circuit breaker terminals
ammeter clips into module in any of four 90 positions, i.e. can be installed of
devices mounted both vertically and horizontally
degree of protection IP40, IK04
class II insulation between front and the power circuits.
Electrical characteristics
ammeter module: accuracy class 4.5
Imax ammeter module: accuracy 6 %
maximum currents are displayed only if they last at least 15 minutes.
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
v
v
v
v
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
v
v
b
v
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
v
Electrical and mechanical
accessories
Compact NS100 to 630 (cont.)
0
4
8
2
8
7
Compact NS630L with voltage-presence indicator
0
4
1
8
9
2
Compact NS630H with current-transformer module
0
4
5
2
1
2
Compact NS250L with ammeter module

A-103
Insulation-monitoring module
This module detects and indicates an insulation drop on a load circuit (TN-S or TT
systems).
Operation is identical to that of a Vigi module, but without circuit breaker tripping.
Indication by a red LED in front.
An auxiliary contact may be installed for remote insulation-drop indications.
Installation
directly on the downstream circuit breaker terminals
degree of protection: IP40, IK04
double insulation of the front face.
Electrical characteristics
settings: 100, 200, 500 and 1000 mA
accuracy: -50 +0 %
time delay following drop: 5 to 10 seconds
AC-system voltage: 200 to 440 V AC and 440 to 550 V AC.
Communicating auxiliaries
Communicating versions of the auxiliary contacts and the motor-mechanism module
also exist for integration in a Digipact communications system. They simply replace
the standard electrical auxiliaries.
Using the STR53UE and STR43ME trip units equipped with the COM
communications option, it is poss ble to transmit data to Digipact modules:
settings
rms values of phase and neutral currents
current of the most heavily loaded phase
overload alarm in progress
tripping cause (overload, short-circuit, etc.).
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
0
4
1
8
9
6
Compact NS250H with insulation-monitoring module
0
5
3
1
7
2
Compact NS equipped with communicating auxiliary contacts
and motor-mechanism module
0
5
4
4
8
1
Withdrawable Compact NS equipped with communicating
auxiliary contacts

A-104
Electrical and mechanical
accessories
Compact NS100 to 630 (cont.)
Locking systems
Locking in the OFF position guarantees isolation as per IEC 60947-2.
Padlocking systems can receive up to three padlocks with shackle diameters
ranging from 5 to 8 mm (padlocks not supplied).
Functions and characteristics
Control device Function Means Required
accessories
Toggle lock in OFF position padlock removable device
lock in OFF or
ON position
padlock fxed device
Direct rotary handle lock in OFF position padlock
keylock locking
device +keylock
MCC rotary handle lock in OFF position padlock
Rotary handle lock in OFF position padlock
Extended rotary handle lock in OFF position,
door opening prevented
keylock keylock
Motor mechanism lock in OFF position, padlock
motor mechanism
locked out
keylock locking device
(keylock incorporated)
E
5
8
5
4
4
Locking of the toggle
using a removable device
E
5
8
5
4
5
Locking of the toggle using a
fxed device
E
1
8
6
2
0
ON
I
O
OFF
pr
falu
Locking of the rotary handle
using a padlock or a keylock.

A-105
Individual enclosures
Compact NS and Vigicompact NS devices with two, three or four poles may be
installed in individual enclosures.
All fxed, front connections are possible, except right-angle and edgewise terminal
extensions. Spreaders may be installed in the enclosures intended for Interpact
Compact and Vigicompact NS250 to 630 devices.
There are two models of enclosures:
heavy-duty metal individual enclosure, with:
metal enclosure
door with keylock and cut-out for rotary handle
direct rotary handle (CNOMO, IP55, IK08)
device mounting plate
removable plate (without holes) for cable entry through bottom
heavy-duty insulating individual enclosure, with:
polyester insulating enclosure
transparent cover, screwed, lead sealable, with cut-out for rotary handle
extended rotary handle
device mounting plate
removable plates (without holes) for cable entry through bottom and/or top.
Insulating enclosure
Circuit breaker Dimensions (overall)
Compact and Vigicompact NS100/160 360 x 270 x 235
Compact NS250 540 x 270 x 235
Compact NS400/630 720 x 360 x 235
Vigicompact NS250/630 720 x 360 x 235
b
v
v
v
v
v
b
v
v
v
v
v
0
4
8
8
0
3
Heavy-duty insulating individual enclosure for Compact NS
Duct
D
D
3
8
1
7
2
9
D
D
3
8
1
7
3
0
Metal enclosure
Circuit breaker No of
modules
H1 A B Dimensions
(overall)
Compact and Vigicompact NS100/160 7 425 375 475 450 x 350 x 260
Compact and Vigicompact NS250 11 625 575 675 650 x 350 x 260
Compact NS400 11 625 575 675 650 x 350 x 260
Compact NS630 and Vigicompact NS400/630 15 825 775 875 850 x 350 x 260
Gland Plates
D
D
3
8
1
7
9
0
D
B
1
1
7
5
9
1
(*) This overall dimension does not include the knob of the rotary handle.
(*)

A-106
Escutcheons
Escutcheons are an optional feature mounted on the
switchboard door. They increase the degree of
protection to at least IP40, IK07.
Protection collar for toggle and Vigi
module on withdrawable devices
Protection collars maintain the degree of protection,
whatever the position of the device (connected,
disconnected).
front-panel escutcheons are mandatory (same as
those for rotary handles and ammeter modules)
collars are mounted on the device using two screws
escutcheons are attached to the switchboard
a toggle extension is supplied with the collar.
For the insulation-monitoring module, use the same
elements as for the Vigi module.
Front-panel escutcheons for motor mechanism,
rotary handles, ammeter modules
Same as for fxed devices.
b
b
b
b
Electrical and mechanical
accessories
Compact NS100 to 630 (cont.)
Functions and characteristics
E
2
3
9
3
5
Front-panel escutcheons for
toggle and Vigi module
(NSA160). Secures to
the panel, from the front.
E
2
3
9
3
6
Toggle cover
b degree of protection IP43,
IK07
b fts on the front of the circuit
breaker.
E
2
1
2
6
5
E
2
3
9
3
8
O
OFF
ON
I
u
i
Front-panel escutcheon for
rotary handle.
Secures to the panel by four
screws, from the front.
For circuit breaker with motor
mechanism and Vigi module,
use the protection collar for
front panel mounting (see
below).
D
B
1
1
7
5
7
8
Front-panel escutcheons for
ammeter module. Secures to
the panel by four screws, from
the front.
E
2
1
2
6
7

A-107
Outgoing-circuit identifcation
Compact NS100 to 630 devices come with clip-in labels for hand-written indications.
It is also possible to use pre-printed Telemecanique labels part number AB1-**:
Compact NS100 to 250: 8 digits
Compact NS400 to 630: 16 digits.
Sealing accessories
This option includes the elements required to ft lead seals to prevent:
front removal
rotary-handle removal
opening of the motor-mechanism module
access to auxiliaries
access to trip-unit settings
trip-unit removal
access to earth-leakage protection settings
terminal-shield removal
access to power connections.
v
v
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
E
1
8
5
9
5
D
E
P. P
O
M
P
P
P.
E
D
push
to
trip
O
Identifcation accessories
E
1
8
5
9
6
Sealing accessories

A-108
I
h
OO F
g
Oh FF
I on
e p p i t
t e r
0 OFF
d
I on
d e p i t
t e r
0 OFF
Auxiliary contact
Vertical connection
adapter
Sealable terminal
shield
Voltage release
Terminal extension for
cables with lugs
Connection kit
for connectors
Manual control with
front connection
Connection kit
for connectors
Spreader
Escutcheon
Sealable terminal
shield
Extended rotary
handle
Direct rotary
handle
Communications
module
Spreader
Interphase barriers
Rear connectors
Manual control with
rear connection
Electrical control with
mixed connection
Phase
barriers
Functions and characteristics
Electrical and mechanical
accessories
Compact NS630b to 1600
(xed version)
E
5
9
2
2
4

A-109
Compact NS630 to 1600
(withdrawable version)
E
5
9
2
2
5
I
h N
OOFF
i
Oh O F
d
I on
d e p i t
t e r
0 OFF
I on
d e p p r t
t e s e r
0 OFF
Chassis with front or
rear connection
Spreader
Interphase barriers
Rear connectors
Manual operation
Electrical operation
Vertical connection
adapter
Terminal extention for
cables with lugs
Spreader
Escutcheon
Auxiliary contact
Voltage release
Extended rotary
handle
Direct rotary
handle
Communications
module
Transparent cover

A-110
Installation
Fixed confguration
Compact NS630b to 1600 circuit breakers may be installed vertically, horizontally or
fat on their back.
Withdrawable confguration
Compact NS630b to 1600 circuit breakers should be installed vertically only.
Electrical and mechanical
accessories
Compact NS630b to 1600
The withdrawable confguration makes it possible to:
b extract and/or rapidly replace the circuit breaker
without having to touch connections;
b allow for the addition of future circuits at a later date.
Functions and characteristics
D
B
1
1
2
5
3
0
Fixed Compact NS800H
E
5
9
2
7
8
E
4
5
1
7
6
Withdrawable Compact NS800H
E
5
9
2
8
1
A
E
5
9
2
2
6
A
Mounting on a backplate
E
5
9
2
2
7
A
Mounting on rails
E
5
9
2
2
8
A
Mounting on a backplate
E
5
9
2
2
9
A
Rear mounting on rails
E
5
9
2
3
0
Device on mounting plate
E
5
9
2
3
1
Device on rails

A-111
The multifunctional chassis for Compact NS630b to 1600 devices is particularly
suited for incoming circuit breakers. Features include:
device connection and disconnection through a door, using a crank that can be
stored in the chassis
three positions (connected, test and disconnected) that are indicated:
locally by a position indicator
remotely by carriage switches (3 for the connected position, 2 for the disconnected
position and 1 for the test position)
circuit breaker ON/OFF commands through a switchboard front panel.
Locking
There are extensive locking possibilities:
chassis locking in connected, disconnected and test positions using three
padlocks and two keylocks, on the switchboard front panel
door interlock (inhibits door opening with breaker in connected position)
racking interlock (inhibits racking with door open)
locking in each of the connected, disconnected and test positions during device
connection or disconnection. Continuation to the next position requires pressing a
release button to free the crank.
Other safety function
Mismatch protection ensures that a circuit breaker is installed only in a chassis with
compatible characteristics.
b
b
v
v
b
b
b
b
b
The device may be in one of four positions on the
chassis:
b connected position. The power circuits and auxiliary
contacts are all connected
b test position. The power circuits are disconnected.
The auxiliary contacts are still connected and the
device can be operated electrically
b disconnected position. The power circuits and
auxiliary contacts are all disconnected, however the
device is still mounted on the chassis. It can be
operated manually (ON, OFF, "push to trip").
b removed position. All circuits are disconnected. The
device simply rests on the chassis rails and can be
removed.
mismatch protection
door interlock
racking interlock
keylock locking
padlock locking
position indicator
chassis front plate (accessible with cubicle door closed)
crank entry
reset button
crank storage
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
E
5
9
2
3
2
A
Connected Test Disconnected Removed
E
5
9
2
6
7
A
1
2
8
10
9
7
5
6
4
3

A-112
Electrical and mechanical
accessories
Compact NS630b to 1600 (cont.)
Types of connection
Fixed device
Front connections (N, H, L) Connection by:
bars bare cables (except L) cables with lugs

Rear connections (N, H, L, LB) Connection by:
Horizontal: Vertical: bars cables with lugs
Simply turn a horizontal rear connector 90 to make it a vertical connector.
Combination of front and rear connections (N, H, L) Connection by:
bars bare cables (except L) cables with lugs
Withdrawable device
Front connections Connection by:
bars cables with lugs
Rear connections Connection by:
bars cables with lugs
Functions and characteristics
D
B
1
1
2
4
8
0
D
B
1
1
2
4
8
1
D
B
1
1
2
4
8
2
D
B
1
1
2
4
8
4
D
B
1
1
2
4
8
3
D
B
1
1
2
4
8
5

D
B
1
1
2
4
8
6
D
B
1
1
2
4
8
7
D
B
1
1
2
4
8
4
D
B
1
1
2
4
8
1
D
B
1
1
2
4
8
8
D
B
1
1
2
4
8
9
E
5
9
2
3
7
D
B
1
1
2
4
8
1
D
B
1
1
2
4
8
2
D
B
1
1
2
4
8
4
D
B
1
1
2
4
8
3
D
B
1
1
2
4
8
5

D
B
1
1
2
4
9
1
D
B
1
1
2
4
8
1
D
B
1
1
2
4
8
4
D
B
1
1
2
4
8
5

D
B
1
1
2
4
9
2
D
B
1
1
2
4
8
1
D
B
1
1
2
4
8
4
D
B
1
1
2
4
8
8

A-113
Connections accessories
To ensure performance and isolation, depending on the
type of circuit breaker (N, H, L, LB) and type of
connection, certain isolation accessories are
mandatory.
Type of accessories For Compact NS630b to NS1600
Fixed: Withdrawable:
Front connection Rear connection Front connection Rear connection
Vertical-connection adapters N, H, L - N, H, L, LB -





Set of bare-cable connectors
and terminal shields for
ratings y 1250 A
N, H - - -



Cable lug adapters N, H, L N, H, L, LB N, H, L, LB N, H, L, LB





Interphase barriers N, H, L, LB N, H, L, LB - N, H, L, LB
(1) (2) (1) (1)
Spreaders N, H, L N, H, L, LB N, H, L, LB N, H, L, LB




Connection shield N, H, L - - -





Safety shutters with locking by
padlocks (IP20)
- - N, H, L, LB
(standard)
N, H, L, LB
(standard)
Arc chute screen N, H, L - - -
(1) (2)
(1) Mandatory for voltages u 500 V unless using the bare-cable connector + terminal shield kit.
(2) Mandatory for xed devices with L and LB performance levels, whatever the voltage.
D
B
1
0
7
6
6
6
D
B
1
0
7
6
6
5
D
B
1
0
7
6
6
9
D
B
1
0
7
6
6
2
D
B
1
0
7
6
6
8
D
B
1
0
7
6
6
1
D
B
1
0
7
6
6
7
D
B
1
0
7
6
6
0

A-114
Electrical and mechanical
accessories
Compact NS630b to 1600 (cont.)
Fixed, front-connection Compact NS630b to 1600
devices are equipped with terminals comprising captive
screws for direct connection of bars.
Other connection possibilities for bars include vertical-
connection adapters for edgewise bars and spreaders
to increase the pole pitch to 95 mm.
If the vertical connection adapters are front oriented,
then it is mandatory to install the arc chute screen in
order to comply with the safety clearances.
Bare cables
Special sets of connectors and terminal shields may be
used to connect up to four 240 mm
2
copper or
aluminium cables for each phase. Bare cable
connection is poss ble for ratings up to and including
1250 A.
Cables with lugs
Cable lug adapters are combined with the vertical-
connection adapters.
One to four cables with crimped lugs (y 300 mm
2
) may
be connected.
To ensure stability, spacers must be positioned
between the terminal extensions.
If the cable lug adapters are installed over the top of the
arc chute chambers, then it is mandatory to install the
arc chute screen in order to comply with the safety
clearances.
Front connection of fxed devices
Bars
Functions and characteristics
E
5
9
2
3
5
E
5
4
5
4
0
E
4
6
4
2
6
A
Vertical-connection adapters
E
4
6
4
3
1
A
Spreaders.
E
5
9
2
3
8
A
E
5
9
2
3
9
A
E
5
9
2
4
0
A
E
7
0
7
5
0
E
5
9
2
4
1
A
E
5
9
2
4
2
A
E
5
9
2
4
3
A
E
7
0
7
5
1
E
4
6
8
8
7
A
4-cable connectors
E
4
6
4
2
7
A
Cable lug adapters
E
5
4
4
5
6
E
5
4
4
5
7

A-115
Rear connection of fxed devices
Bars
Fixed, rear-connection Compact NS630b to 1600
devices equipped with horizontal or vertical connectors
may be directly connected to fat or edgewise bars,
depending on the position of the connectors.
Spreaders are available to increase the pole pitch
to 95 mm.
Cables with lugs
Cable lug adapters enable connection of one to four
cables with crimped lugs (y 300 mm
2
).
To ensure stability, spacers must be positioned
between the terminal extensions.
E
4
6
4
3
1
A
Spreaders.
E
4
6
4
2
7
A
Cable lug adapters
E
5
4
5
4
0
E
5
4
4
5
6
E
5
9
2
3
6
E
5
9
2
5
7
A
E
5
9
2
4
8
A
E
5
9
2
4
7
A
E
5
9
2
4
9
A
E
5
9
2
5
0
A

A-116
Electrical and mechanical
accessories
Compact NS630b to 1600 (cont.)
Front connection of withdrawable devices
Bars
Withdrawable, front-connection Compact NS630b to
1600 devices are suitable for direct connection of bars.
Other connection possibilities for bars include vertical-
connection adapters for edgewise bars and spreaders
to increase the pole pitch to 95 mm.
Cables with lugs
Cable lug adapters enable connection of one to four
cables with crimped lugs (y 300 mm
2
).
To ensure stability, spacers must be positioned
between the terminal extensions.
Functions and characteristics
E
5
4
5
4
0
E
5
4
4
5
6
E
4
6
4
2
7
A
Cable lug adapters
E
4
6
4
3
1
A
Spreaders.
E
4
6
4
2
6
A
Vertical-connection adapters
E
5
9
2
5
2
A
E
5
9
2
5
3
A
E
5
9
2
5
4
A
E
5
9
2
5
5
A
E
5
9
2
5
6
A
E
5
9
2
8
0

A-117
Rear connection of withdrawable devices
Bars
Withdrawable, rear-connection Compact NS630b to
1600 devices equipped with horizontal or vertical
connectors may be directly connected to fat or edge-
wise bars, depending on the position of the connectors.
Spreaders are available to increase the pole pitch to
95 mm.
Cables with lugs
Cable lug adapters enable connection of one to four
cables with crimped lugs (y 300 mm
2
).
To ensure stability, spacers must be positioned
between the terminal extensions.
E
5
4
5
4
0
E
5
9
2
8
2
A
E
4
6
4
2
7
A
Cable lug adapters
E
4
6
4
3
1
A
Spreaders.
E
5
4
4
5
6
E
5
9
2
5
8
A
E
5
9
2
5
9
A
E
5
9
2
6
0
A
E
5
9
2
6
1
A
E
5
9
2
6
2
A

A-118
Electrical and mechanical
accessories
Compact NS630b to 1600 (cont.)
Insulation of live parts
Connection shield
Mounted on fxed, front-connection devices, this shield
insulates power-connection points, particularly when
cables with lugs are used
Interphase barriers
These barriers are fexible insulated partitions used to
reinforce isolation of connection points in installations
with busbars, whether insulated or not.
Barriers are installed vertically between front or rear
connection terminals.
They are mandatory for voltages u 500 V for both fxed
and withdrawable products and for L and LB types,
whatever the voltage.
Safety shutters (standard)
Mounted on the chassis, the safety shutters
automatically block access to the disconnecting
contact cluster when the device is in the disconnected
or test positions (degree of protection IP20). When the
device is removed from its chassis, no live parts are
accessible.
The shutters can be padlocked (padlock not supplied)
to:
prevent connection of the device
lock the shutters in the closed position.
b
b
Functions and characteristics
E
4
5
1
9
0
Compact NS equipped with connection shield
E
5
9
2
6
3
A
Connection shield
E
7
9
0
5
6
Interphase barriers for fxed
device, front connection
E
7
9
0
5
7
Interphase barriers for fxed
device, rear connection
E
5
9
2
6
4
A
Interphase barriers for
withdrawable device, rear
connection
E
5
9
2
6
5
A
Safety shutters

A-119
Connection of electrical auxiliaries
Fixed devices
Connections are made directly to the auxiliaries once the front has been removed.
Wires exit the circuit breaker through a knock-out in the top.
Withdrawable devices
Auxiliary circuits are connected to terminal blocks located in the top part of the
chassis.
The auxiliary terminal block is made up of a fxed and moving part. The two parts are
in contact when the device is in the test and connected positions.
E
5
9
2
8
3
A
OF1
OF2
OF3
SD
COM
1
F
A
C
2
F
A
C
1
O
A
C
2
O
A
C
E
D
S
MN
or
MX
rotary handle
Manually operated device
E
5
9
2
8
4
A
E
D
S
3
F
O
2
F
O
1
F
O
MN
o
MX COM
E
D
S
3
F
O
2
F
O
1
F
O
MN
o
MX COM
MN
or
MX
Electrically operated device
E
5
9
2
8
5
A
2
D
C
1
D
C
3
E
C
2
E
C
1
E
C
1
T
C
Withdrawable device
E
5
9
2
8
6
A
E
5
9
2
8
7
A

A-120
Electrical and mechanical
accessories
Compact NS630b to 1600 (cont.)
Indication contacts
Contacts installed in the device
Changeover contacts are used to remote circuit breaker status information and can
thus be used for indications, electrical locking, relaying, etc.
They comply with the IEC 60947-5 international recommendation.
Functions
OF (ON/OFF) - indicates the position of the main circuit breaker contacts
SD (trip indication) - indicates that the circuit breaker has tripped due to:
an overload
a short-circuit
an earth-leakage fault.
operation of a voltage release
operation of the "push to trip" button
disconnection when the device is ON.
Returns to de-energised state when the circuit breaker is reset.
SDE (fault indication) - indicates that the circuit breaker has tripped due to:
an overload
a short-circuit
an earth-leakage fault.
Returns to de-energised state when the circuit breaker is reset.
CAF / CAO (early-make or early-break function) - indicates the position of the
rotary handle. Used in particular for advanced opening of safety trip devices (early
break) or to energise a control device prior to circuit breaker closing (early make).
Installation
OF, SD and SDE functions - a single type of contact provides all these different
indication functions, depending on where it is inserted in the device. The contacts
clip into slots behind the front cover of the circuit breaker
CAF / CAO function - the contact fts into the rotary-handle unit (direct or
extended).
Electrical characteristics of the OF/SD/SDE/CAF/CAO auxiliary contacts
Contacts Standard Low level
Rated thermal current (A) 6 5
Minimum load 100 mA at 24 V 1 mA at 4 V
Utilisation cat. (IEC 60947-5-1) AC12 AC15 DC12 DC14 AC12 AC15 DC12 DC14
Operational 24 V 6 6 6 1 5 3 5 1
current (A) 48 V 6 6 2.5 0.2 5 3 2.5 0.2
110 V 6 5 0.6 0.05 5 2.5 0.6 0.05
220/240 V 6 4 - - 5 2 - -
250 V - - 0.3 0.03 5 - 0.3 0.03
380/440 V 6 2 - - 5 1.5 - -
480 V 6 1.5 - - 5 1 - -
660/690 V 6 0.1 - - - - - -
Connected, disconnected, test position carriage switches
A single type of changeover contact can be mounted optionally on the chassis to
indicate, depending on the slot where it is installed:
the connected (CE) position
the disconnected (CD) position. This position is indicated when the required
clearance for isolation of the power and auxiliary circuits is reached
the test (CT) position. In this position, the power circuits are disconnected and the
auxiliary circuits are connected.
Installation
contacts for the connected (CE), disconnected (CD) and test (CT) positions clip
into the upper front section of the chassis.
Electrical characteristics of the CE/CD/CT auxiliary contacts
Contacts Standard Low level
Rated thermal current (A) 8 5
Minimum load 100 mA at 24 V 2 mA at 15 V
Utilisation cat. (IEC 60947-5-1) AC12 AC15 DC12 DC14 AC12 AC15 DC12 DC14
Operational 24 V 8 6 2.5 1 5 3 5 1
current (A) 48 V 8 6 2.5 0.2 5 3 2.5 0.2
110 V 8 5 0.8 0.05 5 2.5 0.8 0.05
220/240 V 8 4 - - 5 2 - -
250 V - - 0.3 0.03 5 - 0.3 0.03
380/440 V 8 3 - - 5 1.5 - -
660/690 V 6 0.1 - - - - - -
b
b
v
v
v
v
v
v
b
v
v
v
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
All the auxiliary contacts opposite are also available
in "low-level" versions capable of switching very low
loads (e.g. for the control of PLCs or electronic
circuits).
Functions and characteristics
0
4
4
3
1
4
OF, SD and SDE changeover contacts
0
5
6
4
5
6
Carriage switches for connected (CE), disconnected (CD) and
test (CT) positions

A-121
Rotary handles
There are two types of rotary handle:
direct rotary handle
extended rotary handle.
There are two models:
standard with a black handle
VDE with a red handle and yellow front for machine-tool control.
Direct rotary handle
Degree of protection IP40, IK07.
The direct rotary handle maintains:
vis bility of and access to trip unit settings
suitability for isolation
indication of the three positions O (OFF), I (ON) and tripped
access to the "push to trip" button
circuit breaker locking capability in the OFF position by one to three padlocks,
shackle diameter 5 to 8 mm (not supplied).
It replaces the circuit breaker front cover.
Accessories transform the standard direct rotary handle for the following situations:
a higher degree of protection (IP43, IK07)
machine-tool control, complying with CNOMO E03.81.501, IP54, IK07.
Extended rotary handle
Degree of protection IP55, IK07.
This handle makes it possible to operate circuit breakers installed at the back of
switchboards, from the switchboard front.
It maintains:
suitability for isolation
indication of the three positions O (OFF), I (ON) and tripped
access to trip unit settings, when the switchboard door is open
circuit breaker locking capability in the OFF position by one to three padlocks,
shackle diameter 5 to 8 mm (not supplied).
The door cannot be opened if the circuit breaker is ON or locked.
The extended rotary handle is made up of:
a unit that replaces the front cover of the circuit breaker (secured by screws)
an assembly (handle and front plate) on the door that is always secured in the
same position, whether the circuit breaker is installed vertically or horizontally
an extension shaft that must be adjusted to the distance. The min/max distance
between the back of circuit breaker and door is 218/605 mm.
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
M6C programmable contacts
These contacts, used with the Micrologic P control units, may be programmed via the
control unit keypad or via a supervisory station with the COM communication option.
They require an external power supply module.
They indicate:
the type of fault
instantaneous or delayed threshold overruns.
They may be programmed:
with instantaneous return to the initial state
without return to the initial state
with return to the initial state following a delay.
b
b
b
b
b
Characteristics M6C
Minimum load 100 mA/24 V
Breaking capacity (A) V AC 240 5
p.f.: 0.7 380 3
V DC 24 1.8
48 1.5
125 0.4
250 0.15
M6C: external 24 V DC power supply required
(consumption 100 mA).
P
B
1
0
0
7
8
-
3
2
M6C programmable contacts:
circuit breaker external relay with six independent changeover
contacts controlled from the circuit breaker via a three-wire
connection (maximum length is 10 meters).
E
4
5
1
5
9
Compact NS with a direct rotary handle
E
4
5
1
6
1
Compact NS with an extended rotary handle
D
B
1
0
1
1
7
0

A-122
Electrical and mechanical
accessories
Compact NS630b to 1600 (cont.)
Manually operated circuit breakers may be equipped
with an MX shunt release, an MN undervoltage release
or a delayed undervoltage release (MN + delay unit).
Electrically operated circuit breakers are equipped as
standard with a remote-operating mechanism to
remotely open or close the circuit breaker. An MX shunt
release or an MN undervoltage release (instantaneous
or delayed) may be added.
MX voltage release
Remote tripping
This function opens the circuit breaker via an electrical order. It is made up of:
a shunt release (2
nd
MX)
or an undervoltage release (MN)
or a delayed undervoltage release (MN + delay unit).
These releases (2nd MX or MN) cannot be operated by the communication bus.
The delay unit, installed outside the circuit breaker, may be disabled by an
emergency OFF button to obtain instantaneous opening of the circuit breaker.
Wiring diagram for the remote-tripping function
Voltage releases (2
nd
MX)
When energised, the 2
nd
MX voltage release instantaneously opens the circuit
breaker. A continuous supply of power to the 2
nd
MX locks the circuit breaker in the
OFF position.
Characteristics
Power supply V AC 50/60 Hz 24 - 48 - 100/130 - 200/250 - 277 - 380/480
V DC 12 - 24/30 - 48/60 - 100/130 - 200/250
Operating threshold 0.7 to 1.1 Un
Permanent locking function 0.85 to 1.1 Un
Consumption (VA or W) pick-up: 200 (200 ms) hold: 4.5
Circuit breaker response 50 ms 10
time at Un
Instantaneous voltage releases (MN)
The MN release instantaneously opens the circuit breaker when its supply voltage
drops to a value between 35 % and 70 % of its rated voltage. If there is no supply on
the release, it is impossible to close the circuit breaker, either manually or electrically.
Any attempt to close the circuit breaker has no effect on the main contacts. Circuit
breaker closing is enabled again when the supply voltage of the release returns to
85 % of its rated value.
Characteristics
Power supply V AC 50/60 Hz 24 - 48 - 100/130 - 200/250 - 380/480
V DC 24/30 - 48/60 - 100/130 - 200/250
Operating opening 0.35 to 0.7 Un
threshold closing 0.85 Un
Consumption (VA or W) pick-up: 200 (200 ms) hold: 4.5
MN consumption pick-up: 400 (200 ms) hold: 4.5
with delay unit (VA or W)
Circuit breaker response 90 ms 5
time at Un
MN delay units
To eliminate circuit breaker nuisance tripping during short voltage dips, operation of
the MN release can be delayed. This function is achieved by adding an external
delay unit in the MN voltage-release circuit. Two versions are available, adjustable
and non-adjustable.
Characteristics
Power supply non-adjustable 100/130 - 200/250
V AC 50-60 Hz /DC adjustable 48/60 - 100/130 - 200/250 - 380/480
Operating threshold opening 0.35 to 0.7 Un
closing 0.85 Un
Consumption of delay pick-up: 200 (200 ms) hold: 4.5
unit alone (VA or W)
Circuit breaker response non-adjustable 0.25 s
time at Un adjustable 0.5 s - 0.9 s - 1.5 s - 3 s
b
b
b
Functions and characteristics
E
5
9
4
3
3
A
C2
C1
MX
opening
order
E
4
6
5
5
3
A
opening
order
D2
D1
MN
D
B
1
1
8
5
3
6
MN
D2
D1
10 12
3 6
delayed
opening
order
instantaneous
opening
order
delay
unit
0
5
6
4
2
1

A-123
Electrically operated circuit breaker
The motor mechanism module is used to remotely open and close the circuit
breaker. It is made up of a spring-charging motor equipped with an opening release
and a closing release.
An electrical operation function is generally combined with:
device ON/OFF indication (OF)
"fault-trip" indication (SDE).
Motor mechanism module
Power supply V AC 50/60 Hz 48/60 - 100/130 - 200/240 - 277 - 380/415
V DC 24/30 - 48/60 - 100/125 - 200/250
Operating threshold 0.85 to 1.1 Un
Consumption (VA or W) 180
Motor overcurrent 2 to 3 In for 0.1 second
Charging time maximum 4 seconds
Operating frequency maximum 3 cycles per minute
Electrical closing order
The release remotely closes the circuit breaker if the spring mechanism is charged.
Release electrical characteristics are identical to those of an MX release (see
above), the operating threshold is from 0.85 to 1.1 Un and the circuit breaker
response time at Un is 60 ms 10.
The Compact NS electrical operation function can be used to implement a synchro-
coupling system.
Electrical opening order
The release instantaneously opens the circuit breaker when energised. The supply
can be impulse-type or maintained.
Release electrical characteristics are identical to those of an MX release (see
above).
b
b
Electrically operated circuit breakers are equipped as
standard with a motor mechanism module.
Two solutions are available for electrical operation:
b a point-to-point solution
b a bus solution with the COM communication option.
In the event of simultaneous opening and closing orders, the
mechanism discharges without any movement of the main
contacts.
In the event of maintained opening and closing orders, the
standard electrical operation solution provides an anti-pumping
function by blocking the main contacts in open position.
Wiring diagram of a point-to-point electrical operation solution
E
4
5
1
6
3
Electrically operated Compact NS circuit breaker
E
5
9
4
3
5
A
A2 B4
A1
A4
OF
COM
SDE
closing
order
opening
order
supervisor
motor
mechanism
module
E
5
9
4
3
4
A
12 14
11
OF1
82 84
81
SDE
B4
A1
A2 A4
closed open fault
closing
order
opening
order
motor
mechanism
module
Wiring diagram of a bus-type electrical operation
solution

A-124
0
5
6
4
4
9
OFF position locking using a
keylock and padlocks
Toggle locked by removable
padlocking device
Locking on manually operated devices
Locking in the OFF position guarantees isolation as per IEC 60947-2.
Padlocking systems can receive up to three padlocks with shackle diameters
ranging from 5 to 8 mm (padlocks not supplied).
Control device Function Means Required
accessories
Toggle lock in
b OFF position
padlock removable device
b OFF or ON posi ion
padlock fxed device
Direct rotary handle lock in
b OFF position
padlock
b OFF or ON posi ion
keylock locking
device +keylock
CNOMO direct rotary handle lock in
b OFF position
padlock
Extended rotary handle lock in OFF position, padlock
door opening prevented keylock keylock
Locking in ON position does not prevent the device from tripping in the event of a
fault or remote tripping order.
Locking on electrically operated devices
Pushbutton locking
The transparent cover blocks access to the pushbuttons used to open and close the
device.
It is possible to independently lock the opening OFF button and the closing ON
button.
The pushbuttons may be locked using either:
three padlocks (not supplied)
lead seal
two screws.
Device locking in the OFF position
The circuit breaker is locked in the OFF position by physically maintaining the
opening pushbutton pressed down:
using padlocks in standard (one to three padlocks, not supplied)
using a keylock (supplied).
Keys may be removed only when locking is effective (Profalux or Ronis type locks).
The keylocks are available in any of the following confgurations:
one keylock
one keylock mounted on the device +one identical keylock supplied separately for
interlocking with another device.
A locking kit (without lock) is available for installation of a keylock (Ronis, Profalux,
Kirk or Castell).
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
Electrical and mechanical
accessories
Compact NS630b to 1600 (cont.)
reset of mechanical
trip indicator
OFF pushbutton
OFF position locking
ON pushbutton
springs charged
indication
pushbutton locking
contact position indication
operation counter
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Functions and characteristics
E
4
5
1
9
4
E
5
9
4
3
6
A
I
pu h O
OOFF
i cha
3
O
sh O F
2
8
7
6
5
3
1
4
0
5
6
4
4
8
OFF position locking using
padlocks
0
5
6
4
4
7
Access to pushbuttons
protected by transparent
cover
0
5
6
4
4
6
Pushbutton locking using a
padlock
Rotary handle locked by a
keylock E
4
5
1
5
9

A-125
Chassis locking
Disconnected position locking
Mounted on the chassis and accessible with the door closed, these devices lock the
circuit breaker in the disconnected position in two manners:
using padlocks (standard), up to three padlocks (not supplied)
using keylocks (optional), one or two different keylocks are available.
Profalux and Ronis keylocks are available in different options:
one keylock
one keylock mounted on the device +one identical keylock supplied separately,
using the same key, for interlocking with another device
one (or two) keylocks mounted on the device +one (or two) identical keylocks
supplied separately, for interlocking with another device.
A locking kit (without locks) is available for installation of one or two keylocks (Ronis,
Profalux, Kirk or Castell).
Connected, disconnected and test position locking
The connected, disconnected and test positions are shown by an indicator.
The racking crank blocks when the exact position is obtained.
A release button is used to free it.
On request, the disconnected position locking system may be modifed to lock the
circuit breaker in any of the three positions, connected, disconnected and test.
Door interlock
Mounted on the right or left-hand side of the chassis, this device inhibits opening of
the cubicle door when the circuit breaker is in connected or test position. It the
breaker is put in the connected position with the door open, the door may be closed
without having to disconnect the circuit breaker.
Racking interlock
This device prevents insertion of the crank when the cubicle door is open (device
cannot be connected).
Mismatch protection
Mismatch protection ensures that a circuit breaker is installed only in a chassis with
compatible characteristics. It is made up of two parts (one on the chassis and one on
the circuit breaker) offering twenty different combinations that the user may select.
b
b
b
b
b
mismatch protection
door interlock
racking interlock
keylock locking
padlock locking
position indicator
chassis front plate
(accessible with cubicle
door closed)
crank entry
reset button
crank storage
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Door interlock
Racking interlock
Mismatch protection
E
5
9
2
6
7
A
1
2
8
10
9
7
5
6
4
3
0
5
6
4
5
0
Disconnected position
locking by padlocks
0
5
6
4
5
1
Disconnected position
locking by keylocks
0
5
6
4
1
7
0
5
6
4
5
2
0
5
6
4
5
3

A-126
Other accessories
Auxiliary terminal shield (CB)
Optional equipment mounted on the chassis, the shield prevents access to the
terminal block of the electrical auxiliaries.
Operation counter (CDM)
The operation counter sums the number of operating cycles and is visible on the
front panel. It is compatible with electrically operated devices.
Escutcheon (CDP)
Optional equipment mounted on the door of the cubicle, the escutcheon increases
the degree of protection to IP40. It is available in fxed and withdrawable versions.
Transparent cover (CCP) for escutcheon
Optional equipment mounted on the escutcheon, the cover is hinged and secured by
a screw. It increases the degree of protection to IP54 and the degree of protection
against mechanical impacts to IK10. It may be used for withdrawable devices only.
Blanking plate (OP) for escutcheon
Used with the escutcheon, this option closes off the door cutout of a cubicle not yet
equipped with a device. It may be used with the escutcheon for both fxed and
withdrawable devices.
Electrical and mechanical
accessories
Compact NS630b to 1600 (cont.)
Auxiliary terminal shield
Operation counter
Escutcheon
Transparent cover
Blanking plate
Functions and characteristics
0
5
6
4
6
3
0
5
6
4
6
4
E
4
5
1
8
7
E
5
9
9
8
7
E
4
5
1
8
4

A-127
Functions and characteristics
Electrical and mechanical
accessories
Compact NS1600b to 3200
(xed version)
E
5
9
2
6
9
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

A-128
Electrical and mechanical
accessories
Compact NS1600b to 3200 (cont.)
Installation
Fixed circuit breakers
Compact NS1600b to 3200 circuit breakers should be installed vertically only.
Connection
Front connection
NS1600 to 2500 NS3200
Bars
Bars may be directly connected to the terminals of Compact NS1600b to 3200 circuit
breakers.
NS1600b to 2500
NS1600b to 2500 with connection for vertical-connection adapters or NS3200
E
5
9
7
2
7
A
E
5
9
2
7
5
A
Functions and characteristics
E
4
5
1
7
8
Fixed Compact NS
E
5
9
2
8
1
A
E
5
9
2
7
2
A
O
O
E
5
9
7
2
6
A
F
E
5
9
2
7
3
OF
OF
E
5
9
2
7
4
A
F
E
5
9
7
2
8
A
F
E
5
9
2
7
1
A
F
F
Mounting on rails

A-129
Indication contacts
Contacts installed in the device
Changeover contacts are used to remote circuit breaker status information and can
thus be used for indications, electrical locking, relaying, etc.
They comply with the IEC 60947-5 international recommendation.
Functions
OF (ON/OFF) - indicates the position of the main circuit breaker contacts
SD (trip indication) - indicates that the circuit breaker has tripped due to:
an overload
a short-circuit
an earth-leakage fault
operation of a voltage release
operation of the "push to trip" button
Returns to de-energised state when the circuit breaker is reset.
SDE (fault indication) - indicates that the circuit breaker has tripped due to:
an overload
a short-circuit
an earth-leakage fault.
Returns to de-energised state when the circuit breaker is reset.
Installation
OF, SD and SDE functions - a single type of contact provides all these different
indication functions, depending on the position where it is inserted in the device.
The contacts clip into slots behind the front cover of the circuit breaker.
Electrical characteristics of the OF/SD/SDE auxiliary contacts
b
b
v
v
v
v
v
b
v
v
v
b
All the auxiliary contacts opposite are also available
in "low-level" versions capable of switching very low
loads (e.g. for the control of PLCs or electronic
circuits).
0
4
4
3
1
4
OF, SD and SDE changeover contacts
Contacts Standard Low level
Rated thermal current (A) 6 5
Minimum load 100 mA at 24 V 1 mA at 4 V
Utilisation cat. (IEC 60947-5-1) AC12 AC15 DC12 DC14 AC12 AC15 DC12 DC14
Operational 24 V 6 6 6 1 5 3 5 1
current (A) 48 V 6 6 2.5 0.2 5 3 2.5 0.2
110 V 6 5 0.6 0.05 5 2.5 0.6 0.05
220/240 V 6 4 - - 5 2 - -
250 V - - 0.3 0.03 5 - 0.3 0.03
380/440 V 6 2 - - 5 1.5 - -
480 V 6 1.5 - - 5 1 - -
660/690 V 6 0.1 - - - - - -

A-130
Electrical and mechanical
accessories
Compact NS1600b to 3200 (cont.)
Compact NS1600b to 3200 circuit breakers may be
equipped with an MX shunt release, an MN
undervoltage release or a delayed undervoltage
release (MNR = MN + delay unit).
Remote tripping
This function opens the circuit breaker via an electrical order. It is made up of:
a shunt release (2
nd
MX)
or an undervoltage release (MN)
or a delayed undervoltage release (MNR = MN + delay unit).
These releases (2
nd
MX or MN) cannot be operated by the communication bus.
The delay unit, installed outside the circuit breaker, may be disabled by an
emergency OFF button to obtain instantaneous opening of the circuit breaker.
Wiring diagram for the remote-tripping function
Voltage releases (2
nd
MX)
When energised, the 2
nd
MX voltage release instantaneously opens the circuit
breaker. A continuous supply of power to the 2
nd
MX locks the circuit breaker in the
OFF position.
b
b
b
Functions and characteristics
Characteristics
Power supply V AC 50/60 Hz 24 - 48 - 100/130 - 200/250 - 277 - 380/480
V DC 12 - 24/30 - 48/60 - 100/130 - 200/250
Operating threshold 0.7 to 1.1 Un
Permanent locking function 0.85 to 1.1 Un
Consumption (VA or W) pick-up: 200 (200 ms) hold: 4.5
Circuit breaker response 50 ms 10
time at Un
Instantaneous voltage releases (MN)
The MN release instantaneously opens the circuit breaker when its supply voltage
drops to a value between 35 % and 70 % of its rated voltage. If there is no supply on
the release, it is impossible to close the circuit breaker, either manually or electrically.
Any attempt to close the circuit breaker has no effect on the main contacts. Circuit
breaker closing is enabled again when the supply voltage of the release returns to 85
% of its rated value.
Characteristics
Power supply V AC 50/60 Hz 24 - 48 - 100/130 - 200/250 - 380/480
V DC 24/30 - 48/60 - 100/130 - 200/250
Operating opening 0.35 to 0.7 Un
threshold closing 0.85 Un
Consumption (VA or W) pick-up: 200 (200 ms) hold: 4.5
MN consumption pick-up: 400 (200 ms) hold: 4.5
with delay unit (VA or W)
Circuit breaker response 90 ms 5
time at Un
MN delay units
To eliminate circuit breaker nuisance tripping during short voltage dips, operation of
the MN release can be delayed. This function is achieved by adding an external
delay unit in the MN voltage-release circuit. Two versions are available, adjustable
and non-adjustable.
Characteristics
Power supply non-adjustable 100/130 - 200/250
V AC 50-60 Hz /DC adjustable 48/60 - 100/130 - 200/250 - 380/480
Operating threshold opening 0.35 to 0.7 Un
closing 0.85 Un
Consumption of delay pick-up: 200 (200 ms) hold: 4.5
unit alone (VA or W)
Circuit breaker response non-adjustable 0.25 s
time at Un adjustable 0.5 s - 0.9 s - 1.5 s - 3 s
E
4
6
5
5
3
A
opening
order
D2
D1
MN
E
5
9
4
3
3
A
C2
C1
MX
opening
order
D
B
1
1
8
5
3
6
MN
D2
D1
10 12
3 6
delayed
opening
order
instantaneous
opening
order
delay
unit
0
5
6
4
2
1
MX voltage release

A-131
Device locking
Locking in the OFF position guarantees isolation as per IEC 60947-2.
Padlocking systems can receive up to three padlocks with shackle diameters
ranging from 5 to 8 mm (padlocks not supplied).
Control device Function Means Required
accessories
Toggle lock in OFF position padlock removable device
lock in OFF or ON padlock fxed device
position
Interphase barriers
These barriers are fex ble insulated partitions used to reinforce isolation of
connection points in installations with busbars, whether insulated or not.
Barriers are installed vertically between front connection terminals.
Escutcheon (CDP)
Optional equipment mounted on the door of the cubicle, the escutcheon increases
the degree of protection to IP40.
6
2
1
9
1
Compact NS with toggle locked using a fxed device and
padlocks
6
2
1
9
0
Compact NS with toggle locked using a removable device and
padlocks
E
7
9
0
5
6
Interphase barriers
E
9
4
3
8
3
Escutcheon

A-132
Test equipment
Compact NS100 to 630
test equipment for STR electronic trip units
Mini test kit
The mini test kit is a portable unit requiring no external power supply, used to check
operation of the electronic trip unit and circuit breaker tripping.
It connects to the test connector on the front of the circuit breaker.
Required power source: fve 9 V alkaline batteries (not supplied).
Portable test kit
The portable test kit is used to check all aspects of the protection functions:
long time protection
short time protection
instantaneous protection
earth-fault protection.
Required power source: 110 or 220 V AC, 50/60 Hz.
Compact NS630b to 3200
test equipment for Micrologic control units
Mini test kit
The autonomous hand-held mini test kit may be used to:
check operation of the control unit and the tripping and pole-opening system by
sending a signal simulating a short-circuit
supply power to the control units for settings via the keypad when the circuit
breaker is open (Micrologic P control units).
Required power source: standard LR6-AA battery.
Portable test kit
The portable test kit is may be used to check:
the mechanical operation of the circuit breaker
the electrical continuity of the connection between the circuit breaker and the
control unit
operation of the control unit:
display of settings
operating tests on the ASIC electronic component
automatic and manual tests on protection functions
test on the zone-selective interlocking (ZSI) function
inhibition of the earth-fault protection
inhibition of the thermal memory.
Note:
These test kits are identical for all Compact NS630b to 3200 circuit breakers and all Masterpact
NT and NW circuit breakers.
Required power source: 110 or 220 V AC, 50/60 Hz.
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
v
v
v
v
v
v
Functions and characteristics
0
4
7
0
3
5
Mini test kit
0
5
2
1
7
2
Portable test kit
0
5
6
4
6
6
Portable test kit

A-133
Perfectly integrated in the Compact and Masterpact
ranges, Display modules are designed for use with
Micrologic control units to provide instant and highly
intuitive access to all the information provided by the
circuit breakers, including device status, current,
voltage and power values, etc.
Associated Micrologic control unit
A = Micrologic A
P = Micrologic P
DMB300 and DMC300 display modules use the power and communications
capabilities of the Micrologic control units to centralise the display of electrical
values, status conditions and alarms of one or more Compact
or Compact circuit breakers.
The mounting and cabling system for the display modules ensures fast,
easy and reliable installation.
Start-up is immediate with no confguration or programming required.
Display modules are high-performance devices combining:
simple and easy-to-read dials
powerful and accurate digital processing.
Their small size and extensive communications capabilities make for easy and
fexible installation and operation.
b
b
Display modules
Display modules DMB300 DMC300
Associated circuit breakers
Type Compact or Masterpact equipped with
Micrologic control units
Number 1 to 4 1 to 16
Display
Screen type Black and white Colour, touch screen
Screen size 240 x 64 pixels 5, 320 x 240 pixels
Entry 5 buttons Touch screen
Information displayed
Currents (per phase)
Currents I1, I2, I3, IN A P A P
Maximum current A P A P
Earth-fault and earth-leakage currents A P A P
Demand current P P
Maximum demand current P P
Voltages
Phase-to-phase voltages (U
1-2
, U
2-3
, U
3-1
) P P
Minimum/maximum phase-to-phase voltages P P
Phase-to-neutral voltages (V
1-N
, V
2-N
, V
3-N
) P
Minimum/maximum phase-to-neutral voltages P
Frequency P P
Voltage unbalance (% per phase) P
Power
Active (P), reactive (Q) and apparent (S) power P P
Power factor and cos P P
Maximum power (P, Q, S) P P
Demand power (P, Q, S) P P
Maximum demand power (P, Q, S) P P
Metering
Active, reactive and apparent energy P P
On-line help
On-line help is available for each type
of information supplied by the module
Circuit breaker diagnostics
Identifcation of control units A P A P
Reading of protections A P A P
Circuit breaker status A P A P
Type of trip A P A P
Current alarms P P
Maintenance indicator P
Installation diagnosis
Indication of faulty devices A P
Fault log A P
Installation and start-up
Mounting Mounted through door, without tools,
using 6 spring-clips supplied with the mod.
Connection Prefabricated wiring systems
0
5
7
4
5
4
DMB300 display module: basic and harmonic measurements
E
7
9
0
7
8
DMC300 display module: measurements, harmonic analysis,
diagnosis

A-134
E
5
9
1
7
7
CSD 309:
SubD 9-pin connector for
colour-coded connection
of wires to screw terminals
E
5
9
1
7
6
A
CCR 301:
Roll of RS 485 cable
(2 RS 485 wires + 2 power
supply wires)
E
5
9
1
7
9
CCP 303:
Connection cable between
Masterpact or Compact
and junction block
Wiring system
The wiring system is designed for low-voltage power
switchboards. Installation requires no tools
or special skills.
The prefabricated wiring ensures both data
transmission (Modbus protocol) and 24V DC power
distribution for the display module and the
communications modules on the Micrologic control
units.
Connection of DMB300 display module
Connection of DMC300 display module
Maximum distance between module and circuit breaker: 1200 m
3
4
5
Display modules
Functions and characteristics
E
5
9
0
8
1


3




1
2
24 V DC
power
Compact circuit breakers equipped with Micrologic
control units and the Modbus eco COM option
E
5
9
1
7
8
CDM 303:
Connection cable between
display module and
junction block
E
5
9
1
8
0
A
n
n 2
n 3
n
U O T
N I
ON
N
CJB 306 junction block
2
1
E
5
9
0
8
2
II
I

I


II

3
2
1
4
3
2
3
2
5
Compact circuit breakers equipped with Micrologic control units and the Modbus eco COM option


schneider-electric.com CAD software and tools
This international site allows you
to access all the Schneider Electric
products in just 2 clicks
via comprehensive range data-
sheets, with direct links to:
complete library: technical
documents, catalogs, FAQs,
brochures
selection guides from
the e-catalog.
product discovery sites and
their Flash animations.
You will also nd illustrated
overviews, news to which you
can subscribe, the list of country
contacts
p
p
p
The CAD software and tools
enhance productivity
and safety. They help you create
your installations by simplifying
product choice through easy
browsing in the Schneider Electric
offers.
Last but not least, they optimise use
of our products while also complying
with standards and proper
procedures.
TOOLS

B-1
Presentation 2
Functions and characteristics A-1
Operating conditions B-2
Installation in switchboards B-3
Power supply and weights B-3
Safety clearances and minimum distances B-4
Installation example B-6
Door interlock for Compact NS630b to 1600 B-7
Control wiring B-8
Power connections for Compact NS80H-MA, NSC100N,
NSA160 B-9
Power connections for Compact NS100 to 630 B-10
Connection of insulated bars orcables with lugs B-10
Connection of bare cables B-11
Insulation of live parts B-12
Power connections for Compact NS630b to 3200 B-13
Sizing of bars B-15
Recommended drilling dimensions B-17
Power connections for Compact NS1600b to 3200 B-18
Recommended drilling dimensions B-18
Temperature derating B-19
Compact NS devices equipped with thermal-magnetic trip units B-19
Compact NS devices equipped with electronic trip units B-20
Power dissipation / Resistance B-21
Compact NS devices equipped with thermal-magnetic trip units B-21
Compact NS devices equipped with electronic trip units B-22
Dimensions and connection C-1
Additional characteristics E-1
Catalogue numbers and order forms F-1
Compact NS
Installation recommendations
Contents

B-2
Altitude derating
Altitude does not signifcantly affect circuit-breaker characteristics up to 2000 m.
Above this altitude, it is necessary to take into account the decrease in the dielectric
strength and cooling capacity of air.
The following table gives the corrections to be applied for altitudes above 2000
metres. The breaking capacities remain unchanged.
Compact NS80 to 630
Altitude (m) 2000 3000 4000 5000
Dielectric resistance voltage (V) 3000 2500 2100 1800
Rated insulation level (V) Ui 750 700 600 500
Rated operational voltage (V) Ue 690 550 480 420
Average thermal current (A) at 40 C 1 x In 0.96 x In 0.93 x In 0.9 x In
Compact NS630b to 3200
Altitude (m) 2000 3000 4000 5000
Dielectric resistance voltage (V) 3000 2500 2100 1800
Rated insulation level (V) Ui 800 700 600 500
Rated operational voltage (V) Ue 690 600 520 460
Average thermal current (A) at 40 C 1 x In 0.98 x In 0.96 x In 0.94 x In
Vibrations
Compact NS devices resist electromagnetic or mechanical vibrations.
Tests are carried out in compliance with standard IEC 60068-2-6 for the levels
required by merchant-marine inspection organisations (Veritas, Lloyds, etc.):
2 V 13.2 Hz: amplitude 1 mm
13.2 V 100 Hz: constant acceleration 0.7 g.
Excessive vibration may cause tripping, breaks in connections or damage to
mechanical parts.
Electromagnetic disturbances
Compact NS devices are protected against:
overvoltages caused by devices that generate electromagnetic disturbances
overvoltages caused by an atmospheric disturbances or by a distr bution-system
outage (e.g. failure of a lighting system)
devices emitting radio waves (radios, wakie-talkies, radar, etc.)
electrostatic discharges produced by users.
Compact NS devices have successfully passed the electromagnetic-compatibility
tests (EMC) defned by the following international standards:
IEC 60947-2, appendix F
IEC 60947-2, appendix B (trip units with Vigi earth-leakage function).
The above tests guarantee that:
no nuisance tripping occurs
tripping times are respected.
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
Operating conditions
Installation
recommendations
E
5
9
4
3
2
A
m

0
0
0
2
E
5
9
5
7
1
A
E
5
9
5
7
2
A

B-3
Installation in switchboards
Power supply and weights
Power supply
Compact NS circuit breakers can be supplied from either the top or the bottom
without any reduction in performance. This capability facilitates connection when
installed in a switchboard.
Weights
Circuit breaker Plug-in
base
Chassis Vigi module Fully visible break block
(Interpact INV)
Motor-mechanism
module
NS80H-MA 3P/3D 1.09
NSC100N 3P/3D 1 1.5
4P/4D 1.3 1.7
NS100N/H 1P/1D 0.5
2P/2D 1.45
NS100N 3P/2D 1.79 0.8 2.2 0.87 2 1.2
NS100N/H/L 3P/3D 2.05 0.8 2.2 0.87 2 1.2
4P/4D 2.57 1.05 2.2 1.13 2.2 1.2
NS125E 3P/3D 1.8 0.8 0.9
4P/4D 2.3 1.1 1.2
NS160N/H 1P/1D 0.5
2P/2D 1.45
NS160N 3P/2D 1.85 0.8 2.2 0.87 2 1.2
NS160N/H/L 3P/3D 2.10 0.8 2.2 0.87 2 1.2
4P/4D 2.58 1.05 2.2 1.13 2.2 1.2
NS250N 3P/2D 1.94 0.8 2.2 0.87 2 1.2
NS250N/H/L 3P/3D 2.2 0.8 2.2 0.87 2 1.2
4P/4D 2.78 1.05 2.2 1.13 2.2 1.2
NS400/630N/H/L 3P/3D 6.19 2.4 2.2 2.8 4.6 2.8
4P/4D 8.13 2.8 2.2 3 4.9 2.8
NS630b to 1600
manual operation
3P 14 14
4P 18 18
NS630b to 1600
electrical operation
3P 14 16
4P 18 21
NS1600b to 3200 3P 24
4P 36
NSA 3P/3D 1.1 1.5
4P/4D 1.4 1.7
NB250N 3P/3D 1.94
NB400/600N 3P/3D 6.19
The table above presents the weights (in kg) of the circuit breakers and the main accessories, which must be summed to obtain the total weight of complete
confgurations.
E
2
3
9
4
7

B-4
Installation in switchboards
Safety clearances
and minimum distances
Dimensions (mm) Insulation, insulated bars Bare sheetmetal
or painted sheet metal
Compact circuit breaker C1 D1 D2 C2 D1 D2 A1
(2)
A2
(3)
B
NS80H-MA
U y 440 V
0 30 30 5 35 35 0 10 0
NSC100N U <600 V 0 30 30 10
(1)
35 35 0 20 0
U u 600 V
0 30 30 20
(1)
35 35 0 40 0
NS100-250
U y 440 V
0 30 30 5 35 35 0 10 0
U <600 V 0 30 30 10
(1)
35 35 0 20 0
U u 600 V
0 30 30 20
(1)
35 35 0 40 0
NS400-630
U y 440 V
0 30 30 5 60 60 0 10 0
U <600 V 0 30 30 10
(1)
60 60 0 20 0
U u 600 V
0 30 30 20
(1)
100 100 0 40 0
(1) Distance must be doubled with interphase barriers.
(2) For Compact NS with long or short terminal shields.
(3) For Compact NS without terminal shields.
The mandatory distances when installing Compact NS circuit breakers are calculated from the device case, not taking into account the terminal shields or the
interphase barriers.
Compact NS80 to 630
When installing a circuit breaker, minimum distances (safety clearances) must be
maintained between the device and panels, bars and other protection devices
installed nearby. These distances, which depend on the ultimate breaking capacity,
are defned by tests carried out in accordance with standard IEC 60947-2.
If installation conformity is not checked by type tests, it is also necessary to:
use insulated bars for circuit-breaker connections
block off the busbars using insulating screens.
For Compact NS80 to 630 devices, terminal shields, interphase barriers and the
insulation kit are recommended and may be mandatory depending on the utilisation
voltage and the type of installation (fxed, withdrawable) (see page B-5).
Minimal distance between two adjacent circuit breakers
b
b
Installation
recommendations
E
2
3
9
4
2
A1
A2
Minimal distance between
the circuit breaker and top,
bottom or side panels
Minimal distance between
the circuit breaker
and front or rear panels
D
B
1
1
7
1
7
5
F
F B
front
panel
if F < 8 mm : an
insulating screen
is mandatory
E
5
0
7
0
0
D1
D2
C1
C2
bare or painted sheetmetal;
insulation or insulated bars

B-5
Compact NS630b to 3200 (fxed devices)
Insulated parts Metal parts Live parts
NS630b to 1600
A 0 120 180
B 0 10 60
NS1600b to 3200
A 50 170 230
B 0 10 60
Compact NS630b to 1600 (withdrawable devices)
Insulated parts Metal parts Live parts
A 0 0 30
B 10 10 60
C 0 0 30
F Datum
Fixed Compact NS400 1000 V AC, front connection
Power supply from the top or bottom. Connection by cables or busbars.
D
B
1
1
7
1
7
6
40
B =0
40
insulation
insulating kit
Insulating kit is standard.
E
9
4
5
0
2
150
30
30
150
side panel
bare or painted
sheetmetal ;
insulation or
insulated bars
E
5
9
7
1
7
A
F
146,5
A (*)
E
5
9
7
1
8
A
A (*)
B B
(*) An overhead clearance of 50 mm is required to
remove the arc chutes.
D
B
1
1
7
1
7
7
F
40
180
A
E
5
9
7
2
0
A
B B
C C

B-6
D
B
1
1
5
3
5
8


Minimum dimensions (mm) A
Compact circuit breaker
NS80H-MA/NSC100N 0
NS100-630 0
NS630b-1600 250
NS1600b-3200 300
Connection by cables
with lugs, devices with
terminal shields.
Connection by insulated
bars, devices with
terminal shields.
Rear connection or plug-in
base, devices with terminal
shields.
Direct connection by
bare cables, devices
with terminal shields.
Installation in switchboards
Installation example
Installation
recommendations

B-7
Door interlock
for Compact NS630b to 1600
Note. The door interlock may be mounted on either the left
or right-hand side of the chassis.
F Datum
Device in the connected or test positions
Door locked
Device in the disconnected position
Door not locked
Dimensions (mm)
Type (1) (2)
NS630b to 1600 (3P) 135 168
NS630b to 1600 (4P) 205 168
Mounted on the left or right-hand side of the chassis,
this locking device prevents opening of the door if the
circuit breaker is in the connected or test positions. If
the circuit breaker was connected with the door open,
the door may be closed without having to disconnect
the circuit breaker.
D
B
1
1
7
1
7
8
61
11
2
4
(2) (1)
Y
E
5
9
4
3
0
A
5
F
23
door
E
5
9
4
3
1
A

B-8
Control wiring
Wiring of voltage releases
During pick-up, the power consumed is approximately 150 to 200 VA.
For low control voltages (12, 24, 48 V), maximum cable lengths are imposed
by the voltage and the cross-sectional area of cables.
Recommended maximum cable lengths (meter).
12 V 24 V 48 V
2.5 mm
2
1.5 mm
2
2.5 mm
2
1.5 mm
2
2.5 mm
2
1.5 mm
2
MN U source 100 % 58 35 280 165
U source 85 % 16 10 75 45
MX-XF U source 100 % 21 12 115 70 550 330
U source 85 % 10 6 75 44 350 210
Note: the indicated length is that of each of the two wires.
24 V DC power-supply module
External 24 V DC power-supply module for Micrologic (F1-, F2+)
do not connect the positive terminal (F2+) to earth
the negative terminal (F1-) can be connected to earth, except in IT systems
a number of Micrologic control units and M6C modules can be connected to the
same 24 V DC power supply (the consumption of a Micrologic control unit
or an M6C module is approximately 100 mA)
do not connect any devices other than a Micrologic control unit
or an M6C module
the maximum length for each conductor is ten metres. For greater distances,
it is advised to twist the supply wires together
the 24 V DC supply wires must cross the power cables perpendicularly.
If this is diffcult, it is advised to twist the supply wires together
the technical characteristics of the external 24 V DC power-supply module
for Micrologic control units are indicated on page A-24.
Communication bus
do not connect the positive terminal (E1) to earth
the negative terminal (E2) can be connected to earth
a number of "device" or "chassis" communication modules can be connected
to the same 24 V DC power supply (the consumption of each module is
approximately 30 mA)
the 24 V DC (E1, E2) power supply for the communication bus must be separate
from the external 24 V DC power-supply module for Micrologic control units
(F1-, F2+).
E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6
+ - A/Tx- B/Tx+ A'/Rx- B'/Rx+
To create a two-wire Modbus communication bus, simply connect Tx- with Rx- and
Tx+with Rx+.
To connect a Modbus slave (Micrologic) to a Modbus master (PLC), connect:
The slave Tx- to the master Rx- The slave Rx- to the master Tx-
The slave Tx+ to the master Rx+ The slave Rx+ to the master Tx+
RS485 Modbus Junction Block
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
Wiring of ZSI: it is recommended to use twisted shielded cable. The shield must be
connected to earth at both ends.
Installation
recommendations
D
B
1
0
5
1
3
7

B-9
Standard With distribution
device connector
L (mm) 18
y 10
S (mm
2
) Cu / Al 1.5 to 70 rigid 1.5 to 16 rigid
1.5 to 50 fexible 1.5 to 10 fexible
(1)
Tightening
torque (Nm)
5 2
(1) For fexible cables from 1.5 to 4 mm
2
, connection with crimped or self-crimping ferrule.
Power connections for
Compact NS80H-MA, NSC100N,
NSA160
E
5
9
2
9
1
A
FF
o r p
E
5
4
5
4
5
L
S
E
3
9
4
3
2
Distribution connector

B-10
NS400 and 600
Separate spreaders with 52.5 and 70 mm pole
pitches
Tinned copper
NS100 NS160/250 NS400/630
Bars L (mm)
y 25 y 25 y 32
I (mm) d +10 d +10 d +15
d (mm)
y 10 y 10 y 15
e (mm)
y 6 y 6 3 y e y 10
(mm) 6.5 8.5 10.5
Lugs L (mm)
y 25 y 25 y 32
(mm) 6.5 8.5 10.5
Tightening torque (Nm)
(1)
10 15 50
Tightening torque (Nm)
(2)
5 5 20
(1) Tightening torque for lugs or bars on the circuit breaker.
(2) Tightening torque for rear connections or terminal extensions on plug-in base.
Connections with accessories - IEC228
NS100 to 250
Pole pitch
Without spreaders 35 mm
With spreaders 45 mm
Dimensions With spreaders or terminal extensions
NS100 NS160/250
Bars L (mm)
y 25 y 25
l (mm)
20 y I y 25 20 y I y 25
d (mm)
y 10 y 10
e (mm)
y 6 y 6
(mm) 6.5 8.5
Lugs L (mm)
y 25 y 25
(mm) 6.5 8.5
Tighten. (Nm) 10
(1)
, 5
(2)
15
(1)
, 5
(2)
torque
(1) Tightening torque for spreaders or terminal extensions on the circuit breaker.
(2) Tightening torque for spreaders or terminal extensions on plug-in base.
Spreaders, straight and right-angle terminal extensions are supplied with fexible
interphase barriers.
NS400 and 630
Pole pitch
Without spreaders 45 mm
With spreaders 52.5 ou 70 mm
Dimensions With spreaders With terminal extensions
Bars L (mm)
y 40 y 32
l (mm) d +15
30 y I y 34
d (mm)
y 20 y 15
e (mm)
3 y e y 10 3 y e y 10
(mm) 12,5 10,5
Lugs L (mm)
y 40 y 32
(mm) 12,5 10,5
Tighten. (Nm) 50
(1)
, 20
(2)
50
(1)
, 20
(2)
torque
(1) Tightening torque for spreaders or terminal extensions on the circuit breaker.
(2) Tightening torque for spreaders or terminal extensions on plug-in base.
Spreaders, straight and right-angle terminal extensions are supplied with fexible
interphase barriers.
Where U >600 V, the mandatory insulation kit means
separate spreaders cannot be used.
The one-piece spreader must be used.
Power connections for
Compact NS100 to 630
Connection of insulated bars or
cables with lugs
NS100 to 250
Spreader
Separate parts One-piece spreader
Tinned copper
Straight terminal
extensions
Tinned copper.
Right-angle terminal
extensions
Tinned copper.
Upstream side.
Edgewise terminal
extension
Tinned copper
Right-angle terminal
extensions
Tinned copper
Upstream side
Installation
recommendations
E
5
9
2
9
2
A
h
to
E
1
8
5
9
9
E
5
5
5
9
9
E
1
8
6
0
1
E
1
8
6
0
0
Where U >600 V,
use of the 52.5 mm
spreaders requires a
specifc insulation kit.
The 70 mm spreaders
may not be used.
E
1
8
5
9
9
E
2
1
2
7
6
E
1
8
6
0
0
E
2
5
9
6
1
Close-up view of two
cables with lugs.
E
5
0
7
0
2
L

e
d
l
400
L
E
5
0
7
0
2
L

e
d
l
400
L
E
5
0
7
0
2
L

e
d
l
400
L

B-11
Connection of bare cables
NS100 to 250
1-cable connector Steel Aluminium
y 160A y 250A
L (mm) 20 20
S (mm
2
) Cu / Al 1.5 to 95
(1)
1016 2535 50185
150 max. fex.
Tightening torque (Nm) 12 15 20 26
6-cable distribution connector (copper or aluminium)
L (mm) 15 or 30
S (mm
2
) Cu / Al 1.5 to 6
(1)
8 to 35
Tightening torque (Nm) 4 6
Polybloc distribution block (6 or 9 cables)
L (mm) 12
S (mm
2
) Cu / Al 1.5 to 10
(1) For fexible cables from 1.5 to 4 mm2, connection with crimped or self-crimping ferrule.
NS400 and 630
1-cable connector 2-cable connector
1 cable 2 cables
L (mm) 20 30 or 60
S (mm
2
) Cu / Al 35 to 300 rigid 2 x 85 to 2 x 240 rigid
240 max. fexible 240 max. fexible
Tightening torque (Nm) 31 31
Conductor materials and electrodynamic stresses
See page B-13.
Ties for fexible bars and cables
See page B-13.
E
5
8
5
4
0
E
5
9
2
9
3
A
E
5
4
4
6
8
1-cable connector
E
5
4
4
7
1
Distribution connector
E
5
4
4
7
2
Polybloc distribution block
E
5
4
5
4
5
L
S
E
5
4
4
6
9
1-cable connector
E
5
4
4
7
0
2-cable connector
E
5
4
5
4
5
L
S

B-12
Fixed Compact NS, front connections
NS100/250 NS400/630N/H NS400/630L
U <500 V Interphase barriers Interphase barriers
or long terminal or long terminal
shields recommended. shields recommended.
Insulated bars Insulated bars
are mandatory. are mandatory.
500 V y U y 600 V
Interphase barriers Interphase barriers Interphase barriers
or long terminal or long terminal or long terminal
shields are shields are shields are
mandatory. mandatory. mandatory.
Insulated bars Insulated bars Insulated bars
are mandatory. are mandatory. are mandatory.
U >600 V Insulation kit Insula ion kit Insulation kit
and insulated bars and insulated bars and insulated bars
are mandatory. are mandatory. are mandatory.
The insulation kit is not compatible with:
b separate spreaders for Compact NS100 to 250. The one-piece spreader must be used
b separate spreaders (70 mm) for Compact NS400 and 630. For the 52.5 mm spreaders, there is
a specifc insulation kit.
Fixed Compact NS, rear connections
NS100/250 NS400/630N/H NS400/630L
All voltage levels Short terminal shields Short terminal shields Short terminal shields
recommended. recommended. recommended.
Withdrawable Compact NS, front and rear connections
NS100/250 NS400/630N/H NS400/630L
All voltage levels Short terminal shields Short terminal shields Short terminal shields
are mandatory. are mandatory. are mandatory.
Insulated bars Insulated bars Insulated bars
are mandatory. are mandatory are mandatory.
for U u 500 V.
Use of an insulating screen (supplied with the plug-in base) is mandatory.
Power connections for
Compact NS100 to 630 (cont.)
Insulation of live parts
Installation
recommendations

B-13
Power connections for
Compact NS630b to 3200
Conductor materials and electrodynamic stresses
Compact circuit breakers can be connected indifferently with bare-copper, tinned-
copper and tinned-aluminium conductors (fexible or rigid bars, cables.
In the event of a short-circuit, thermal and electrodynamic stresses will be exerted on
the conductors. They must therefore be correctly sized and maintained in place
using supports.
Electrical connection points on all types of devices (switch-disconnectors,
contactors, circuit breakers, etc.) should not be used for mechanical support.
Any partition between upstream and downstream connections of the device must be
made of non-magnetic material.
Ties for fexible bars and cables
The table below indicates the maximum distance between ties depending on the
prospective short-circuit current.
The maximum distance between ties attached to the switchboard frame is
400 mm.
Type of " Panduit" ties " Sarel" ties
tie Width: 4.5 mm Width: 9 mm
Maximum load: 22 kg Maximum load: 90 kg
Colour: white Colour: black
Maximum distance 200 100 50 350 200 100 70 50 (double
ties) between ties (mm)
Short-circuit 10 15 20 20 27 35 45 100
current (kA rms)
Note. For cables u 50 mm
2
, use 9 mm-wide ties.
Connection of bars
Bars must be adjusted to ensure correct positioning on the terminals before bolting (B).
Bars must rest on a support frmly attached to the switchboard frame, such that the
circuit-breaker terminals do not bear any weight (C).
Electrodynamic forces
The frst spacer between bars must be positioned within a maximum distance (see
table below) of the connection point to the circuit breaker. This distance is calculated
to resist the electrodynamic stresses exerted between the bars of each phase during
a short-circuit.
Maximum distance A between the circuit-breaker connection
and the frst spacer between bars, depending on the short-circuit current
Isc (kA) 30 50 65 80 100 150
Distance (mm) 350 300 250 150 150 150
D
B
1
1
7
5
7
9
D
B
1
1
7
5
8
0
D
B
1
1
7
5
8
1
D
B
1
1
7
5
8
2
.
D
B
1
1
7
5
8
3
.
D
B
1
1
7
5
8
4

B-14
Connections
The quality of bar connections depends, among other things, on the tightening
torques used for the nuts and bolts. Over-tightening may have the same
consequences as under-tightening.
The correct tightening torques for the connection of bars to the circuit-breaker
terminals are indicated in the table below.
The values below are for copper bars (Cu ETP-NFA51-100) and steel nuts and bolts
(class 8.8).
The same values apply to AGS-T52 quality aluminium bars
(French standard NFA 02-104 and American National Standard H-35-1).
Examples of bar connections
Tightening torque for bars
Rated diameter (mm) Drilling (mm) Tightening torque (Nm) Tightening torque (Nm)
diameter with fat or grower with contact or split
washers washers
10 11 37.5 50
Bar drilling
Examples
Insulation distance
Bar bending
Bars must be bent according to the table below. A tighter bend may cause cracks.
Dimensions (mm)
e Radius r
Minimum Recommended
5 5 7.5
10 15 18 to 20
terminal screws, factory tightened to 13 Nm
circuit-breaker terminal
bars
bolt
washer
nut
1
2
3
4
5
6
Dimensions (mm)
Utilisation voltage X minimum
Ui y 600 V
8 mm
Ui y 1000 V
14 mm
Power connections for
Compact NS630b to 3200
Installation
recommendations
D
B
1
0
0
6
4
0
4 5 3 2
6
1
E
4
7
6
6
5
E
4
7
6
6
7
B
E
4
7
6
6
8
E
4
7
3
2
9
A
E
4
7
3
3
1
A
E
4
7
3
3
0
A
E
4
7
6
8
0
A
X
E
4
7
6
7
9
A
e
r

B-15
Sizing of bars
Compact Maximum Ti: 40 C Ti: 50 C Ti: 60 C
service Number of bars Number of bars Number of bars
current 5 mm thick 10 mm thick 5 mm thick 10 mm thick 5 mm thick 10 mm thick
NS630b 400 2b.30 x 5 1b.30 x 10 2b.30 x 5 1b.30 x 10 2b.30 x 5 1b 30 x 10
NS630b 630 2b.40 x 5 1b.40 x 10 2b.40 x 5 1b.40 x 10 2b.40 x 5 1b.40 x 10
NS800 800 2b.50 x 5 1b.50 x 10 2b.50 x 5 1b.50 x 10 2b.50 x 5 1b.63 x 10
NS1000 1000 3b.50 x 5 1b.63 x 10 3b.50 x 5 2b.50 x 10 3b.63 x 5 2b.50 x 10
NS1250 1250 3b.50 x 5 2b.40 x 10 3b.50 x 5 2b.50 x 10 3b.63 x 5 2b.50 x 10
2b.80 x 5 2b.40 x 10 2b.80 x 5
NS1600/1600b 1400 2b.80 x 5 2b.40 x 10 2b.80 x 5 2b.50 x 10 3b.80 x 5 2b.63 x 10
NS1600/1600b 1600 3b.80 x 5 2b.63 x 10 3b.80 x 5 2b.63 x 10 3b.80 x 5 3b.50 x 10
NS2000 1800 3b.80 x 5 2b.63 x 10 3b.80 x 5 2b.63 x 10 3b.100 x 5 2b.80 x 10
NS2000 2000 3b.100 x 5 2b.80 x 10 3b.100 x 5 2b.80 x 10 3b.100 x 5 3b.63 x 10
NS2500 2200 3b.100 x 5 2b.80 x 10 3b.100 x 5 2b.80 x 10 4b.80 x 5 2b.100 x 10
NS2500 2500 4b.100 x 5 2b.100 x 10 4b.100 x 5 2b.100 x 10 4b.100 x 5 3b.80 x 10
NS3200 2800 4b.100 x 5 3b.80 x 10 4b.100 x 5 3b.80 x 10 5b.100 x 5 3b.100 x 10
NS3200 3000 5b.100 x 5 3b.80 x 10 6b.100 x 5 3b.100 x 10 8b.100 x 5 4b 80 x 10
NS3200 3200 6b.100 x 5 3b.100 x 10 8b.100 x 5 3b.100 x 10 4b.100 x 10
Note.
With Compact NS630b to NS1600, it is recommended to use 50 mm wideness bars (see "Recommended busbars drilling").
The following tables are based on the following assumptions:
maximum permissible temperature of bars is 100 C
Ti: temperature around the circuit breaker and its connections
busbars made of copper and not painted.
Note.
The values presented in the tables are the result of trials and theoretical calculations on the basis
of the assumptions mentioned above.
These tables are intended as an aid in designing connections, however, the actual values must
be confrmed by tests on the installation.
Front or horizontal rear connections
b
b
b
E
5
9
2
9
4
A

B-16
Vertical rear connections
Power connections for
Compact NS630b to 3200
Sizing of bars
Compact Maximum Ti: 40 C Ti: 50 C Ti: 60 C
service Number of bars Number of bars Number of bars
current 5 mm thick 10 mm thick 5 mm thick 10 mm thick 5 mm thick 10 mm thick
NS630b 400 2b.30 x 5 1b.30 x 10 2b.30 x 5 1b.30 x 10 2b.30 x 5 1b.30 x 10
NS630b 630 2b.40 x 5 1b.40 x 10 2b.40 x 5 1b.40 x 10 2b.40 x 5 1b.40 x 10
NS800 800 2b.50 x 5 1b.50 x 10 2b.50 x 5 1b.50 x 10 2b.50 x 5 1b.50 x 10
NS1000 1000 2b.50 x 5 1b.50 x 10 2b.50 x 5 1b.50 x 10 2b.63 x 5 1b.63 x 10
NS1250 1250 2b.63 x 5 1b.63 x 10 3b.50 x 5 2b.40 x 10 3b.50 x 5 2b.40 x 10
NS1600 1400 2b.80 x 5 1b.80 x 10 2b.80 x 5 2b.50 x 10 3b.63 x 5 2b.50 x 10
NS1600 1600 3b.63 x 5 2b.50 x 10 3b.63 x 5 2b.50 x 10 3b.80 x 5 2b.63 x 10
Installation
recommendations
E
5
9
4
2
2
A

B-17
Rear connection Rear connection with spreaders
Middle left or middle
right spreader for 4P
Middle spreader for 3P Left or right spreader for
4P
Left or right spreader
for 3P
Vertical rear connection
Front connection Front connection with vertical-connection adapter
Top terminal Bottom terminal
Power connections for
Compact NS630b to 1600
Recommended drilling dimensions
D
B
1
1
5
2
9
8

D
B
1
1
5
2
9
9

D
B
1
1
5
2
9
8

D
B
1
1
5
3
0
0

D
B
1
1
5
3
0
1

D
B
1
1
5
3
0
2

D
B
1
1
5
3
0
3

D
B
1
1
5
3
0
4

D
B
1
1
5
3
0
5

D
B
1
1
5
3
0
6

D
B
1
1
5
3
0
7

D
B
1
1
5
3
0
8

D
B
1
1
5
3
0
9

D
B
1
1
5
3
1
0

D
B
1
1
5
3
1
1

D
B
1
1
5
2
9
8

D
B
1
1
5
2
9
9

D
B
1
1
5
2
9
8

D
B
1
1
5
3
0
0

E
9
4
5
1
8
25
9,5
44
15
2 M10 screws
15
9,5
25
44
15
2 M10 screws
15
D
B
1
1
5
3
1
2

B-18
Front connection (NS1600b to 2500)
Power connections for
Compact NS1600b to 3200
Recommended drilling dimensions
Front connection with vertical-connection adapter (NS1600b to 2500)
Front connection (NS3200)
Installation
recommendations
D
B
1
1
5
2
9
8

D
B
1
1
5
2
9
9

D
B
1
1
5
3
0
0

D
B
1
1
5
3
1
3

D
B
1
1
5
3
1
4

D
B
1
1
5
3
1
5

D
B
1
1
5
3
1
6

D
B
1
1
5
3
1
7

D
B
1
1
5
3
1
6

D
B
1
1
5
3
1
7

D
B
1
1
5
3
1
8

D
B
1
1
5
3
1
8

B-19
The values opposite are valid for fxed circuit breakers
equipped with one of the following modules:
Vigi module
ammeter module
insulation-monitoring module
current-transformer module.
They also apply to plug-in / withdrawable circuit
breakers equipped with one of the following modules:
ammeter module
current-transformer module.
However, for plug-in / withdrawable circuit breakers
equipped with a Vigi module or an insulation-
monitoring module, the coeffcients in the table below
must be applied.
Trip unit Coeffcient
TM16 to TM125 1
TM160 to TM250 0.9
b
b
b
b
b
b
Temperature derating
Compact NS devices equipped
with thermal-magnetic trip units
When the ambient temperature is greater than 40 C, overload-protection
characteristics are slightly modifed.
To determine tripping times using time/current curves, use Ir values corresponding to
the thermal setting on the device, corrected as indicated in the tables below.
Single-pole and two-pole Compact NS
Rating (A) 40 C 45 C 50 C 55 C 60 C 65 C 70 C
16 16 15.6 15.2 14.8 14.5 14 13.8
25 25 24.5 24 23.5 23 22 21
40 40 39 38 37 36 35 34
63 63 61.5 60 58 57 55 54
80 80 78 76 74 72 70 68
100 100 97.5 95 92.5 90 87.5 85
125 125 122 119 116 113 109 106
160 160 156 152 147.2 144 140 136
200 200 195 190 185 180 175 170
250 250 244 238 231 225 219 213
Compact NS100 to 250 equipped with TM-D and TM-G trip units
Rating (A) 40 C 45 C 50 C 55 C 60 C 65 C 70 C
16 16 15.6 15.2 14.8 14 5 14 13 8
25 25 24.5 24 23.5 23 22 21
32 32 31.3 30.5 30 29 5 29 28.5
40 40 39 38 37 36 35 34
50 50 49 48 47 46 45 44
63 63 61.5 60 58 57 55 54
80 80 78 76 74 72 70 68
100 100 97.5 95 92.5 90 87.5 85
125 125 122 119 116 113 109 106
160 160 156 152 147.2 144 140 136
200 200 195 190 185 180 175 170
250 250 244 238 231 225 219 213
Compact NSA160
Rating (A) 40 C 45 C 50 C 55 C 60 C 65 C 70 C
16 16 15.6 15.2 14.8 14 5 14 13 8
25 25 24.5 24 23.5 23 22 21
32 32 31.3 30.5 30 29 5 29 28.5
40 40 39 38 37 36 35 34
50 50 49 48 47 46 45 44
63 63 61.5 60 58 57 55 54
80 80 78 76 74 72 70 68
100 100 97.5 95 92.5 90 87.5 85
125 125 122 119 116 113 109 106
160 160 156 152 147.2 144 140 136

B-20
Compact NS630b to NS1600
(1)
The table below indicates the maximum rated-current value for each type of connection, depending on the ambient temperature.
For mixed connections, use the same derating values as for horizontal connections.
Version Fixed device
Connection Front or horizontal rear Vertical rear
temp. Ti
(2)
40 45 50 55 60 65 70 40 45 50 55 60 65 70
NS630b N/H/L 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630
NS800 N/H/L 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
NS1000 N/H/L 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
NS1250 N/H 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1240 1090 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1180
NS1600 N/H 1600 1600 1560 1510 1470 1420 1360 1600 1600 1600 1600 1600 1510 1460
Version Withdrawable device
Connection Front or horizontal rear Vertical rear
temp. Ti
(2)
40 45 50 55 60 65 70 40 45 50 55 60 65 70
NS630b N/H/L 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630
NS800 N/H/L 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
NS1000 N/H/L 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 920 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 990
NS1250 N/H 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1170 1000 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1090
NS1600 N/H 1600 1600 1520 1480 1430 1330 1160 1600 1600 1600 1560 1510 1420 1250
Compact NS1600b to 3200
Version Fixed device
Connection Front or horizontal rear Vertical rear
temp. Ti
(2)
40 45 50 55 60 65 70 40 45 50 55 60 65 70
NS1600b N/H 1600 1600 1600 1600 1500 1450 1400 1600 1600 1600 1600 1600 1550 1500
NS2000 N/H 2000 2000 2000 2000 1900 1800 1700 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 1900 1800
NS2500 N/H 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500
NS3200 N/H - - - - - - - 3200 3200 3200 3180 3080 2970 2860
(1) For a circuit breaker mounted in horizontal position, the derating to be applied is equivalent to that of a front or horizontal rear connected circuit breaker.
(2) Ti: temperature around the circuit breaker and its connections.
The values opposite are valid for fxed circuit breakers
equipped with one of the following modules:
Vigi module
ammeter module
insulation-monitoring module
current-transformer module.
They also apply to plug-in / withdrawable circuit
breakers equipped with one of the following modules:
ammeter module
current-transformer module.
However, for plug-in / withdrawable circuit breakers
equipped with a Vigi module or an insulation-
monitoring module, the coeffcients in the table below
must be applied.
Circuit breaker Trip unit Coeff.
NS100 STR22SE/GE 40 to 100 1
NS160 STR22SE/GE 40 to 160 1
NS250 STR22SE/GE 100 and 160 1
NS250 STR22SE/GE 250 0.86
The values opposite are valid for fxed or plug-in /
withdrawable circuit breakers equipped with one of
the following modules:
ammeter module
current-transformer module.
However, for fxed or plug-in / withdrawable circuit
breakers equipped with a Vigi module or an insulation-
monitoring module, the coeffcients in the table below
must be applied.
Circuit breaker Trip unit Coeff.
NS400N/H/L STR23SE and 53UE 0.97
STR23SV and 53SV
NS630N/H/L STR23SE and 53UE 0.9
STR23SV and 53SV
Note. To provide the Visu function, Compact NS circuit
breakers, with or without a Vigi module, are combined with INV
switch-disconnectors. Tripping values for the selected
combination are indicated in the Interpact catalogue.
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
Electronic trip units are not affected by variations in temperature. However, the
maximum permissible current in the circuit breaker still depends on the ambient
temperature.
Compact NS100...NS250
The table below indicates the maximum long-time (LT) protection setting depending
on the ambient temperature.
NS100-160 40 C 45 C 50 C 55 C 60 C 65 C 70 C
In: 40 to 160 A no derating
Ir max 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
NS250 40 C 45 C 50 C 55 C 60 C 65 C 70 C
In: 100 to 160 A no derating
Ir max 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
In: 250 A 250 250 250 237.5 237.5 225 225
Ir max 1 1 1 0.95 0.95 0.90 0.90
Compact NS400 and NS630
The table below indicates the maximum long-time (LT) protection setting depending
on the ambient temperature.
NS400 40 C 45 C 50 C 55 C 60 C 65 C 70 C
Fixed In: 400 A 400 400 400 390 380 370 360
Io/Ir max 1/1 1/1 1/1 1/0.98 1/0.95 1/0.93 1/0.9
Plug-in /
withdrawable
In: 400 A 400 390 380 370 360 350 340
Io/Ir max 1/1 1/0.98 1/0.95 1/0.93 1/0.9 1/0.88 1/0.85
NS630 40 C 45 C 50 C 55 C 60 C 65 C 70 C
Fixed In: 630 A 630 615 600 585 570 550 535
Io/Ir max 1/1 1/0.98 1/0.95 1/0.93 1/0.9 1/0.88 1/0.85
Plug-in /
withdrawable
In: 570 A 570 550 535 520 505 490 475
Io/Ir max 1/0.9 1/0.88 1/0.85 1/0.83 1/0.8 0 8/0.98 0.8/0 95
Temperature derating
Compact NS devices equipped with
electronic trip units
Installation
recommendations

B-21
Power dissipation / Resistance
Compact NS devices equipped
with thermal-magnetic trip units
Compact NSC100N
Fixed device Additional modules
3/4 poles Rat. (A) R/pole P/pole Vigi (N, L3) Vigi (L1, L2)
NSC100N 16 15 4 0.06 0.06
20 11.2 4.5 0.1 0.1
25 8 5 0.16 0.16
32 5.4 5.5 0.26 0.26
40 3.7 6 0.4 0.4
50 2.8 7 0.63 0.63
63 2 8 1 1
70 2 10 1.3 1.3
80 1.4 9 1.6 1.6
100 1 10 2.5 2.5
NSC100NA 100 0.6 6 2.5 2.5
Compact NS100 to 250 equipped with TM-D and TM-G trip units
Fixed device Additional modules
3/4 poles Rat. (A) R/pole P/pole Vigi Vigi With- Ammeter Transfo.
(N, L3) (L1, L2) drawable module module
NS100 16 11.42 2.92 0 0 0 0 0
25 6.42 4.01 0 0 0.1 0 0
32 3.94 4.03 0.06 0.03 0.15 0.1 0.1
40 3.42 5.47 0.10 0.05 0.2 0.1 0.1
50 1.64 4.11 0.15 0.08 0.3 0.1 0.1
63 2.17 8.61 0.3 0.15 0.4 0.1 0.1
80 1.37 8.77 0.4 0.2 0.6 0.1 0.1
100 0.88 8.8 0.7 0.35 1 0.2 0 2
NS160 80 1.26 8.06 0.4 0.2 0.6 0.1 0.1
100 0.77 7.7 0.7 0.35 1 0.2 0 2
125 0.69 10.78 1.1 0.55 1.6 0.3 0 3
160 0.55 13.95 1.8 0.9 2.6 0.5 0 5
NS250 125 0.61 9.45 1.1 0.55 1.6 0.3 0 3
160 0.46 11.78 1.8 0.9 2.6 0.5 0 5
200 0.39 15.4 2.8 1.4 4 0.8 0 8
250 0.3 18.75 4.4 2.2 6.3 1.3 1 3
Compact NS80 and NS100 to 630 equipped with MA trip units
Fixed device Additional modules
3 poles Rat. (A) R/pole P/pole Vigi Vigi With- Ammeter Transfo.
(N, L3) (L1, L2) drawable module module
NS80H 1.5 93.3 0.21
2.5 89.6 0.56
6.3 75.6 3
12.5 12.8 2
25 2.24 1.4
50 1.04 2.6
80 0.94 6.02
NS100 2.5 148.42 0.93 0 0 0 0 0
6.3 99.02 3.93 0 0 0 0 0
12.5 4.05 0.63 0 0 0 0 0
25 1.66 1.04 0 0 0.1 0 0
50 0.67 1.66 0.2 0.1 0.3 0.1 0.1
100 0.52 5.2 0.7 0.35 1 0.2 0 2
NS160 150 0.38 8.55 1.35 0.68 2.6 0.45 0.45
NS250 220 0.3 14.52 2.9 1.45 4.89 0.97 0 97
NS400H/L 320 0.12 12.29 3.2 1.6 6.14 1.54 1 54
NS630H/L 500 0.1 25 13.99 7 15 3.75 3.75
Single-pole and two-pole Compact NS100 to 160
Fixed device
1/2 poles Rat. (A) R/pole P/pole
NS100N/H 16 11.3 2.89
20 6.3 2.52
30 2.9 2.61
40 2.9 4.64
50 1.4 3.5
63 1.4 5.56
80 1.25 8
100 0.76 7.6
NS160N/H 125 0.63 9.84
160 0.48 12.29
Power dissipated per pole (P/pole) in Watts (W).
Resistance per pole (R/pole) in milliohms (m).
Total power dissipation is the value measured at In,
50/60 Hz, for a three-pole or four-pole circuit breaker
(values above power P =3RI
2
).

B-22
Compact NS100 to NS630
Fixed device Additional modules
3/4 poles Rat. (A) R/pole P/pole Vigi Vigi With- Ammeter Transfo.
(N, L3) (L1, L2) drawable module module
NS100 40 0.84 1.34 0.1 0.05 0.2 0.1 0.1
100 0.468 4.68 0.7 0.35 1 0.2 0.2
NS160 40 0.73 1.17 0.4 0.2 0.6 0.1 0.1
100 0.36 3.58 0.7 0.35 1 0.2 0.2
160 0.36 9.16 1.8 0.9 2.6 0.5 0.5
NS250 100 0.27 2.73 1.1 0.55 1.6 0.2 0.2
250 0.28 17.56 4.4 2.2 6.3 1.3 1.3
NS400 400 0.12 19.2 3.2 1.6 9.6 2.4 2.4
NS630 630
(1)
0.1 39.69 6.5 3.25 19.49 5.95 5.95
(1) The dissipation values for the Vigi modules and withdrawable circuit breakers are given
for 570 A
Compact NSA160
Fixed device Additional modules
3/4 poles R/pole P/pole Vigi Vigi
(N, L3) (L1, L2)
NSA160 15 4 0 06 0.06
8 5 0.16 0.16
5.4 5.5 0 26 0.26
3.7 6 0.4 0.4
2.8 7 0.63 0.63
2 8 1 1
1.4 9 1.6 1.6
1 10 2 5 2.5
0.8 12.5 3 9 3.9
0.6 15.4 6.4 6.4
NSA125NA 0.7 11 - -
NSA160NA 0.6 15.4 - -
Compact NS630b to 1600
Version Fixed device
N/H L LB
R/pole P/pole R/pole P/pole R/pole P/pole
NS630b 0.026 10 0 039 15 0.056 15
NS800 0.026 15 0 039 20 0.056 20
NS1000 0.026 22 0 039 34
NS1250 0.026 44
NS1600 0.026 74
Version Withdrawable device
N/H L LB
R/pole P/pole R/pole P/pole R/pole P/pole
NS630b 0.038 19 0 072 34 0.086 34
NS800 0.038 30 0 072 40 0.086 40
NS1000 0.038 50 0 072 77
NS1250 0.036 84
NS1600 0.036 154
Compact NS1600b to 3200
Version Fixed device
N/H
R/pole P/pole
NS1600b 0.019 84
NS2000 0.013 84
NS2500 0.008 100
NS3200 0.008 227
Power dissipation / Resistance
Compact NS devices equipped
with electronic trip units
The values indicated in the tables opposite are
typical values.
Power dissipated per pole (P/pole) in Watts (W)
The value indicated in the table is the power
dissipated at I
N
, 50/60 Hz, for a three-pole or four-
pole circuit breaker (these values can be higher than
the power calculated on the basis of the pole
resistance). Measurement and calculation of the
dissipated power are carried out in compliance with
the recommendations of Annex G of standard
IEC 60947-2.
Resistance per pole (R/pole) in milliohms (m)
The value of the resistance per pole is provided as a
general indication for a new device.
The value of the contact resistance must be
determined on the basis of the measured voltage
drop, in accordance with the manufacturers test
procedure (expert card ABT no. FE 05e).
Note: this measurement is not suffcient to determine the
quality of the contacts, i.e. the capacity of the circuit breaker
to carry its rated current.
Installation
recommendations


schneider-electric.com Training
This international site allows you
to access all the Schneider Electric
products in just 2 clicks
via comprehensive range data-
sheets, with direct links to:
complete library: technical
documents, catalogs, FAQs,
brochures
selection guides from
the e-catalog.
product discovery sites and
their Flash animations.
You will also nd illustrated
overviews, news to which you
can subscribe, the list of country
contacts
p
p
p
Training allows you to acquire
the Schneider Electric expertise
(installation design, work with power
on, etc.) for increased efciency
and a guarantee of improved
customer service.
The training catalogue includes
beginners courses in electrical
distribution, knowledge
of MV and LV switchgear, operation
and maintenance of installations,
design of LV installations to give
but a few examples.
TOOLS

C-1
Compact NS80H-MA C-2
Compact NSC100 C-4
Compact NSA160 C-5
Compact NS100 to 630 (fxed version) C-6
Vigicompact NS100 to 630 (fxed version) C-8
Compact NS100 to 630
(plug-in and withdrawable versions) C-10
Vigicompact NS100 to 630
(plug-in and withdrawable versions) C-12
Compact NS100 to 250
(single-pole and two-pole versions) C-14
Visu function for Compact NS100 to 630
(combination with Interpact INV) C-16
Motor-mechanism module for Compact NS100 to 630 C-18
Rotary handle for Compact NS100 to 630 C-20
Indication and measurement modules
for Compact NS100 to 630 C-22
Front accessories for Compact NS100 to 630 C-24
Compact NS630b to 1600 (fxed version) C-26
Dimensions C-26
Mounting C-27
Front-panel cutouts C-28
Rotary handle C-29
Compact NS630b to 1600 (withdrawable version) C-30
Dimensions, mounting and cutouts C-30
Rotary handle
Compact NS1600b to 3200 (fxed version) C-32
Dimensions C-32
Compact NS630b to 3200 C-33
External modules C-33
Accessories NS630b to 3200 C-38
Compact NS80H-MA, NSC100N and NSA160 C-40
Compact, Vigicompact NS100 to 630 (fxed version) C-42
Compact, Vigicompact NS100 to 630
(plug-in and withdrawable versions) C-44
Compact NS630b to 1600 (fxed version) C-46
Bars C-46
Cables with lugs and bare cables C-49
Compact NS630b to 1600
(plug-in and withdrawable versions) C-50
Bars C-50
Cables with lugs C-52
Compact NS1600b to 3200 (fxed version) C-53
Compact NS
Dimensions and connection
Contents
Presentation 2
Functions and characteristics A-1
Installation recommendations B-1
Electrical diagrams D-1
Additional characteristics E-1
Catalogue numbersand order forms F-1

C-2
Dimensions
and connection
Compact NS80H-MA
On backplate On rails
Dimensions
Cutout A Cutout B Cutout C
Mounting
Front-panel cutouts
E
2
1
8
7
4
100
X
Z
64,5
70
80
84
60
120
103
206
(a) long terminal shields
E
2
1
8
7
3
X
Y
90
45
(a)
E
2
1
8
7
5
X
Y
30
15
48,5
100
4
D
B
1
0
0
4
4
8
X
Y
30
15
48,5
100
y 32
4
E
2
1
8
8
2
14,5
26
X
Y
60,5
29
E
2
1
8
8
1
X
Z
A
B/C
71
81
E
2
1
8
8
3
46
30
X
Y
68,5
92
E
2
1
8
8
4
30
X
Y
68,5

C-3
Note.
Door cutout dimensions are given for a device position in the
enclosure where u 100 + (h x 5) with respect to the door
hinge.
E
2
1
8
8
8
28,5
Z
82,5
112
X
65,5
Standard direct rotary handle
Front-panel cutout
E
2
1
8
8
7
O
OFF
ON
I
tr pped
60
60
X
Y
90
45
80
7,5
4,2
47,5
E
2
1
8
8
5
X
Z
85
E
2
1
8
8
6
43
30
X
Y
68,5
86
E
2
1
8
9
0
Z
L ( )
X
mini 175
maxi 590
shaft length = L
_
109
E
2
1
8
8
9
Y
X
75
37,5
7,5
75
37,5
4,2
60
60
E
2
1
8
9
1
Y
X
7,5
45
4,2
50
4,2
36
72
E
2
1
8
9
3
116
2
1 to 3 maxi
E
2
1
8
9
2
Y
X
7,5
120
69,2
4,2
60
120
E
2
1
8
9
4
Y
X
100
51,7
45,8
100
E
2
2
0
4
6

h
Extended rotary handle
Front-panel cutout
MCC direct rotary handle

Front-panel cutout

C-4
Dimensions
and connection
Compact NSC100
Note.
Centre line X indicates the centre of the mounting rail.
3 poles 4 poles
Dimensions
Compact NSC100
E
4
3
3
9
8
100
X
70
80
84
60
120
103
206
Z
15
90
E
4
3
3
9
9
45
X
90
Y
(a)
(a) long terminal shields
E
4
3
4
0
0
X
120
45
(a)
Y
E
4
3
4
0
1
100
X
70
80
84
60
120
103
206
Z
15
90
101,2
E
4
3
4
0
2
X
210
45
Y
(a)
(a) long terminal shields.
E
4
3
4
0
3
X
240
75
(a)
Y
E
2
1
8
9
0
Z
L ( )
X
mini 175
maxi 590
shaft length = L
_
109
E
2
1
8
8
9
Y
X
75
37,5
7,5
75
37,5
4,2
60
60
E
2
1
8
9
1
Y
X
7,5
45
4,2
50
4,2
36
72
3 poles 4 poles
Vigicompact NSC
Extended rotary handle
Front-panel cutout

C-5
Note.
Centre line X indicates the centre of the mounting rail.
Compact NSA160
3 poles 4 poles
Dimensions
Compact NSA160
3 poles 4 poles
Vigicompact NSA160
Extended rotary handle
Dimensions Front-panel cutout
E
2
1
8
9
7
102,5
X
72,5
82,5
89,5
64,5
120
98,5
206
Z
15
90
E
2
1
8
9
5
X
90
45
(a)
Y
45
E
2
1
8
9
6
X
120
45
(a)
Y
E
2
1
9
0
3
102,5
X
72,5
82,5
89,5
64,5
120
98,5
206
Z
15
90
101,2
E
2
1
9
0
1
45
X
210
45
Y
(a)
E
2
1
9
0
2
X
240
75
(a)
Y
E
3
1
2
9
4
mini 122
maxi 147
Z
83
X
E
3
1
2
9
5
Y
X
75
37,5
75
37,5
60
60
5
3
E
3
1
2
9
6
Y
X
45
4,2
50
36
72
5
3

C-6
Dimensions
and connection
Compact NS100 to 630
(xed version)
(d) for rear connection only. For two-pole circuit breakers,
the centre hole is not necessary.
(a) short terminal shields.
(b) long terminal shields
(available for spreaders on
NS400 to 630, pitch 52.5 :
L1 = 157.5 mm,
L2 = 210 mm).
(c) interphase barriers.
2 poles or 3 poles 4 poles
Dimensions
Mounting
2 poles or 3 poles 4 poles
On backplate
2 poles or 3 poles 4 poles
On rails
On DIN rail with adapter plate
E
2
1
5
0
4
H
Z
H1
H2
H3 H5 H7
H4 H6
P1
P2
P4
X
E
2
1
5
0
2
X
Y
L1
L
(a)
(b)
(c)
E
2
1
5
0
3
X
Y
L2
L
E
2
1
5
0
7
K
G
G1
K1 K1
K1
G4
G5
X
Y
T
T4 (d)
E
2
1
5
0
8
K
K1 K1 K1
X
Y
K2
E
2
1
5
1
1
Y
X
K1
G
G1
T
U (e)
K
E
2
1
5
1
2
Y
X
K2
K
E
4
9
7
3
8
Z
X
G48
G47
G49
G51
G50

C-7
Dimensions (mm)
Type C C1 C2 C3 C6 C7 C20 C21 G G1 G4
NS100/160/250 29 76 54 108 43 104 34 86 62.5 125 70
NS400/630 41.5 116 92.5 184 56.5 146 46 5 126 100 200 113.5
Type G5 G47 G48 G49 G50 G51 H H1 H2 H3 H4
NS100/160/250 140 95 75 13.5 23 17.5 80 5 161 94 188 160.5
NS400/630 227 127.5 255 142.5 285 240
Type H5 H6 H7 K K1 K2 L L1 L2 P1 P2
NS100/160/250 321 178.5 357 17.5 35 70 52 5 105 140 81 86
NS400/630 480 237 474 22.5 45 90 70 140 185 95.5 110
Type P4 P5 P6 R R1 R2 R4 R5 R6 R7 R12
NS100/160/250 111
(1)
83 88 14.5 29 54 108 143 29 58 43
NS400/630 168 107 112 31.5 63 71.5 143 188 46.5 93 63
(1) : P4 = 126 mm for Compact NS250N/H/L.
Type R13 T T4 U
NS100/160/250 86 6 22
y 32
NS400/630 126 6 32
y 32
Note.
Door cutout dimensions are given for a device position in the
enclosure where u 100 + (h x 5) with respect to the door
hinge.
Cutout A Cutout B Cutout C
Front-panel cutouts
Fixed or plug-in circuit breaker
With escutcheon With toggle cover
E
2
1
6
0
0
X
P5
P6
A
B/C
Z
E
2
1
6
0
1
X
Y
C
C1
R
R1
E
2
1
6
0
3
X
Y
C2
C3
R2
R4(3P)
R5(4P)
E
2
1
6
0
4
X
Y
C2
C3
E
2
1
6
0
8
X
P6
Z
E
2
1
6
0
9
X
Y
C6
C7
R6
R7
E
2
1
6
0
2
C20
C21
X
R13
R12
Y
E
2
2
0
4
6

h

C-8
Dimensions
and connection
Vigicompact NS100 to 630
(xed version)
(a) short terminal shields.
(b) long terminal shields.
(c) interphase barriers.
(d) for rear connection only. For two-pole circuit breakers,
the centre hole is not necessary.
2 poles or 3 poles 4 poles
Dimensions
Mounting
2 poles or 3 poles 4 poles
On backplate
2 poles or 3 poles 4 poles
On rails
E
2
1
5
1
5
H8
X
H9
H10
H11 H13 H15
H12 H14
P1
P2
P4
Z
E
2
1
5
1
3
X
Y
L1
L
(a)
(b)
(c)
E
2
1
5
1
4
X
Y
L2
L
E
2
1
5
1
8
G6
G7
K1 K1
K1
G
K
G1
G8
G9
X
Y
T
T4 (d)
E
2
1
5
1
9
K1 K1 K1
K2
K
X
Y
E
2
1
5
2
0
Y
X
K
K1
G
G1
G6
G7
T
U (e) E
2
1
5
2
1
Y
X
K
K2

C-9
Note.
Door cutout dimensions are given for a device position in the
enclosure where u 100 + (h x 5) with respect to the door
hinge.
Dimensions (mm)
Type C C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C18 C19 C20 C21 G G1 G6 G7 G8 G9
NS100/160/250 29 76 130 184 86 37 43 104 71 68 34 86 62.5 125 137.5 200 145 215
NS400/630 41.5 116 192 276 147.5 37 56.5 146 132 68 46 5 126 100 200 200 300 213.5 327
Type H8 H9 H10 H11 H12 H13 H14 H15 K K1 K2 L L1 L2 P1 P2 P4 P5
NS100/160/250 155.5 236 169 263 235.5 396 253.5 432 17.5 35 70 52.5 105 140 81 86 111
(1)
83
NS400/630 227.5 355 242.5 385 340 580 337 574 22.5 45 90 70 140 185 95.5 110 168 107
(1) P4 = 126 mm for Compact NS250N/H/L.
Type P6 R R1 R2 R4 R5 R6 R7 R11 R12 R13 R26 R27 T T4 U
NS100/160/250 88 14.5 29 54 108 143 29 58 58 43 86 14.5 29 6 22 y 32
NS400/630 112 31.5 63 71.5 143 188 46.5 93 58 63 126 32 47 6 32 y 32
Cutout A Cutout B
Front-panel cutouts
Fixed or plug-in circuit breaker
E
2
1
6
0
5
P5
P6
B
A
X
Z
D
B
1
0
0
4
4
6
C
C1
C5
C4
R1
Y
X
R26
R1
R
D
B
1
0
0
4
4
7
C2
C3
X
Y
R4 (3P)
R5 (4P)
R2
R26
R1
E
2
1
6
1
0
P6
X
Z
E
2
1
8
0
0
X
Y
C18
C7
R27
R11
C19
C6
R6
R7
With escutcheons
E
2
2
0
4
6

h

C-10
E
2
1
5
3
4
Y
X
K20
K22
E
2
1
5
2
5
K
G10
G11
K1
G12
G13
K5
K6
X
Y
T
Dimensions
and connection
(a) Short terminal shields for circuit breaker are mandatory.
(b) Long terminal shields for plug-in base.
(c) Interphase barriers.
Note.
Door cutout dimensions are given for a device position in the
enclosure where u 100 + (h x 5) with respect to the door
hinge.
Compact NS100 to 630
(plug-in and withdrawable
versions)
Dimensions
Plug-in base 2 poles or 3 poles 4 poles
D
B
1
1
0
9
1
7
D
B
1
1
0
9
1
8
D
B
1
1
0
9
1
9
Chassis 2 poles or 3 poles 4 poles
D
B
1
1
0
9
3
2
D
B
1
1
0
9
2
0
D
B
1
1
0
9
2
1
E
2
1
5
2
6
K
K2
K5
K7
X
Y
D
B
1
1
0
9
3
3
2P, 3P 4P
On rails (plug-in base or chassis)
E
2
1
5
8
7
K
G10
G11
K1
G12
G13
K11
K12
X
Y
T
Mounting
2P, 3P 4P 2P, 3P 4P
Through panel M (plug-in base) Through panel M (chassis)
E
2
1
5
8
8
K
K2
K11
K13
X
Y

C-11
On backplate N (plug-in base or chassis)
Front connection (insulating screen is mandatory between the backplate and the base, supplied with the base)
2P, 3P 4P
Dimensions (mm)
Type C11 C17 G10 G11 G12 G13 G14 G15 G16 G17 G18 G19 G20 G21 G22 G23 G24
NS100/160/250 103 42.5 95 190 87 174 77.5 155 66 132 82 164 37.5 75 111 222 190
NS400/630 155 56 150 300 137 274 125 250 101 202 126 252 75 150 170.5 341 283.5
Type G25 G26 G27 G28 G29 H16 H17 H18 H19 K K1 K2 K5 K6 K7 K11 K12
NS100/160/250 380 208 416 380.6 416 102.5 205 103 5 210 17.5 35 70 54.5 109 144 74 148
NS400/630 567 318.5 637 566.1 637 157.5 315 140 280 22.5 45 90 71.5 143 188 91.5 183
Type K13 K20 K21 K22 L L1 L2 L6 L7 L8 L9 L10 P2 P4 P7 P8 P9
NS100/160/250 183 35 70 105 52.5 105 140 92.5 185 216 220 251 86 111
(1)
27 45 75
NS400/630 228 50 100 145 70 140 185 110 220 250 265 295 110 168 27 45 100
Type P10 P12 P44 P45 R8 R9 U T T5 T6
NS100/160/250 64 32 123 76.2 74 148 y 32 6 24 30
NS400/630 86 32 147 99.3 90 180 y 32 6 33 33
(1) P4 = 126 mm for Compact NS250N/H/L.
E
2
1
5
8
9
K
G14
G15
K1
X
Y
T
E
2
1
5
9
0
K
K2
X
Y
E
2
1
5
9
1
K
G14
G15
K1
G17
K1
X
Y
T
K
K1
G16
T6
E
2
1
5
9
2
K2
X
Y
K1 K1 K1
K K
E
2
1
5
9
3
G14
G15
K1
X
Y
T
K K
K1 K1
G18
G19
T5
E
2
1
5
9
4
K2
X
Y
K K
K1 K1 K1
E
2
1
6
1
9
P44
X
Z
E
2
1
6
2
0
Y
C17
C11
R8
R9
X
Interior rear connection Exterior rear connection
2P, 3P 4P 2P, 3P 4P
See fxed or plug-in circuit breaker, page C-7.
Front-panel cutouts
Plug-in base Chassis with protection collar and escutcheons

C-12
Mounting
2P, 3P 4P 2P, 3P 4P
Through panel M (plug-in base) Through panel M (chassis)
Dimensions
and connection
Vigicompact NS100 to 630
(plug-in and withdrawable
versions)
(*) Short terminal shields are mandatory.
Dimensions
2 poles or 3 poles 4 poles
Plug-in base
E
2
1
5
3
7
(*)
N M
Z
H16
P4 P9
P7
H17
X
P8
Chassis
See withdrawable Compact, page C-10.
2P, 3P 4P
On rails (plug-in base or chassis)
E
2
1
5
3
5
L1
L
X
K1
Y
G10
G11
E
2
1
5
3
6
(*)
L2
L
X
K1 K1
Y
E
2
1
5
2
5
K
G10
G11
K1
G12
G13
K5
K6
X
Y
T
E
2
1
5
2
6
K
K2
K5
K7
X
Y
E
2
1
5
8
7
K
G10
G11
K1
G12
G13
K11
K12
X
Y
T
E
2
1
5
8
8
K
K2
K11
K13
X
Y
E
2
1
5
3
3
Y
X
K20
K21
G20
G21
T
U E
2
1
5
3
4
Y
X
K20
K22

C-13
Dimensions (mm)
Type C11 C13 C16 C17 G10 G11 G12 G13 G20 G21 H16
NS100/160/250 103 84 55 42.5 95 190 87 174 37.5 75 102.5
NS400/630 155 84 116.5 56 150 300 137 274 75 150 157.5
Type H17 K K1 K2 K5 K6 K7 K11 K12 K13 K20
NS100/160/250 205 17.5 35 70 54.5 109 144 74 148 183 35
NS400/630 315 22.5 45 90 71.5 143 188 91.5 183 228 50
Type K21 K22 L L1 L2 P4 P7 P8 P9 P44 R8
NS100/160/250 70 105 52.5 105 140 111
(1)
27 45 75 123 74
NS400/630 100 145 70 140 185 168 27 45 100 147 90
(1) P4 = 126 mm for Compact NS250N/H/L.
Type R9 R33 R34 T U
NS100/160/250 148 74 148 6 y 32
NS400/630 180 91.5 148 6 y 32
Note.
Door cutout dimensions are given for a device position in the
enclosure where u 100 + (h x 5) with respect to the door
hinge.
See fxed or plug-in circuit breaker, page C-9.
Front-panel cutouts
Plug-in base Chassis with protection collar and escutcheons
E
2
1
6
2
3
P44
X
Z
E
2
1
8
1
3
Y
C17
C11
R33
R34
C16
C13
X
R8
R9
E
2
2
0
4
6

h

C-14
Dimensions
and connection
Compact NS100 to 250
(single-pole and two-pole
versions)
(a) short terminal shields
(b) interphase barriers
(c) for rear connection only
1 pole 2 poles
Dimensions
1 pole 2 poles
Mouting
On backplate
1 pole 2 poles
On rails
E
2
9
2
1
3
H
Z
H1
H2
H3 H7
H6
P1
P2
P4
X
E
2
9
2
1
4
X
Y
L5
L3
E
2
9
2
1
5
X
Y
L4
L3
(a)
(b)
E
2
9
2
1
6

E
2
1
5
0
6
K1
X
Y
K
D
B
1
0
3
7
5
4
Y
X
K1
K
U
T G
G1
E
2
1
5
1
0
Y
X
K

C-15
With escutcheon
Dimensions (mm)
Type C C1 C2 C3 C6 C7 G G1 G4 G5 H
NS100/160/250 29 76 54 108 43 104 62.5 125 70 140 80.5
Type H1 H2 H3 H4 H6 H7 K K1 L3 L4 L5
NS100/160/250 161 94 188 160.5 178 5 357 17.5 35 17.5 70 35
Type P1 P2 P4 P5 P6 R R1 R2 R4 R5 R6
NS100/160/250 81 86 111 83 88 14.5 29 19 38 73 29
Type R7 T T4 U
NS100/160/250 58 6 22 y 32
Note.
Door cutout dimensions are given for a device position in the
enclosure where u 100 + (h x 5) with respect to the door
hinge.
Cutout A Cutout B Cutout C
Front-panel cutout
E
2
1
6
0
0
X
P5
P6
A
B/C
Z
E
2
1
6
0
1
X
Y
C
C1
R
R1
E
2
1
6
0
1
X
Y
C2
C3
R2
R4(1P)
R5(2P)
E
2
1
6
0
4
X
Y
C2
C3
E
2
1
6
0
8
X
P6
Z
E
2
1
6
0
9
X
Y
C6
C7
R6
R7
E
2
2
0
4
6

h

C-16
Dimensions
and connection
Visu function
for Compact NS100 to 630
(combination with Interpact INV)
1 2 1 2
(a)
314 for front
connection.
316.5 for rear
connection.
322.5 with
connectors.
(b)
80.5 for front
connection.
83 for rear
connection.
89 with connectors.
3 poles 4 poles
Fixed Compact NS100 to 250 with Visu function Interpact INV100 to 250
E
6
2
4
2
7
93,7
474
510
160,5
178,5
(a)
(b)
96
86
X
Z
131
138
D
B
1
1
4
6
4
3
215
285
35 35 35
X
Y
105
52,5
52,5
140
D
B
1
1
4
6
4
4
215
285
35 35 35
X
52,5
140
Y
140
52,5
E
6
2
4
3
0
Y
X
70
7 6
35
157,5
62,5
X
50
17,5
125
100
22,3
E
6
2
4
3
1
Y
X
70
9 6
35
157,5
62,5
X
50
17,5
125
100
22,3
E
6
2
4
3
0
D
B
1
1
4
9
1
7
3 poles 4 poles
Mounting on rails and backplate
Front-panel cutout

C-17
(a)
492.5 for front
connection
493.5 for rear
connection
512.5 with right-
angle terminal
extensions
536.5 with edgewise
terminal extensions
532.5 with spreaders
525 with 2-cable
connectors.
(b)
127.5 for front
connection
128.5 for rear
connection
147.5 with right-
angle terminal
extensions
171.5 with edgewise
terminal extensions
167.5 with spreaders
160 with 2-cable
connectors.
D
B
1
1
4
9
1
8 3 poles 4 poles
Fixed Compact NS400 to 630 with Visu function Interpact INV400 to 630
3 poles 4 poles
Mounting on rails and backplate
Front-panel cutout
D
B
1
1
4
6
4
6
X
Y
45 45 45
70
185
241
443
140
70
D
B
1
1
4
6
4
7
X
Y
241
443
45 45 45
70
185
185
70
D
B
1
1
4
6
4
8
Y
X
90
9 6
45
241
100
X
75
22,5
200
150
33
E
6
2
4
3
7
Y
X
90
7 6
45
241
100
X
75
22,5
200
150
33
D
B
1
1
4
9
1
9
D
B
1
1
4
9
2
0

C-18
Dimensions
and connection
Motor-mechanism module for
Compact NS100 to 630
Note.
Door cutout dimensions are given for a device position in the
enclosure where u 100 + (h x 5) with respect to the door
hinge.
3 poles 4 poles
Dimensions
E
2
1
5
9
9
H20
Z
H21
P33
P32
X
H22
H23
E
2
1
5
9
7
X
Y
L1
L
L11
L12
E
2
1
5
9
8
X
Y
L2
L
With IP40, IK07 escutcheons and protection collar
for Vigi module
Front-panel cutouts
E
2
1
6
1
2
Z
P45
X
E
2
1
6
1
4
X
Y
C22
C23
R14
R15
E
2
1
6
2
1
P45
X
Z
E
2
1
8
1
3
Y
C17
C11
R33
R34
C16
C13
X
R8
R9
E
2
2
0
4
6

h

C-19
Dimensions (mm)
Type C11 C13 C16 C17 C22 C23 H20 H21 H22 H23 L L1
NS100/160/250 103 84 56 42.5 29 76 62.5 97 45.5 73 52.5 105
NS400/630 155 84 116.5 56 41.5 126 100 152 83 123 70 140
Type L2 L11 L12 P32 P33 P45 R8 R9 R14 R15 R33 R34
NS100/160/250 140 91 45.5 178 143 145 74 148 48.5 97 74 148
NS400/630 185 123 61.5 250 215 217 90 180 64.5 129 91.5 148

C-20
Dimensions
and connection
Rotary handle
for Compact NS100 to 630
Protection collar for Vigi module is mandatory.
Escutcheons are mandatory for rotary handles and Vigi protection collars.
An escutcheon is mandatory
(a) without keylock
(b) with Ronis keylock
(c) with Profalux keylock
Direct rotary handle
3 poles 4 poles
Compact Vigicompact
Front-panel cutouts
Fixed or plug-in circuit breaker
Compact Vigicompact
Withdrawable circuit breaker
E
2
1
6
2
7
H20
Z
P34
P36 (b)
P37 (c)
X
P35 (a)
H23
E
2
1
6
2
5
O
I
DD
60
60
X
Y
L1
L
L11
L12
H24
L15
E
2
1
6
2
6
O
I
DD
60
60
X
Y
L2
L
E
2
1
6
1
3
Z
P43
X
E
2
1
6
1
4
X
Y
C22
C23
R14
R15
E
2
1
6
1
5
X
Z
P43
E
2
1
8
0
5
X
Y
C22
C23
R14
R15
C4
C5
R28
R26
E
2
1
6
1
8
P44
X
Z
E
2
1
6
2
0
Y
C17
C11
R8
R9
X
E
2
1
6
2
2
P44
X
Z
E
2
1
8
1
3
Y
C17
C11
R33
R34
C16
C13
X
R8
R9

C-21
Dimensions (mm)
Type C4 C5 C11 C13 C16 C17 C22 C23 G36 G37 G38 G39 H9 H10 H20 H23 H24
NS100/160/250 86 37 103 84 55 42,5 29 76 36 72 41 100 60 120 28 73 9
NS400/630N/H/L 147.5 37 155 84 116.5 56 41.5 126 36 72 51 145 83 160 40 123 24.5
Type H25 H26 K14 K15 L L1 L2 L7 L8 L11 L12 L13 L14 L15 P34 P35 P36
NS100/160/250 37.5 75 50 100 52.5 105 140 69 120 91 9.25 37.5 75 55 121 155 156
NS400/630N/H/L 37.5 75 72.5 145 70 140 185 85 160 123 5 37.5 75 66.5 145 179 180
Type P37 P38
(1)
P40
(1)
P42 P43 P44 R1 R8 R9 R14 R15 R26 R33 R34 T6 T7
NS100/160/250 164 u 185 u 248 125 89 123 29 74 148 48.5 97 14.5 74 148 4.2 50
NS400/630N/H/L 188 u 209 u 272 149 112 147 29 90 180 64.5 129 32 91.5 148 4.2 50
(1) y 600 mm.
Front-panel cutout
Note.
Door cutout dimensions are given for a device position in the enclosure where u 100 + (h x 5)
with respect to the door hinge.
MCC direct rotary handle
Front-panel cutout
Extended rotary handle
Cut shaft at length: Cut shaft at length:
P38-126 mm (NS100 to 250) P40-122 mm (NS100 to 250)
P38-150 mm (NS400 to 630) P40-150 mm (NS400 to 630)
E
2
1
6
3
3
X
Z
P42
2
1 to 3 maxi
E
2
1
6
3
2
L12
L8
L7
H24
H9
H10
Y
X
E
2
1
6
3
4
Y
X
K15
K14
G38
G39
E
2
1
6
2
9
10
Z
P38
X
E
2
1
6
3
0
Z
P40
X
E
2
1
6
2
8
O
I
Y
X
L14
L13
L12
H26
H25
H24
60
60
E
2
1
6
3
1
Y
X
L12
45
T6
T7
H24
G36
G37
Fixed or plug-in circuit breaker Withdrawable circuit breaker

C-22
Dimensions
and connection
Indication
and measurement modules
for Compact NS100 to 630
(d) for rear connection only. For two-pole circuit breakers,
the centre hole is not necessary.
Circuit breaker with ammeter module Circuit breaker with current-transformer module
Dimensions
E
2
1
5
1
7
X
P1
P2
P47
Z
H8
H9
H10
H11 H13
H12
H15
H14
E
2
1
5
1
6
X
P1
P2
P4
Z
H8
H9
H10
H11 H13
H12
H15
H14
E
2
1
5
1
8
G6
G7
K1 K1
K1
G
K
G1
G8
G9
X
Y
T
T4 (d)
E
2
1
5
1
9
K1 K1 K1
K2
K
X
Y
D
B
1
0
3
7
5
5
Y
X
K
K1
G
G1
G6
G7
T
U E
2
1
5
2
1
Y
X
K
K2
2 poles or 3 poles 4 poles
Mounting
On backplate
2 poles or 3 poles 4 poles
On rails

C-23
Dimensions (mm)
Type C C1 C22 C23 C27 C28 C29 C30 G G1 G6 G7 G8 G9 H8 H9 H10
NS100/160/250 28 76 28 76 56 5 124 30 78.5 62.5 125 137.5 200 145 215 155.5 236 169
NS400/630N/H/L 41.5 116 41.5 126 56 5 185.5 30 122 100 200 200 300 213.5 327 227.5 355 242.5
Type H11 H12 H13 H14 H15 K K1 K2 P1 P2 P4 P6 P43 P47 P48 R R1
NS100/160/250 263 235.5 396 253.5 432 17.5 35 70 81 86 111
(1)
88 89 137 128 14.5 29
NS400/630N/H/L 385 340 580 337 574 22.5 45 90 95.5 110 168 112 112 162 154 31.5 63
Type R14 R15 R16 R17 T T4 T8 U
NS100/160/250 48.5 97 46.5 93 6 22 31 y 32
NS400/630N/H/L 64.5 129 64.5 93 6 32 31 y 32
(1) P4 = 126 mm for Compact NS 250N/H/L.
Circuit breaker with ammeter module and voltage-presence indicator
Front-panel cutout
E
2
1
6
7
3
P6
X
Z
E
2
1
6
7
4
C
C1
C27
C28
R
Y
R1
R16
R17
X
C30
T8
E
2
1
6
7
7
Z
P43
X
E
2
1
6
7
8
X
Y
C22
C23
R14
R15
C28
C27
R17
R16
C30
T8

C-24
Dimensions
and connection
For Vigi module
Circuit breaker with Circuit breaker with
toggle or rotary handle motor-mechanism
module
Front accessories
for Compact NS100 to 630
Toggle protection collar
Protection collar
Vigi-module protection collar
Toggle cover
For toggle
Front-panel escutcheons
E
2
1
6
3
5
E
2
1
6
3
6
M
A
E
2
1
6
3
7
D
E
2
1
6
3
8
E
2
1
6
3
9
52,4
91
E
2
1
6
4
0
35
E
2
1
4
6
4
53
E
2
1
6
5
3
E
2
1
6
5
4
M8
A3
E
2
1
6
5
5
D3
E
2
1
6
4
1
E
2
1
6
4
2
M2
A1
E
2
1
6
4
3
D2 D1
M3
E
2
1
6
4
4
E
2
1
6
4
5
79
69
E
2
1
6
4
6
6,5 3,5
64

C-25
Dimensions (mm)
Type A A1 A2 A3 D D1 D2 D3 M M2 M3 M6 M7 M8
NS100/160/250 91 69 157 94 35 3.5 6.5 40 73 115 102 114 101 94
NS400/630 123 102 189 35 35 3.5 6.5 60 123 155 142 164 151 134
For Vigi module with protection collar or ammeter module
For protection collar, motor mechanism or rotary handle
Front-panel escutcheons
E
2
1
6
4
7
E
2
1
6
4
8
M6
A2
E
2
1
6
4
9
D2 D1
M7
E
2
1
6
5
0
E
2
1
6
5
1
93,5
157
E
2
1
6
5
2
6,5 3,5
80,5

C-26
X
105
94
105
Y
105 (3P)
175 (4P)
188
123
99,5
99,5 (3P)
169,5 (4P)
35
70
117
234
100
200
123
210
X
105
94
105
Y
105 (3P)
175 (4P)
188
123
35
70
117
234
123
99,5
200
99,5 (3P)
169,5 (4P)
100
X
Y
Compact NS630b to 1600
(xed version)
Dimensions
Electrical control
Front and rear connection (N, H, L, LB)
E
4
7
8
9
7
A
Rear connection (N, H, L, LB)
E
4
7
9
1
4
A
Manual control
Front connection (N, H, L)
E
4
7
9
7
3
A
Note.
Dimensions for front and rear
connection on electrically
operated devices are
identical to those for
manually operated devices.
F : Datum
(1) terminal shields are
optional
Dimensions
and connection
E
4
7
9
7
2
B
X
F
Z
254
508
107,5
205
163,5
327
(1)
E
4
7
9
1
3
A
X
F
205 14
92,5
113
107,5
140,5
146,5
Z
D
B
1
0
5
1
3
8
X
F
Z
210
182
175,5
107,5

C-27
Front connection
On backplate On rails
Rear connection
On backplate or rails
3P 4P
Note.
Mounting parameters for electrically operated devices are identical to those for manually
operated devices.
X and Y are the symmetry planes for a 3-pole device
Z is the back plane of the device.
Mounting
D
B
1
1
5
3
4
8

D
B
1
1
5
3
4
9

D
B
1
1
5
3
5
0

D
B
1
1
5
3
5
1

C-28
Electrical control
Door cutout
A
Toggle control

Door cutout
A B

(1) Without escutcheon.
(2) With escutcheon.
(1) Without escutcheon.
(2) With escutcheon.
Compact NS630b to 1600
(xed version) (cont.)
Front-panel cutouts
F : Datum.
F : Datum.
Dimensions
and connection
E
5
9
3
6
8
X
(C)
(B)
(A)
150
(2)
F
Z
124 mini
(1) (2)
107,5
140,5
146,5
E
4
7
9
0
1
A
Y
X
216 (1)
266 (2)
194 mini (3P)
264 mini (4P)
194 mini
108 (1)
133 (2)
97 (1)
122 (2)
194 (1)
244 (2)
E
5
9
2
0
1
B
Y
X
194 mini (3P)
264 mini (4P)
194 mini
100,5 (1)
201 (1)
90,5 (1)
181 (1)
E
5
9
2
0
0
A
C
Y
X
119 (1)
144 (2)
194 mini (3P)
264 mini (4P)
194 mini
95,5 (1)
108 (2)
35,5 (1)
60,5 (2)
71 (1)
121 (2)
D
B
1
0
5
1
3
9
X
(A)
F
Z
150 mini
(1) (2)
107,5
175,5
182
E
4
7
9
0
1
A
Y
X
216 (1)
266 (2)
194 mini (3P)
264 mini (4P)
194 mini
108 (1)
133 (2)
97 (1)
122 (2)
194 (1)
244 (2)

C-29
Extended rotary handle
Dimensions Door cutout
Rotary handle
Direct rotary handle
Dimensions
Door cutout
A B D
F : Datum
D
B
1
0
5
2
9
4
(D)
(B)
(A)
X
F
Z
229,5
195
180 mini
(2)
124 mini
(1) (2)
107,5
140,5
146,6
175,5
E
4
7
9
5
5
A
R80
60
60
X
Y
25
24
A
5
5
9
7
4
E
E
4
7
9
0
1
A
Y
X
216 (1)
266 (2)
194 mini (3P)
264 mini (4P)
194 mini
108 (1)
133 (2)
97 (1)
122 (2)
194 (1)
244 (2)
(1) Without escutcheon.
(2) With escutcheon.
E
4
7
9
5
7
Y
X
201 (1)
194 mini
90,5 (1)
181 (1)
100,5 (1)
E
4
7
9
5
6
A
Y
X
201 (1)
194 mini (3P)
264 mini (4P)
194 mini
90,5 (1)
130 (1)
100,5 (1)
E
4
7
9
5
9
A
X
F
Z
231,5 mini
605,5 maxi
212,5
E
4
7
9
5
8
A
R100
60
60
Y
25
24
X
Note.
X and Y are the symmetry planes for a 3-pole device
Z is the back plane of the device.
E
4
7
9
6
0
A

C-30
Compact NS630b to 1600
(withdrawable version)
Dimensions, mounting and cutouts
Dimensions
Manual control Electrical control
Mounting
Bottom mounting on base plate or rails Vertical on uprights or backplate
Cutouts
Door cutout Rear panel cutout
F : Datum
Dimensions
and connection
E
4
7
9
4
3
B
210
mini
70 (*)
60 mini
5
X
69
F
E
5
9
3
7
0
B
210
mini
46 (*)
60 mini
5
X
45,5
F
(*) Withdrawable position
E
4
7
9
4
4
A
90
Y
94
188
160,5
127,5 (3P)
197,5 (4P)
123
199
X
90 (3P)
160 (4P)
E
4
7
9
4
5
X
F
25
100
24
231
216
D
B
1
1
5
3
5
6

E
4
7
1
7
5
B

E
4
7
1
7
7
B
259 (1)
303 (2)
170 mini (3P)
240 mini (4P)
230 mini
Y
X
109 (1)
130,8 (2)
161 (1)
183 (2)
259 (1)
307 (2)
(1) Without escutcheon.
(2) With escutcheon.
E
4
7
1
7
8
A
Y
117
234
X
102,5
102,5 (3P)
172,5 (4P)
Note.
X and Y are the symmetry planes for a 3-pole device.

C-31
(1) Without escutcheon.
(2) With escutcheon.
Door cutout
(*) Withdrawable position.
Direct rotary handle
Dimensions
Extended rotary handle
Dimensions Door cutout
E
4
7
9
6
2
A
136 (*)
210
mini
93
60 mini
5
X
F
E
4
7
9
6
3
A
R80
Y
X
25
60
24
60
E
4
7
9
6
4
B
161 (1)
183 (2)
259 (1)
307 (2)
Y
259 (1)
303 (2)
X
170 mini (3P)
240 mini (4P)
230 mini
109 (1)
130,8 (2)
E
4
7
9
6
5
A
207 mini
447 maxi
F
17
X
E
4
7
9
6
6
A
R200
60
60
Y
25
24
X
Note.
X and Y are the symmetry planes for a 3-pole device.
E
4
7
9
6
7
A

C-32
Compact NS1600b to 3200
(xed version)
Dimensions
Dimensions

E
5
9
4
5
6
A
Note.
X and Y are the symmetry planes for a 3-pole device
C
Mounting on rails
Dimensions
and connection
E
5
9
4
3
9
X
165
330
Z
132
368
162,5
168,5
F
18,5
222,5
(C)
(B)
(A) 132 mini
38,5
E
5
9
4
4
0
210
X
105
Y
75
150
170
340
180
180 (3P)
295 (4P)
210
210 (3P)
325 (4P)
195
195 (3P)
310 (4P)
163
Door cutout (A, B, C)
A B
E
5
9
4
5
7
X
Y
346 (1)
397 (2)
216 (1)
267 (2)
108 (1)
133,5 (2)
173 (1)
198,5 (2)
E
5
9
7
2
9
A
X
Y
332
201
100,5
166
E
5
9
4
5
8
X
Y
119
146
73
95,9
F : datum
(1) Without escutcheon.
(2) With escutcheon.

C-33
Compact NS630b to 3200
External modules
External power-supply module (AD)
Battery module (BAT)
Control-wire connections to terminal block
E
4
7
6
8
3
A
S : 2,5 mm
2
S : 0,6 mm
2
8
E
4
7
6
8
4
A
2
1
3,5
Only one wire per terminal.
D
B
1
0
5
1
4
0
D
B
1
0
5
1
4
1
E
4
7
6
9
2
A
H3
H2
BAT 24V
H4
H1
Input
24VDC
+
Output
24VDC
+
73
75
112
D
B
1
1
5
3
5
5

C-34
MN delay unit
Chassis communication module
Modbus Digipact
External sensor for source ground return (SGR) protection
External sensor " MDGF" summing module
Compact NS630b to 3200
External modules (cont.)
Dimensions
and connection
E
4
7
6
9
4
A
3 6
MN
UVR
1012
100/130 V
AC DC
S
0 5 1
3
1 5
Retardateur de MN
Time delay for UVR
6 5 4 3 2 1
3 2 1
72
73,5
81
42
D
B
1
1
5
3
5
4

E
4
7
6
8
5
A
+
+
CCMmodbus
u
a
e
s

R
k
o
t
e
N
Fault
Com
Add ess
sync
d
e
h
sBABA
BABA
u
t
c
n
o
s
D
e
k
a
e
B
+
E
C D
C T
C
45
54
58
90
E
4
7
6
8
6
A
E
5
8
5
6
1
45
200
150
76
130
E
4
7
6
8
7
A
M
DG
F
45
106
58
90

C-35
External sensor for neutral
400/1600 A (NS630b to 1600)
1000/4000 A (NS1600b to 3200)
Installation
400/1600 (NS630b to NS1600) 1000/4000 A (NS1600b to NS3200)
D
B
1
1
5
3
5
2

D
B
1
1
5
3
5
3

E
4
7
6
9
6
E
4
7
6
9
7
A

C-36
Busbars path
280 x 115 mm window
Busbars spaced 70 mm centre-to-centre
470 x 160 mm window
Busbars spaced 115 mm centre-to-centre
280 x 115 mm window
Rectangular sensor for earth leakage protection (Vigi)
470 x 160 mm window
Busbars I y 1600 A I y 3200 A
Window (mm) 280 x 115 470 x 160
Weight (kg) 14 18
Compact NS630b to 3200
External modules (cont.)
Dimensions
and connection
E
9
4
3
0
9
E
9
0
3
0
0
E
9
0
3
0
1
1
0
3
0
9
E
E
9
4
3
1
1
2 bars 50 x 10
E
9
0
3
0
7
4 bars 100 x 5
E
9
4
3
1
2
2 bars 100 x 5
E
9
0
3
6
4
4 bars 125 x 5
E
9
4
3
1
0

C-37
Installation and connection for Digipact DMB300
Dimensions and front-panel cut-out
Installation and connection for Digipact DMC300
Dimensions and front-panel cut-out
D
B
1
1
8
5
8
2
202
110 (*)
111,3
7,1
64,8
93,4

12,1
R 3,5 maxi / 2 mini
190,9
0,4
1,5 y e y 6
99,2
0,4
(*) With Digipact wiring system
(*) With Digipact Modbus wiring system
D
B
1
1
8
5
8
3
R 3,5 maxi / 2 mini
186,2
0,4
1,5 y e y 6 mm
136,2
0,4
D
B
1
0
0
4
8
5
Digipact DMC300
com
Alarm
(*)

C-38
Escutcheon
NS630b to NS1600 (fxed control)
A C
Accessories NS630b to 3200
NS630b to NS1600 (withdrawable control)
NS1600b to NS3200 (fxed control)
Dimensions
and connection
E
5
9
8
9
1
A
(C)
(A)
X
E
5
9
8
8
5
A
X
Y
275
27
27
253
E
5
9
8
8
6
A
X
Y
27
154
27
131
E
5
9
8
9
2
A
X
E
5
9
8
8
7
A
Y
X 313
27
27 27
317
13
E
9
4
2
6
4
X
Y
27
202,5
275
137,5
27
405
E
9
4
2
6
3
X

C-39

C-40
Dimensions
and connection
Compact NS80H-MA,
NSC100N and NSA160
Compact NS80H-MA
Compact NSC100N
Compact NSA160
E
2
1
8
7
8
X
Z
32
E
2
1
8
7
7
X
Y
29,2
48,5
29,2
97
E
4
3
4
0
5
X
90
45
Y
30 30
48,5
48,5
E
4
3
4
0
6
6
0
4
3
4
E
X
Z
34,5
34,5
83
E
2
1
8
9
8
X
90
45
Y
30 30
53
44
E
2
1
9
0
0
X
Z
34,5
34,5
83
E
6
2
4
5
4
X
120
45
Y
30 30
53
44
30

C-41
Vigicompact NSC and NSA
3 poles 4 poles
Bottom connection
3 poles 4 poles
Top connection
E
6
2
4
5
5
E
4
3
4
0
7
E
6
2
4
5
6
E
4
3
4
0
8
X
Y
30 30 60,8 30
30 30
outgoing
incoming
30
X
Y
30 30 60,8
30 30
incoming outgoing
X
Y
30 30 60,8 30
30 30 30
outgoing
incoming
30
X
Y
30 30 60,8
30 30 30
incoming outgoing

C-42
Dimensions
and connection
Compact, Vigicompact
NS100 to 630 (xed version)
Connection dimensions
Front connection
Terminals
NS100/160/250 NS400/630
Connectors
NS100/160/250 NS400/630
Rear connection
NS100/160/250 NS400/630
E
2
1
7
4
8
X
Z
P13
P21
E
2
1
7
4
7
X
Y
K1 K1 K1
G4
G19
G5
E
3
5
5
7
8
E
2
1
5
5
4
70
Z
X
10,5
E
2
1
7
5
0
113,5
Z
X
14
E
2
1
5
5
3
Z
X
19
70
E
2
1
7
5
1
Z
X
14
113,5
E
2
1
7
5
2
Z
113,5
46,5
E
2
1
7
5
5
E
2
1
5
6
1
18
10
8,6 20
6
70
X
Z
13
43 short RC
88 long RC
E
2
1
7
5
6
30
15
13 23,2
8
113,5
X
Z
14
50 short RC
115 long RC

C-43

Note.
For dimensions of conductors, see page A-92 and page A-93.
NS400/630
Dimensions (mm)
Type G4 G5 G19 G26 G27 K1 K8 K9 K10 P13 P21
NS100/160/250 70 140 215 30 41 35 45 159 114 19.5
(1)
NS400/630N/H/L 113.5 227 327 39 54 45 52.5 187.5 135 26 44
52.5 67 5 70 240 170
(1) P13 = 21.5 mm for NS250 and Vigi MH module.
NS400/630
Connection with accessories
Right-angle terminal extensions (upstream only)
NS100/160/250
Straight or edgewise terminal extensions
NS100/160/250
Distribution connectors (interphase barriers mandatory)
NS100/160/250
Spreader
E
3
5
5
7
7
E
2
1
5
6
3
20,5
37,5
39,5 (b)
70
4
X
Z
(b) Vigi module or NS250.
E
2
1
7
5
8
Z
34
61
113,5
8
X
E
3
5
5
8
0
E
2
1
5
5
6
Z
X
41
30
70
E
2
1
7
5
4
X
58
42
113,5
Z
F
8
View F
E
2
1
5
6
5
E
2
1
5
6
6
41
64,5
66,5 (b)
70
X
Z
(b) Vigi module or NS250.
E
2
1
5
5
7
X
Y
K8 K8
K10
G27
G26
E
2
1
5
5
8
X
Y
K8 K8 K8
K9

C-44
Dimensions
and connection
Compact, Vigicompact
NS100 to 630
(plug-in and withdrawable
versions)
(*) short terminal shields are mandatory.
Plug-in base or chassis
Mounting on backplate or on rails
(1)
With spreaders
Connectors
NS100/160/250 NS400/630
E
2
1
5
7
0
X
Z
E
2
1
5
6
9
X
K1 K1
Y
K1
E
2
1
5
7
1
(*)
E
2
1
5
7
2
G32
P21
G31
E
X
Z
(1) For backplate mounting, the insulating screen,
supplied with the plug-in base, must be installed.
E
2
1
9
3
9
G32
P21
G31
8
X
Z
42
195,5
210,5
E
2
1
5
8
0
(*)
E
2
1
5
8
1
G34
X
Z
P28
G32
E
2
1
9
4
1
68
G31
X
Z
94
202
Mounting on backplate or on rails
(1)
With spreaders
Terminals
NS100/160/250 NS400/630
Rear connection

C-45
Right-angle extensions (mounted up and out)
Dimensions (mm)
Type E G31 G32 G33 G34 G35 K1 P21 P22 P23 P24 P25 P26 P27 P28 P29 P30
NS100/160/250 4 108.5 100 63.5 110 80.5 35 19 75.5 67 49 57.5 75.5 67 26.5 54.5 36.5
NS400/630N/H/L 6 171 156.5 104 129 45 26 114 5 100.5 82.5 96.5 108 5 94.5
Long, insulated right-angle
terminal extensions are
mandatory.
(*) short terminal shields are mandatory.
Rear connection
Mounting through backplate or on rails
Mounting on backplate
Right-angle extensions (mounted down and out)
E
2
1
5
8
3
(*)
E
2
1
5
8
2
P29
P30
G34
X
Z
G32
E
2
1
9
4
2
X
Z
109
83
94
66
E
2
1
5
7
3
(*)
E
2
1
5
7
4
G33
E
P24
P25
P23
P22
X
Z
G35
E
2
1
5
7
6
(*)
E
2
1
5
7
7
G33
E
P27
P26
X
Z
E
2
1
5
7
8
(*)
E
2
1
5
7
9
G35
E
P27
P26
X
Z
Mounting through backplate or on rails
Connectors
NS100/160/250 NS400/630

C-46
Compact NS630b to 1600
(xed version)
Bars
Note.
Recommended connection screws: M10 class 8.8.
Tightening torque: 50 Nm with contact washer.
F : Datum.
Dimensions
and connection
Horizontal rear connection
Vertical rear connection
Front connection
E
4
7
9
1
8
A
E
4
7
9
0
4
A
F
15
15
67,5
67,5
123
123
43,5
X
Z
31
E
4
7
9
0
5
A
Y N
70 70 70
D
B
1
1
5
3
1
9

E
4
7
9
1
9
A
E
4
7
9
0
7
A
F
43,5
X
Z
31
97
97
E
4
7
9
0
8
A
Y N
70 70 70
15
View A
D
B
1
1
5
3
2
0

View A detail.
E
4
7
9
1
6
A
E
4
7
9
1
0
A
X
129
129
163,5
F
Z
163,5
16,5
E
4
7
9
1
1
B

Y N
70 70 70
View A
30
Top terminal Bottom terminal
D
B
1
0
0
6
3
1
25
9,5
44
15
2 screws M10
15
9,5
25
44
15
2 screws M10
15
View A detail.

C-47
Note.
X and Y are the symmetry planes for a 3-pole device.
Middle left or middle right
spreader for 4P
Middle spreader for 3P Left or right spreader for 4P Left or right spreader for 3P
Spreader detail
Front connection with spreaders
Rear connection with spreaders
D
B
1
1
5
3
2
1

View A detail.
E
4
7
9
2
2
A
Y
70 70
25
15
25
View A
E
4
7
9
2
3
A
Y N
70 70 70
12,5 12,5
95 95 95
15
View A
E
4
7
9
2
1
A
X
181
181
F
Z
31,5
196
196
E
4
7
9
2
0
A
E
4
7
9
2
4
A
E
4
7
9
2
5
A
15
52,5
82,5
123
123
98
15
83
F
X
Z
E
4
7
9
2
6
A
Y
70 70
95 95
E
4
7
9
2
7
A
Y N
70 70 70
12,5 12,5
95 95 95
D
B
1
1
5
3
2
2

D
B
1
1
5
3
2
3

D
B
1
1
5
3
2
4

F : Datum.

C-48
Note.
(1) two mounting possibilities for vertical-connection adapters
(pitch 21 mm).
Recommended connection screws: M10 class 8.8.
Tightening torque: 50 Nm with contact washer.
Compact NS630b to 1600
(xed version) (cont.)
Bars
Dimensions
and connection
Front connection with vertical-connection adapters
E
4
7
9
2
8
A
E
4
7
9
2
9
A
X
200
200
430
F
Z
10
62,5
E
4
7
9
3
0
A
Y N
15
70 70 70
View A
D
B
1
1
5
3
2
5

View A detail.
F : Datum.

C-49

Cables with lugs and bare cables
Front connection with vertical-connection adapters and cable-lug adapters
Lugs
Fixed circuit breaker with 4-cable bare-cable connectors (240 mm
2
)
D
B
1
1
5
3
2
6

View A detail.
E
4
7
9
3
1
E
4
7
9
3
2
A
X
200
200
250
F
Z
10
150
250
15
15
530
E
4
7
9
3
3
A
15
Y N
70 70 70
View A
D
B
1
1
0
9
0
4
D
B
1
1
0
9
0
5

D
B
1
1
0
9
0
6

D
B
1
1
5
3
2
7

E
5
9
2
0
2
A
E
5
9
2
0
3
A
X
F
Z
398
16,5
199
199
35
61
206,5
206,5
413
E
5
9
2
0
4
A
Y N
70 70 70
F : Datum.

C-50
Compact NS630b to 1600
(plug-in and withdrawable
versions)
Bars
Note.
Recommended connection screws: M10 class 8.8.
Tightening torque: 50 Nm with contact washer.
Dimensions
and connection
Horizontal rear connection
Vertical rear connection
Front connection
E
4
7
1
7
9
A
E
4
7
9
4
8
A
267,5
F
15
67,5
114
X
49
15
67,5
228
E
4
7
1
8
1
A
Y N
70 70 70
D
B
1
1
5
3
1
9

E
4
7
1
8
2
A
E
4
7
9
4
0
A
267,5
F
X
97
49
97
E
4
7
1
8
4
A
Y N
70
15
70 70
View A
D
B
1
1
5
3
2
0

View A detail.
E
4
7
1
8
5
A
E
4
7
9
4
1
A
235
F
X
171
12,5
12,5
336
140
15
D
B
1
1
5
3
2
8

View A detail.
E
4
7
1
8
7
A
Y N
70 70 70
View A
Top terminal Bottom terminal
F : Datum.

C-51

Middle left or middle right
spreader for 4P
Middle spreader for 3P Left or right spreader for 4P Left or right spreader for 3P
Spreader detail
Front connection with spreaders
D
B
1
1
5
3
2
1

View A detail.
E
4
7
2
2
3
A
E
4
7
9
5
2
A
250
F
X
223
207
192
238
E
4
7
2
2
5
A
Y
70 70
95 95
View A
E
4
7
2
2
6
A
Y N
70 70 70
95 95 95
12,5 12,5
View A
D
B
1
1
5
3
2
2

D
B
1
1
5
3
2
3

D
B
1
1
5
3
2
4

F : Datum.

C-52
Compact NS630b to 1600
(plug-in and withdrawable
versions) (cont.)
Cables with lugs
Note.
X and Y are the symmetry planes for a 3-pole device.
Recommended connection screws: M10 class 8.8.
Tightening torque: 50 Nm with contact washer.

Dimensions
and connection

Front connection with vertical-connection adapters and cable-lug adapters
Lugs
D
B
1
1
5
3
2
6

View A detail.
E
4
7
2
2
7
E
4
7
9
5
3
A
193,5
F
X
50
292
583
15
15
71
171
140
71
50
261
21
21
E
4
7
2
2
9
A
View A
Y N
70
15
15
70 70
D
B
1
1
0
9
0
4
D
B
1
1
0
9
0
5

D
B
1
1
0
9
0
6

F : Datum.

C-53
Compact NS1600b to 3200
(xed version)
Note.
Recommended connection screws: M10 class 8.8.
Tightening torque: 50 Nm with contact washer.
Front connection (NS1600b to 2500)
Front connection with vertical-connection adapters (NS1600b to 2500)
Front connection (NS3200)
E
5
9
4
6
2
B
View A detail.
E
5
9
4
5
9
A
E
5
9
4
6
0
X
150
165
Z
F
20
165
150
E
5
9
4
6
1
A
Y
N
115 115 115
View A
D
B
1
1
5
3
1
8

View A detail.
E
5
9
7
3
6
A
OFF
OFF
E
5
9
7
3
7
X
Z
25
F
230
230
142,5
142,5
40
E
9
4
9
6
8
115 115 115
N
80 80 80 80
Y
View A
D
B
1
1
5
3
1
8

View A detail.
E
5
9
7
3
9
A
OFF
OFF
E
5
9
7
4
0
X
Z
40
25
F
230
230
142,5
142,5
E
5
9
7
4
1
A
115 115
Y N
115
View A

schneider-electric.com The electrical
installation guide
This international site allows you
to access all the Schneider Electric
products in just 2 clicks
via comprehensive range data-
sheets, with direct links to:
complete library: technical
documents, catalogs, FAQs,
brochures
selection guides from
the e-catalog.
product discovery sites and
their Flash animations.
You will also nd illustrated
overviews, news to which you
can subscribe, the list of country
contacts
p
p
p
According to IEC 60364
This guide, part of the
Schneider Electric offer, is
the essential tool to "guide"
you any time in your business:
design ofce, consultant
contractor, panelbuilder
teacher, trainer.
Comprehensive
and concrete information on:
all the new technical solutions
all the components
of an installation from a global
point of view
all the IEC standards modications
all the fundamental
electrotechnical knowledge
all the design stages, from
medium to low voltage.
p
p
p
p
p
p
p
p
p
TOOLS

D-1
Presentation 2
Functions and characteristics A-1
Installation recommendations B-1
Dimensions and connection C-1
Compact NSC100 - Compact NS80H-MA D-2
Indication contacts D-2
Early-make contacts D-3
Compact NSA160 D-4
Indication contacts D-4
Compact NS100 to 630 D-6
Indication contacts D-6
Motor mechanism (automatic reset) D-8
Motor mechanism (remote reset) D-10
Motor mechanism (local reset) D-12
Early-make contacts D-14
Motor protection Trip unit STR22/43ME D-16
Compact NS630b to 1600 D-20
Fixed circuit breakers D-20
Plug-in / withdrawable circuit breakers D-22
Compact NS630b to 3200 D-24
Connection of the 24 V DC - External power supply AD module D-24
Communications option 24 V DC external power supply D-26
Earth-fault and earth-leakage protection - Neutral protection -
Zone selective interlocking D-28
Compact NS1600b to 3200 D-30
Fixed circuit breakers D-30
Compact NS100 to 630 D-32
Communication option 24 V external power supply D-32
PM750 inputs states - PM800 with PM8M26 module D-33
Telemecanique Advantys module OTB1SODM9LP D-34
Additional characteristics E-1
Catalogue numbers and order forms F-1
Compact NS
Electrical diagrams
Contents

D-2
Symbols
Q Compact NS
SD trip indication contact
OF ON / OFF indication contact
MN undervoltage release
MX shunt release
CAO early-break contact of rotary handle
CAF early-make contact of rotary handle
XI terminal block for CAF wiring (must be ordered)
F1 breaker for the protection of MN/MX
H1 lamp signalling tripped position
Compact NSC100
Compact NS80H-MA
Indication contacts
With OF1 and CAO1 With OF1 and CAF1/CAF2
The diagram is shown with circuits de-energised,
all devices open, connected and charged and relays
in the normal position.
Colour code for auxiliary wiring
RD red
GN green
BK black
BL blue
WH white
With MN With MX
D
B
1
1
2
4
0
5
(1) MN or MX (MN: D1, D2; MX: C1, C2)
E
4
3
8
2
2
CAF1 CAF2
H
W
D
R
D
R
12 14
OF1
11
H
W
D
B
1
1
2
4
0
6

D
B
1
1
5
3
2
9
Electrical diagrams

D-3
With MN
Early-make contacts
Following tripping due to an electrical fault, reset must
be carried out locally and manually.
(1) independent auxiliary source.
Remark
NS80H-MA and NSC100 circuit breakers are not plug-in or
withdrawable devices. As a result, there is no automatic
auxiliary connector. Connections are made directly to the
device.
With MN + SD
D
B
1
1
2
4
0
9
D
B
1
1
2
4
1
0
Electrical diagrams

D-4
Compact NSA160
Indication contacts
Symbols
Q Compact NS
SD trip indication contact
OF ON / OFF indication contact
MN undervoltage release
MX shunt release
CAO early-break contact of rotary handle
CAF early-make contact of rotary handle
XI terminal block for CAF wiring (must be ordered)
F1 breaker for the protection of MN/MX
H1 lamp signalling tripped position
Colour code for auxiliary wiring
RD red
GN green
BK black
BL blue
WH white
The diagram is shown with circuits de-energised,
all devices open, connected and charged and relays
in the normal position.
With OF1
D
B
1
1
2
4
1
2
(1) MN or MX (MN: D1, D2; MX: C1, C2).
Electrical diagrams

D-5
With MN
D
B
1
1
2
4
0
6
With MX
D
B
1
1
5
3
2
9

Electrical diagrams

D-6
Compact NS100 to 630
Indication contacts
Compact NS100 to 250
Manually operated circuit breaker
Auxiliary wiring for plug-in / withdrawable circuit breaker
Automatic auxiliary connectors Manual auxiliary connectors
(wires 0.75 to 2.5 mm
2
) (wires 0.75 to 2.5 mm
2
)
Symbols
Q Compact NS100 to 250
SD trip indication contact
SDE fault indication contact
SDV earth-fault indication contact
OF ON / OFF indication contact
MN undervoltage release
MX shunt release
MT motor-mechanism module
CAO early-break contact of rotary handle
CAF early-make contact of rotary handle
CE connected-position carriage switch
CD disconnected-position carriage switch
Colour code for auxiliary wiring
RD red
GN green
BK black
VT violet
YE yellow
GY grey
BL blue
OR orange
WH white
The diagram is shown with circuits de-energised,
all devices open, connected and charged and relays
in the normal position.
D
B
1
1
2
4
2
1
(1) MN or MX (MN: D1, D2; MX: C1, C2).
(2) for the withdrawable and plug-in versions, SDV and OF2 contacts can be installed in the
circuit breaker, but only one can be connected to the automatic auxiliary connectors.
Circuit breaker with motor mechanism
D
B
1
1
2
4
2
2
(1) MN or MX (MN: D1, D2; MX: C1, C2).
(2) for the withdrawable and plug-in versions, SDV and OF2 contacts can be installed in the
circuit breaker, but only one can be connected to the automatic auxiliary connectors.
(3) wires supplied, must be connected to ensure correct operation.
D
B
1
1
2
4
1
5
Fixed part
(front view looking into base)
D
B
1
1
2
4
1
6
Fixed part (rear view).
Electrical diagrams

D-7
Symbols
Q Compact NS100 to 250
SD trip indication contact
SDE fault indication contact
SDV earth-fault indication contact
OF ON / OFF indication contact
MN undervoltage release
MX shunt release
MT motor-mechanism module
CAO early-break contact of rotary handle
CAF early-make contact of rotary handle
CE connected-position carriage switch
CD disconnected-position carriage switch
Colour code for auxiliary wiring
RD red
GN green
BK black
VT violet
YE yellow
GY grey
BL blue
OR orange
WH white
D
B
1
1
2
4
2
0
Compact NS400 to 630
Manually operated circuit breaker
D
B
1
1
2
4
2
3
(1) MN or MX (MN: D1, D2; MX: C1, C2).
(2) for the withdrawable and plug-in versions, SDV and OF3 contacts can be installed in the
circuit breaker, but only one can be connected to the automatic auxiliary connectors.
(3) options available with trip unit STR53UE only.
Circuit breaker with motor mechanism
D
B
1
1
2
4
2
4
(1) MN or MX (MN: D1, D2; MX: C1, C2).
(2) for the withdrawable and plug-in versions, SDV and OF3 contacts can be installed in the
circuit breaker, but only one can be connected to the automatic auxiliary connectors.
(3) options available with trip unit STR53UE only.
(4) wires supplied, must be connected to ensure correct operation.
Auxiliary wiring for plug-in / withdrawable circuit breaker
Automatic auxiliary connectors Manual auxiliary connectors
(wires 0.75 to 2.5 mm
2
) (wires 0.75 to 2.5 mm
2
)
D
B
1
1
2
4
1
9
Fixed part
(front view looking into base)
Fixed part (rear view).
Electrical diagrams

D-8
Symbols
Q Compact NS100 to 630
SDE fault indication contact
MT motor-mechanism module
F1 breaker for protection of motor-mechanism module circuits
H1 lamp signalling an electrical fault
H2 lamp signalling motor mechanism in manual position
F closing order
O opening order orders must not be simultaneous
(must be > 150 ms)
Colour code for auxiliary wiring
RD red
GN green
BK black
BL blue
OR orange
WH white
Compact NS100 to 630
Motor mechanism
(automatic reset)
Automatic reset with MN
The diagram is shown with circuits de-energised,
all devices open, connected and charged and relays
in the normal position.
Following tripping due to an electrical fault, reset must
be carried out locally and manually.
D
B
1
1
2
4
2
6
(1) wires supplied, must be connected to ensure correct operation.
(2) the tripping order must lock out the closing order.
Automatic reset with MX
D
B
1
1
5
3
3
0

(1) wires supplied, must be connected to ensure correct operation.
(2) the tripping order must lock out the closing order.
Electrical diagrams

D-9
Automatic reset without auxiliary
Control via switch or relay
With MN/MX
Controlled by switch Controlled by relay
Without auxiliary
Controlled by switch Controlled by relay
D
B
1
1
5
3
3
1

(1) wires supplied, must be connected to ensure correct operation.
E
4
3
8
3
8
locked by
tripping
order
A
F
A B
O
MT
B A2
F
A4 B4
82 81
O
MT
B2
2 1
E
4
3
8
3
9
A2
F
A4 B4
locked by
tripping
order
82 81
O
MT
B2
E
4
3
8
4
0
A
F
A B
O
MT
B A2
F
A4 B4
82 81
O
MT
B2
2 1
E
4
3
8
4
1
A
F
A B
O
MT
B A2
F
A4 B4
82 81
O
MT
B2
Electrical diagrams

D-10
Compact NS100 to 630
Motor mechanism
(remote reset)
(1) wires supplied, must be connected to ensure correct
operation.
(2) connect SDE terminal 81 to auxiliary-connector terminal 84.
(3) the tripping order must lock out the closing order.
Symbols
Q Compact NS100 to 630
SDE fault indication contact
MN undervoltage release
MX shunt release
MT motor-mechanism module
F1 breaker for protection of motor-mechanism module
circuits and MN/MX
H2 lamp signalling motor mechanism in manual position
R reset order
(must be > 150 ms) orders
F closing order must not
O opening order be simultaneous
(must be > 150 ms,
has priority over F order)
Colour code for auxiliary wiring
RD red
GN green
BK black
BL blue
OR orange
WH white
The diagram is shown with circuits de-energised,
all devices open, connected and charged and relays
in the normal position.
Following tripping due to an electrical fault, reset must
be carried out locally and manually.
Remote reset with MN
D
B
1
1
2
4
2
8

Remote reset with MX
D
B
1
1
5
3
3
2

Electrical diagrams

D-11
(1) wires supplied, must be connected to ensure correct
operation.
(2) connect SDE terminal 81 to auxiliary-connector terminal 84.
Remote reset without auxiliary
D
B
1
1
5
3
3
3

Control via switch or relay
With MN/MX
Controlled by switch Controlled by relay
Without auxiliary
Controlled by switch Controlled by relay
E
4
3
9
1
4
locked by
tripping
order
A2
F
A4 B4
81
O
MT
B2
2 1
R
E
4
3
9
1
5
locked by
tripping
order
A2
F
A4 B4
81
O
MT
B2
R
A2
F
A4 B4
81
O
MT
B2
R
E
4
3
9
1
6
A2
F
A4 B4
81
O
MT
B2
2 1
R
A2
F
A4 B4
81
O
MT
B2
2 1
R
E
4
3
9
1
7
A2
F
A4 B4
81
O
MT
B2
R
A2
F
A4 B4
81
O
MT
B2
R
Electrical diagrams

D-12
Compact NS100 to 630
Motor mechanism
(local reset)
(1) (2) required to ensure correct indication of an electrical
fault.
Symbols
Q Compact NS100 to 630
SDE fault indication contact
MN undervoltage release
MX shunt release
MT motor-mechanism module
F1 breaker for protection of motor-mechanism module
circuits and MN/MX
H1 lamp signalling an electrical fault
H2 lamp signalling motor mechanism in manual position
F closing order orders
O opening order must not
(must be > 150 ms, be simultaneous
has priority over F order)
Colour code for auxiliary wiring
RD red
GN green
BK black
BL blue
OR orange
WH white
The diagram is shown with circuits de-energised,
all devices open, connected and charged and relays
in the normal position.
Following tripping due to an electrical fault, reset must
be carried out locally and manually.
Local reset with MN
D
B
1
1
2
4
3
1
Local reset with MX
D
B
1
1
2
4
3
2
Electrical diagrams

D-13
(1) (2) required to ensure correct indication of an electrical
fault.
Local reset without auxiliary
D
B
1
1
5
3
3
4

Control via switch or relay
With MN/MX
Controlled by switch Controlled by relay
E
4
3
8
4
4
locked by
tripping
order
A2
F
A4 B4
81
O
MT
B2
2 1
E
4
3
8
4
5
A2
F
A4 B4
locked by
tripping
order
81
O
MT
B2
Without auxiliary
Controlled by switch Controlled by relay
E
4
3
9
1
2
A2
F
A4 B4
81
O
MT
B2
2 1
A2
F
A4 B4
81
O
MT
B2
2 1
E
4
3
9
1
3
A2
F
A4 B4
81
O
MT
B2
Electrical diagrams

D-14
Compact NS100 to 630
Early-make contacts
Symbols
Q Compact NS
SD trip indication contact
MN undervoltage release
CAF early-make contact of rotary handle
XI terminal block for CAF wiring
(must be ordered)
Colour code for auxiliary wiring
RD red
GN green
BK black
BL blue
WH white
The diagram is shown with circuits de-energised,
all devices open, connected and charged and relays
in the normal position.
Following tripping due to an electrical fault, reset must
be carried out locally and manually.
With MN
D
B
1
1
2
4
0
9
(1) independent auxiliary source
Electrical diagrams

D-15
With MN + SD
D
B
1
1
2
4
1
0
(1) independent auxiliary source.
Electrical diagrams

D-16
Compact NS100 to 630
Motor protection
Trip unit STR22/43ME
Symbols
Q Compact NS100 to 630
F1 breaker for protection of the auxiliary circuit
SDTAM thermal-fault early-break signal
BP1 SDTAM reset button
KA1 auxiliary relay - Telemecanique
CA...DN31 or CA...DN22
H1 lamp signalling SDTAM fault
Colour code for auxiliary wiring
BL blue
WH white
The diagram is shown with circuits de-energised,
all devices open, connected and charged and relays
in the normal position.
Thermal-fault indication
D
B
1
1
2
4
3
4
Electrical diagrams

D-17
tr overload (long-time) protection tripping time
overload current greater than Ir (long-time tripping threshold)
IQ closing order for circuit breaker Q
Note.
For a short-circuit or earth fault, only circuit breaker Q opens.
The above automatic control sequence is not run.
Legend
b O: OFF (circuit open)
b I: ON (circuit closed)
b : either ON or OFF
Automatic operation
E
2
8
4
3
5
I
O
I
O
I
O
I
O
I
O
SDTAM
BP1
H1
Q
IQ
tr
300 ms
overload
Electrical diagrams

D-18
Compact NS100 to 630
Motor protection
Trip unit STR22/43ME
Symbols
Q Compact NS100 to 630
F1 breaker for protection of the auxiliary circuit
SDTAM thermal-fault early-break signal
BP1 SDTAM reset button
KA1 auxiliary relay - Telemecanique
CA...DN31 or CA...DN22
KA2 mechanical latching unit -
Telemecanique LA6 DK1
RHK bistable relay - Telemecanique
RHK-41
H1 lamp signalling SDTAM fault
KM1 power contactor
Colour code for auxiliary wiring
BL blue
WH white
The diagram is shown with circuits de-energised,
all devices open, connected and charged and relays
in the normal position.
Thermal-fault indication and tripping
D
B
1
1
2
4
3
6
(1) KM1 operating conditions must be inserted between 22 and A1.
Electrical diagrams

D-19
tr overload (long-time) protection tripping time
overload current greater than Ir (long-time tripping threshold)
Note.
For a short-circuit or earth fault, only circuit breaker Q opens.
The above automatic control sequence is not run.
Legend
b O: OFF (circuit open)
b I: ON (circuit closed)
b : either ON or OFF
Automatic operation
E
2
8
4
3
7
tr
overload
SDTAM
I
O
I
O
O
O
O
O
BP1
H1
KM1
Q
I
I
I
I
Same automatic system using a bistable relay
D
B
1
1
2
4
3
7
(1) KM1 operating conditions must be inserted between
12 and A1.
Electrical diagrams

D-20
Compact NS630b to 1600
Fixed circuit breakers
The diagram is shown with circuits de-energised,
all devices open, connected and charged and relays
in the normal position.
A : digital ammeter.
P : A + power meter + additional protection.
Power Control unit Remote operation
D
B
1
1
4
7
3
6

E
5
9
0
4
1
2
D
1
D
AT
MN
4
A
BPO
2
A
BPF
1
A
4
B
MX
2
C
1
C
or
motor mechanism
module
Basic A P Control unit Remote operation
b b b E1-E6 communication
b b Z1-Z5 zone selective interlocking:
Z1 =ZSI OUT SOURCE
Z2 =ZSI OUT ; Z3 =ZSI IN SOURCE
Z4 =ZSI IN ST (short time)
Z5 =ZSI IN GF (earth fault)
b b M1 = Vigi module input
(Micrologic 7)
b b T1, T2, T3, T4 =external neutral;
b M2, M3 = Vigi module input
(Micrologic 7)
b b F2+, F1 external 24 V DC
power supply
b VN external voltage connector
(must be connected to the neutral
with a 3P circuit breaker)
b M6C : 6 programmable contacts (to
be connected to the external module
M6C) ext. 24 V DC power supply
required
MN : undervoltage release
or
MX : shunt release
Motor-mechanism module
(*)
A4 : electrical opening order
A2 : electrical closing order
B4, A1 : power supply for control devices and gear motor
(*) Spring-charging motor 440/480 V AC
(380 V motor +additional resistor)
E
5
9
0
3
9
A
A1
CN2 - 440/480 V
9 11
B4
R
A2 A4
CN1 - 440/480 V
motor mechanism
module
Electrical diagrams

D-21
OF3 / OF2 / OF1 : indication contacts
SDE : fault-trip indication contact
(short-circuit, overload, earth fault)
SD : trip indication contact
(manual operation)
CAF2/CAF1 * : early-make contact
(rotary handle)
CAO2 / CAO1 : early-break contact
(rotary handle)
* CAF2 option is not compatible with M6C option.
Indication contacts Terminal-block marking (manual operation)
D
B
1
1
0
9
0
0

E
5
9
0
4
3
E6E5E4E3E2E1
Z1 Z2 Z3 Z4 Z5
M1M2M3
T1 T2 T3
F1
T4
F2
MN/MX
D2/C2
D1/C1
CAO2 CAO1 CAF2 CAF1
524
522
521
514
512
511
544
542
541
534
532
531
84
SDE
82
81
OF1
11 12 14
OF2
21 22 24
OF3
31 32 34
SD
91 92 94
e
u
l
b
e
t
i
h
w
w
o
l
l
e
y
n
w
o
r
b
k
c
a
l
b
d
e
r
Indication contacts Terminal-block marking (electrical operation)
E
5
9
0
4
4
E6E5E4E3E2E1
MN/MX
D2/C2
D1/C1
Z1 Z2 Z3 Z4 Z5
M1M2M3
T1 T2 T3
F1
T4
F2
A1 A2 A4 B4
SDE OF3 OF2 OF1
81
82
84
31
32
34
21
22
24
11
12
14
e
u
l
b
e
t
i
h
w
w
o
l
l
e
y
n
w
o
r
b
k
c
a
l
b
d
e
r
Electrical diagrams

D-22
Compact NS630b to 1600
Plug-in / withdrawable circuit breakers
MN / MX MT2 MT1

D2 C2 A4 A2

B4

D1 C1 A1
The diagram is shown with circuits de-energised,
all devices open, connected and charged and relays
in the normal position.
A : digital ammeter.
P : A + power meter + additional protection.
Com UC1 UC2 UC3 M6C / CAF2
E5 E6 Z5 M1 M2 M3 F2+ Q3 544

E3 E4 Z3 Z4 T3 T4 VN Q2 542

E1 E2 Z1 Z2 T1 T2 F1 Q1 541
Power Control unit Remote operation
Basic A P Control unit Remote operation
b b b Com: E1-E6 communication
b b UC1: Z1-Z5 zone selective interlocking:
Z1 =ZSI OUT SOURCE
Z2 =ZSI OUT; Z3 ZSI IN SOURCE
Z4 =ZSI IN ST (short time)
Z5 =ZSI IN GF (earth fault)
b b M1 = Vigi module input
(Micrologic 7)
b b
b
UC2: T1, T2, T3, T4 =external neutral;
M2, M3 = Vigi module input
(Micrologic 7)
b b
b
UC3: F2+, F1- external 24 V DC
power supply
VN external voltage connector
(must be connected to the neutral
with a 3P circuit breaker)
b M6C: 6 programmable contacts (to be
connected to the external module
M6C) ext. 24 V DC power supply
required
Control unit Remote operation
Terminal-block marking
MN : undervoltage release
or
MX : shunt release
Motor-mechanism module
(*)
MT2 : A4 : electrical opening order
MT1 : A2 : electrical closing order
B4, A1 : power supply for control devices
and gear motor (MCH)
(*) Spring-charging motor 440/480 V AC
(380 V motor +additional resistor)
E
5
9
0
3
9
A1
CN2 - 440/480 V
9 11
B4
R
A2 A4
CN1 - 440/480 V
motor-mechanism
module
D
B
1
1
2
3
9
0
24 V DC
E
5
9
0
3
7
B
or
2
D
1
D
AT
MN
4
A
BPO
2
A
BPF
1
A
4
B
MX
2
C
1
C
motor-mechanism
module
Electrical diagrams

D-23
M6C / CAF2 CAF1 SDE SD CAO2 CAO1 OF3 OF2 OF1
Q3 544 534 84 94 524 514 34 24 14
Q2 542 532 82 92 522 512 32 22 12
Q1 541 531 81 91 521 511 31 21 11
OF3 / OF2 / OF1 : indication contacts
SDE : fault-trip indication contact
(short-circuit, overload, earth fault)
SD : trip indication contact
(manual operation)
CAF2/CAF1 * : early-make contact
(rotary handle)
CAO2 / CAO1 : early-break contact
(rotary handle)
CD2 : disconnected
CD1 position
CT1 : test
position
CE3 : connected
CE2 position
CE1
Legend
Connected
(only one wire per connection point).
CD2 CD1 CE3 CE2 CE1 CT1

824 814 334 324 314 914

822 812 332 322 312 912

821 811 331 321 311 911
* CAF2 option is not compatible with M6C option.
Indication contacts Carriage switches
D
B
1
1
0
9
0
2
E
4
7
0
7
5
A
2
2
8
4
2
8
1
2
8
2
1
8
4
1
8
1
1
8
CD2 CD1
disconnected
E
4
6
1
3
4
A
1
3
3
2
3
3
4
3
3
CE3
1
2
3
2
2
3
4
2
3
CE2
1
1
3
2
1
3
4
1
3
CE1
connected
E
4
7
0
7
4
A
4
1
9
2
1
9
1
1
9
CT1
Test
Indication contacts Carriage switches
Indication contacts Carriage switches
Electrical diagrams

D-24
Compact NS630b to 3200
Connection of the 24 V DC
External power supply AD module
None of the control-unit protection functions require an auxiliary source. However,
the 24 V DC external power supply (AD module) is required for certain operating
confgurations as indicated in the table below.
Circuit breaker Closed Open
Protection function No No
Display function No
(1)
Yes
Circuit breaker status indications and control
communications bus
No No
Identifcation, settings, operation and maintenance
aids via communication bus
No
(1)
Yes
(1) Except if current < 20 % In.
The maximum cable length between 24 V DC external supply (G1, G2) and the
Micrologic control unit (F1-, F2+) is 10 m.
The BAT battery module, mounted in series upstream of the AD module, ensures
an uninterrupted supply of power if the AD module power supply fails.
D
B
1
1
4
6
5
0
Electrical diagrams

D-25
Wiring diagrams
The maximum length for each conductor supplying power to the trip unit or M6C
module is 10 m.
Do not ground F2+, F1-, or power supply output:
the positive terminal (F2+) on the trip unit must not be connected to earth ground
the negative terminal (F1-) on the trip unit must not be connected to earth ground
the output terminals (- and +) of the 24 V DC power supply must not be grounded.
Reduce electromagnetic interference:
the input and output wires of the 24 V DC power supply must be physically
separated as much as possible
if the 24 V DC power supply wires cross power cables, they must cross
perpendicularly. If this is not physically possible, the power supply conductors must
be twisted together
Power supply conductors must be cut to length. Do not loop excess conductor.
Use only one 24 V DC power supply for each Micrologic trip unit.
Connect external 24 V DC power supply only per the following wiring
diagrams.
b
b
b
b
b
b
D
B
1
1
4
6
5
3
Power supply wiring for Micrologic
trip unit only.
D
B
1
1
4
5
2
3
0
Power supply wiring for Micrologic
trip unit and M6C module.
Connection
Electrical diagrams

D-26
Compact NS630b to 3200
Communications option
24 V DC external power supply
(1) Drawout device equipped with Com chassis modbus.
(2) Fixed device or draw-out device without Com chassis
Digipact.
The communications bus requires its own 24 V DC power source (E1, E2).
This source is not the same as the 24 V DC external power-supply module (F1-, F2+).
Examples of connection of the communications option
D
B
1
1
2
3
9
2
Electrical diagrams

D-27
Switchboard display unit
This architecture provides remote display of the
variables managed by Micrologic control units
equipped with the COM Modbus module.
I (Micrologic A)
I, U, P, S (Micrologic P)
No programming is required.
For Micrologic A control unit (if current < 20 % In), it is
recommended to use the 24 V DC external power
supply (AD module).
b
b
Communicating switchboard
This confguration provides remote display and control
of Compact equipped with the Modbus or Digipact
COM module. The Digipact bus can be combined with
the Modbus bus.
Examples using the COM communications option
D
B
1
0
0
6
4
6

D
B
1
1
4
6
5
6
Electrical diagrams

D-28
Compact NS630b to 3200
Earth-fault and earth-leakage protection
Neutral protection
Zone selective interlocking
Connection of the secondary circuit
Compact equipped with a Micrologic 6 A:
unshielded cable with 1 twisted pair
maximum length 150 metres
cable cross-sectional area 0.4 to 1.5 mm
2
recommended cable: Belden 9409 or equivalent.
b
b
b
b
Connection of current-transformer secondary
circuit for external neutral
Compact equipped with a Micrologic 6 A:
shielded cable with 2 twisted pairs
T1 twisted with T2
T3 twisted with T4
shielding connected to GND on one end only
maximum length 10 meters
cable cross-sectional area 0.4 to 1.5 mm
2
recommended cable: Belden 9552 or equivalent.
If supply is via the top, follow the diagram.
If supply is via the bottom, control wiring is identical; for
the power wiring, H1 is connected to the source side,
H2 to the load side.
The connection of the VN signal is necessary only for
power measurements.
For four-pole versions, for residual earth-fault
protection, the current transformer for the external
neutral is not necessary.
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
External sensor (CT) for residual earth-fault protection
E
5
9
3
0
5
3
T
2
T
1
T
Micrologic 6
4
Z
3
Z
2
Z
1
Z
N L3 L2 L1
5
Z
2
M
1
M
+
2
F
1
F
I
Q
H2
H1
VC VN GND T4 T3 T1 T2
N
V
1
V
2
V
3
V
3
M
U
External transformer for source ground return (SGR) earth-fault protection
D
B
1
1
2
3
9
3
Electrical diagrams

D-29
Connection of the rectangular-sensor secondary
circuit
Compact equipped with a Micrologic 7 A/P:
use the cable shipped with the rectangular sensor.
Note. The maximum permissible distance between two
devices is 3000 metres and the maximum number of devices is
100.
three pole circuit breaker:
neutral protection is impossible with Micrologic A
with Micrologic P, an external neutral transformer is
necessary; the connection diagram is the same as for
residual earth-fault protection.
four pole circuit breaker:
Compact equipped with Micrologic A
the current transformer for external neutral is not
necessary.
b
v
v
b
v
v
Zone-selective interlocking is used to reduce the
electrodynamic forces exerted on the installation by shortening
the time required to clear faults, while maintaining time
discrimination between the various devices.
A pilot wire interconnects a number of circuit breakers
equipped with Micrologic A/P/H control units, as illustrated in
the diagram above.
The control unit detecting a fault sends a signal upstream and
checks for a signal arriving from downstream. If there is a
signal from downstream, the circuit breaker remains closed for
the full duration of its tripping delay. If there is no signal from
downstream, the circuit breaker opens immediately, regardless
of the tripping-delay setting.
Fault 1.
Only circuit breaker A detects the fault. Because it receives no
signal from downstream, it immediately opens in spite of its
tripping delay set to 0.3.
Fault 2.
Circuit breakers A and B detect the fault. Circuit breaker A
receives a signal from B and remains closed for the full duration
of its tripping delay set to 0.3. Circuit breaker B does not receive
a signal from downstream and opens immediately, in spite of its
tripping delay set to 0.2.
Earth-leakage protection
E
5
9
3
0
7
A
3
T
2
T
1
T
/
3
M
Micrologic 7
4
Z
3
Z
2
Z
1
Z
5
Z
2
M
1
M
+
2
F
I
Q
N L3 L2 L1
M1
M2
M3
U
4
T
/
1
F
Neutral protection
Zone selective interlocking
D
B
1
1
5
3
3
5
Electrical diagrams

D-30
Compact NS1600b to 3200
Fixed circuit breakers
The diagram is shown with circuits de-energised,
all devices open, connected and charged and relays
in the normal position.
MN : undervoltage release
or
MX : shunt release
: basic Micrologic control unit.
A: digital ammeter.
Power Control unit Remote operation
E
5
9
0
4
0
3
T
2
T
Micrologic
4
Z
3
Z
2
Z
1
Z
2
Z
1
Z
N L3 L2 L1
Q
5
Z
2
M
1
M
+
2
F
I
24 V DC
3
Z
4
Z
5
Z
2
Z
1
Z
3
Z
4
Z
5
Z
3
M
/
1
T
1
F
/
4
T
power
upstream cb downstream cb
E
5
9
4
6
3
A
2
D
1
D
AT
MN MX
2
C
1
C
or
(basic) A Control unit Remote operation
b b E1-E6 communication
b Z1-Z5 zone selective interlocking:
Z1 =ZSI OUT SOURCE
Z2 =ZSI OUT ; Z3 =ZSI IN SOURCE
Z4 =ZSI IN ST (short time)
Z5 =ZSI IN GF (earth fault)
M1 = Vigi module input (Micrologic 7)
b T1, T2, T3, T4 =external neutral;
M2, M3 = Vigi module input
(Micrologic 7)
b F2+, F1- external 24 V DC power
supply
Electrical diagrams

D-31
OF3 / OF2 / OF1 : ON / OFF indication contacts
SDE : fault-trip indication contact
(short-circuit, overload, earth fault)
SD : trip indication contact
Indication contacts Terminal-block marking
E
5
9
4
6
4
A
1
9
2
9
4
9
SD
1
8
2
8
4
8
SDE
1
2
OF3
2
3
4
3
1
3
OF2 OF1
2
2
4
2
2
1
4
1
1
1
fault closed open fault
E
5
9
4
6
5
A
E6E5E4E3E2E1
MN/MX
D2/C2
D1/C1
OF1
11 12 14
OF2
21 22 24
OF3
31 32 34
SD
91 92 94
84
SDE
82
81
Z1 Z2 Z3 Z4 Z5
M1M2M3
T1 T2 T3
F1
T4
F2
Indication contacts
Electrical diagrams

D-32
Compact NS100 to 630
Communication option
24 V external power supply
TCU module and Power Meter PM700 or PM800 OF/SDE status indication with Modbus OTB
D
B
1
0
5
0
7
2
D
B
1
0
5
0
7
3

OF/SDE status aquisition and Compact remote tripping
D
B
1
1
7
6
0
5
Compact NS
OTB
Compact NS PM700 PM800 OTB
I
PM800
PM8M26 PM750
Electrical diagrams

D-33
PM750 inputs states
PM800 with PM8M26 module
PM750 input states and output control
Reading S1 and S2 input states
the state of these contacts is read from Modbus register 4115 and 4116.
a register has a value of 0 when a zero volt signal is applied to the input and a
value of 1 when a 24 V DC signal is applied to the input.
Controlling outputs:
Output is controlled by writing to Modbus register 4126
writing a value to Modbus register 3321 closes the contact
writing a value to Modbus register 3320 opens the contact.
PM800 with PM8M26 input/output option - input states
and output control
Reading IN 1 and IN 2 input states
the state of input IN 1 is read from Modbus register 4445
the state of input IN 2 is read from Modbus register 4475.
Warning: when preparing the Modbus frame to be sent to the PM800 to read the content of
these registers, remember to subtract 1 from the register number: for instance to read the
content of register 4445, you must send a Modbus function 3 specifying the starting register
4445 1 = 4444.
Bits have a value of 0 when a zero volt signal is applied to the input and a value of 1
when a 24 V DC volt signal is applied to the input.
Controlling of outputs OUT 1 and OUT 2
to close the OUT 1 contact:
write a value of 3310 to Modbus register 8000 and a value of 3 to Modbus register
8001, then write to Modbus register 8000 a value of 3321 and to Modbus register
8001 a value of 3.
to open the OUT 1 contact:
write a value of 3320 to Modbus register 8000 and a value of 3 to Modbus register
8001.
to close the OUT 2 contact:
write a value of 3310 to Modbus register 8000 and a value of 4 to Modbus register
8001, then write a value of 3321 to Modbus register 8000 and a value of 4 to Modbus
register 8001.
to open the OUT 2 contact:
write a value of 3320 to Modbus register 8000 and a value of 4 to Modbus register
8001.
Warning: remember to subtract 1 from the register number when preparing the Modbus frame.
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
v
b
v
b
v
b
v
Technical information: how to read and write data from/
to PM750 and PM800 I/O modules.
Electrical diagrams

D-34
Advantys OTB1SODM9LP inputs
Confguring the Advantys OTB
Modbus address ranges from @001 to @0127.
Communication speed:
Position Baud rate
0 19200
1 1200
2 2400
3 4800
4 9600
5 19200
6 38400
Identifying which expansion modules are connected to the basic
Advantys OTB
In order to avoid reading non-existing inputs, it is necessary to know the
confguration of the installed Advantys OTB. To determine if any TWDDD132DK 32-
input expansion modules are connected to the Advantys OTB, it is necessary
to read Modbus registers 1103 and 1104.
Warning: when preparing the Modbus frame to be sent to the Advantys OTB to read the content
of the registers, remember to subtract 1 from the register number: for instance to read the
content of register 1103, you must send a Modbus function 3 specifying the starting register
1103 1 = 1102).
if the content of register 1103 is NOT equal to 0x0200 and that of register 1104
NOT equal to 0x0200, then no TWDDD132DK 32-input expansion module
are connected to the Advantys OTB. Thus only 12 inputs are available
if the content of register 1103 is equal to 0x0200 and that of register 1104
NOT equal to 0x0200, then one TWDDD132DK 32-input expansion module
is connected to the Advantys OTB. Thus 12 +32 inputs are available
if the content of register 1103 is equal to 0x0200 and that of register 1104
equal to 0x0200, then two TWDDD132DK 32-input expansion modules
are connected to the Advantys OTB. Thus 12 +32 +32 inputs are available.
Reading input states
the states of the 12 inputs of the Advantys OTB are read from Modbus
register 1
(1)
. The result is a bitmap.
bit 0 gives the state of Input 1
bit 1 gives the state of Input 2

bit 11 gives the state of Input 12.

the states of the 32 inputs of the frst TWDDDI32DK 32-input expansion module
are read from Modbus registers 2 and 3
(1)
.
The result is two 16-bit bitmaps.
bit 0 of bitmap 1 (Modbus register 2) gives the state of Input 1
bit 1 of bitmap 1 (Modbus register 2) gives the state of Input 2

bit 15 of bitmap 1 (Modbus register 2) gives the state of Input 16

bit 0 of bitmap 2 (Modbus register 3) gives the state of Input 17
bit 1 of bitmap 2 (Modbus register 3) gives the state of Input 18

bit 15 of bitmap 2 (Modbus register 3) gives the state of Input 32.

the states of the 32 inputs of the second TWDDDI32DK 32-input expansion
module are read from Modbus registers 4 and 5
(1)
.
The result is two 16-bit bitmaps.
bit 0 of bitmap 1 (Modbus register 4) gives the state of Input 1
bit 1 of bitmap 1 (Modbus register 4) gives the state of Input 2

bit 15 of bitmap 1 (Modbus register 4) gives the state of Input 16

bit 0 of bitmap 2 (Modbus register 5) gives the state of Input 17
bit 1 of bitmap 2 (Modbus register 5) gives the state of Input 18

bit 15 of bitmap 2 (Modbus register 5) gives the state of Input 32.

bits have a value of 0 when a zero volt signal is applied to the input and a value of
1 when a 24 DC volt signal is applied to the input.
(1) Warning: when preparing the Modbus frame to be sent to the Advantys OTB to read the
content of the registers, remember to subtract 1 from the register numbers: for instance to read
the content of register 1, you must send a Modbus function 3 specifying the starting
register 1 1 = 0.
b
b
b
b
v
v
v
b
v
v
v
v
v
v
b
v
v
v
v
v
v
b
Telemecanique Advantys
module OTB1SODM9LP
Technical information on how to read and write data
from/to Advantys OTB.
D
B
1
0
5
2
9
9

Parity is always set to EVEN.
Electrical diagrams


This international site allows you
to access all the Schneider Electric
products in just 2 clicks
via comprehensive range data-
sheets, with direct links to:
complete library: technical
documents, catalogs, FAQs,
brochures
selection guides from
the e-catalog.
product discovery sites and
their Flash animations.
You will also nd illustrated
overviews, news to which you
can subscribe, the list of country
contacts
p
p
p
These technical guides help you
comply with installation standards
and rules i.e.: the electrical
installation guide, the protection
guide, the switchboard
implementation guide,
the technical booklets
and the co-ordination tables all form
genuine reference tools
for the design of high performance
electrical installations.
For example, the LV protection
co-ordination guide - discrimination
and cascading - optimises choice
of protection and connection
devices while also increasing
markedly continuity of supply
in the installations.
schneider-electric.com The technical guide
TOOLS

E-1
Presentation 2
Functions and characteristics A-1
Installation recommendations B-1
Dimensions and connection C-1
Electrical diagrams D-1
Tripping curves E-2
Compact NSC100 and NS80H-MA E-2
Compact NSA160 E-3
Compact NS100 to 250 Protection of distribution systems E-4
Compact NS100 to 250 Motor-starter protection E-7
Compact NS400 to 630 Protection of distribution systems E-8
Compact NS400 to 630 Motor-starter protection E-9
Compact NS630b to 3200 E-10
Refex tripping E-11
Current-limiting curves E-12
Catalogue numbers and order forms F-1
Compact NS
Additional characteristics
Contents

E-2
Additional characteristics
Tripping curves
Compact NSC100 and NS80H-MA
1640 A 5080 A
D
B
1
1
5
2
4
0

100 A
D
B
1
1
5
2
4
2

D
B
1
1
5
2
4
1

MA1.5...MA80
D
B
1
1
5
2
4
3

E-3
Compact NSA160
D
B
1
1
5
2
4
4

5080 A 1640 A
100 A 125...160 A
D
B
1
1
5
2
4
6

D
B
1
1
5
2
4
5

D
B
1
1
5
2
4
7

E-4
Tripping curves
Compact NS100 to 250
Protection of distribution systems
TM magnetic trip units
Additional characteristics
D
B
1
1
5
2
6
7

TM25D / TM25G TM16D / TM16G
TM32D / TM40D / TM40G TM50D / TM63D / TM63G
D
B
1
1
5
2
6
9

D
B
1
1
5
2
6
8

D
B
1
1
5
2
7
0

E-5
TM magnetic trip units (cont.)
D
B
1
1
5
2
7
1

TM125D / TM160D TM80D / TM100D
TM200D / TM250D
D
B
1
1
5
2
7
3

D
B
1
1
5
2
7
2

E-6
STR22SE and STR22GE electronic trip units
Tripping curves
Compact NS100 to 250
Protection of distribution systems (cont.)
Additional characteristics
D
B
1
1
5
2
7
4

STR22SE - 160250 A STR22SE - 40100 A
STR22GE - 40100 A STR22GE - 160250 A
D
B
1
1
5
2
7
6

D
B
1
1
5
2
7
5

D
B
1
1
5
2
7
7

E-7
Compact NS100 to 250
Motor-starter protection
MA magnetic trip units
STR22ME electronic trip units
D
B
1
1
5
2
7
8

MA150 and MA220 MA2,5MA100
STR22ME - 10220 A
D
B
1
1
5
2
8
0

D
B
1
1
5
2
7
9

E-8
Tripping curves
Compact NS400 to 630
Protection of distribution systems
Earth-fault protection
STR23 and STR53 electronic trip units
Additional characteristics
D
B
1
1
5
2
8
1

STR53UE / STR53SV STR23SE / STR23SV
Options for STR53UE
D
B
1
1
5
2
8
3

D
B
1
1
5
2
8
2

E-9
Compact NS400 to 630
Motor-starter protection
MA magnetic and STR43ME electronic trip units
Thermal-withstand capacities are given for circuit
breakers operating in an ambient temperature of 65 C.
D
B
1
1
5
2
8
4

STR43ME - 120 to 500 A - class 10 A MA320MA500
STR43ME - 120 to 500 A - class 10 STR43ME - 120 to 500 A - class 20
D
B
1
1
5
2
8
6

D
B
1
1
5
2
8
5

D
B
1
1
5
2
8
7

E-10
Tripping curves
Compact NS630b to 3200
Micrologic electronic control units
Options for Micrologic electronic control units
(1)
Ig = In x A B C D E F G H J
Ig <400 A 0 3 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1
400 A y Ig y 1200 A
0 2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1
Ig >1200 A 500 640 720 800 880 960 1040 1120 1200
Additional characteristics
D
B
1
1
5
2
3
9

Micrologic 5.0, 6.0, 7.0 Micrologic 2.0
Earth-fault protection (Micrologic 6.0)
D
B
1
1
5
2
8
9

D
B
1
1
5
2
8
8

E-11
Reex tripping
Compact NS100 to 630 devices incorporate the
exclusive refex-tripping system.
This system breaks very high fault currents by
mechanically tripping the device via a "piston" actuated
directly by the pressure produced in the breaking units
resulting from a short-circuit.
For high short-circuits, this system provides a faster
break and a trip guarantee, as well as natural total
discrimination.
Refex-tripping curves are exclusively a function of the
circuit-breaker rating.

D
B
1
1
5
2
9
0

E-12
Current-limiting curves
Ics = 100 % Icu
The exceptional limiting capacity of the Compact NS range greatly reduces the
forces created by fault currents in devices.
The result is a major increase in breaking performance. In particular, the service
breaking capacity Ics is equal to 100% of Icu.
The Ics value, defned by IEC standard 60947-2, is guaranteed by tests comprising
the following operations:
break three times consecutively a fault current equal to 100 % of Icu
check that the device continues to function normally:
it conducts the rated current without abnormal temperature rise
protection functions perform within the limits specifed by the standard
suitability for isolation is not impaired.
Longer service life of electrical installations
Current-limiting circuit breakers greatly reduce the negative effects of short-circuits
on installations.
Thermal effects
Less temperature rise in conductors, therefore longer service life for cables.
Mechanical effects
Reduced electrodynamic forces, therefore less risk of electrical contacts or bus bars
being deformed or broken.
Electromagnetic effects
Less disturbances for measuring devices located near electrical circuits.
Economy by means of cascading
Cascading is a technique directly derived from current limiting. Circuit breakers with
breaking capacities less than the prospective short-circuit current may be installed
downstream of a limiting circuit breaker. The breaking capacity is reinforced by the
limiting capacity of the upstream device.
It follows that substantial savings can be made on downstream equipment and
enclosures.
Current-limiting curves
The current-limiting capacity of a circuit breaker is expressed by two curves which
are a function of the prospective short-circuit current (the current which would fow if
no protection devices were installed):
the actual peak current (limited current),
thermal stress (A
2
s), i.e. the energy dissipated by the short-circuit in a conductor
with a resistance of 1 .
Example
What is the real value of a 150 kA rms prospective short-circuit (i.e. 330 kA peak)
limited by an NS250L upstream ?
Answer: 30 kA peak (see next page).
Maximum permissible cable stresses
The table below indicates the maximum permiss ble thermal stresses for cables
depending on their insulation, conductor (Cu or Al) and their cross-sectional area
(CSA). CSA values are given in mm
2
and thermal stresses in A
2
s.
Example
Is a Cu/PVC cable with a CSA of 10 mm
2
adequately protected by an NS160N?
The table above indicates that the permissible stress is 1.32x10
6
A
2
s.
All short-circuit currents at the point where an NS160N (Icu =35 kA) is installed are
limited with a thermal stress less than 6 x 10
5
A
2
s (see next page).
Cable protection is therefore ensured up to the limit of the breaking capacity of the
circuit breaker.
b
b
v
v
v
b
b
The limiting capacity of a circuit breaker is its aptitude
to limit short-circuit currents.
The exceptional limiting capacity of the Compact NS range is
due to the rotating double-break technique (very rapid natural
repulsion of contacts and the appearance of two arc voltages
in-series with a very steep wave front).
Additional characteristics
E
2
8
8
0
0
t tc
Isc
prospective
Isc
prospective
Isc peak
prospective
current
limited Isc
peak
actual
current
limited
Isc
CSA (mm
2
) 1.5 2.5 4 6 10
PVC Cu 2.97 x 10
4
8.26 x 10
4
2.12 x 10
5
4.76 x 10
5
1.32 x 10
6
Al 5.41 x 10
5
PRC Cu 4.10 x 10
4
1.39 x 10
5
2 92 x 10
5
6.56 x 10
5
1.82 x 10
6
Al 7.52 x 10
5
CSA (mm
2
) 16 25 35 50
PVC Cu 3.4 x 10
6
8.26 x 10
6
1.62 x 10
7
3.31 x 10
7
Al 1.39 x 10
6
3.38 x 10
6
6.64 x 10
6
1.35 x 10
7
PRC Cu 4.69 x 10
6
1.39 x 10
7
2 23 x 10
7
4.56 x 10
7
Al 1.93 x 10
6
4.70 x 10
6
9 23 x 10
6
1.88 x 10
7

E-13
Limited short-circuit current (k peak)
Current-limiting curves
Circuit breaker Thermal Contactor
NS80H-MA relay
Cal. 80 A LRD-33 63 63/80 LC1-D80
Cal. 80 A LRD-33 59 48/65 LC1-D65
Cal. 50 A LRD-33 57 37/50 LC1-D65
Cal. 50 A LRD-33 55 30/40 LC1-D65
Cal. 50 A LRD-33 53 23/32 LC1-D65
Cal. 25 A LRD-33 22 17/25 LC1-D65
Cal. 25 A LRD-13 21 12/18 LC1-D65
Cal. 12.5 A LRD-13 16 09/13 LC1-D65
Cal. 12.5 A LRD-13 14 07/10 LC1-D65
Cal. 12.5 A LRD-13 12 5.5/08 LC1-D32
Cal. 6.3 A LRD-13 10 04/06 LC1-D65
Cal. 6.3 A LRD-13 08 2.5/04 LC1-D65
Cal. 2.5 A LRD-13 07 1.6/2.5 LC1-D65
Cal. 2.5 A LRD-13 06 01/1.6 LC1-D09
Circuit breaker Thermal Contactor
NS80H-MA relay
Cal. 80 A LRD-33 63 63/80 LC1-D80
Cal. 80 A LRD-33 59 48/65 LC1-D65
Cal. 50 A LRD-33 57 37/50 LC1-D65
Cal. 50 A LRD-33 55 30/40 LC1-D65
Cal. 50 A LRD-33 53 23/32 LC1-D65
Cal. 25 A LRD-33 22 17/25 LC1-D65
Cal. 25 A LRD-13 21 12/18 LC1-D65
Cal. 12.5 A LRD-13 16 09/13 LC1-D65
Cal. 12.5 A LRD-13 14 07/10 LC1-D65
Cal. 12.5 A LRD-13 12 5.5/08 LC1-D32
Cal. 6.3 A LRD-13 10 04/06 LC1-D65
Cal. 6.3 A LRD-13 08 2.5/04 LC1-D65
Cal. 2.5 A LRD-13 07 1.6/2.5 LC1-D65
Cal. 2.5 A LRD-13 06 01/1.6 LC1-D09
(1) Valid for 480 V Nema.
Voltage 400/440 V AC
(1)
Limited energy
Thermal-stress curves
Voltage 400/440 V AC
(1)

D
B
1
1
5
2
9
1
Rated short-circuit current (kA rms)

D
B
1
1
5
2
9
2
Rated short-circuit current (kA rms)

E-14
(1) Valid for 480 V Nema.
Current-limiting curves
Additional characteristics
Limited short-circuit current (k peak)
Current-limiting curves
Voltage 660/690 V AC
D
B
1
1
5
2
9
4
Rated short-circuit current (kA rms)
Limited energy
Thermal-stress curves
Voltage 660/690 V AC
D
B
1
1
5
2
9
6
Rated short-circuit current (kA rms)
Limited short-circuit current (k peak)
Voltage 400/440 V AC
(1)
D
B
1
1
5
2
9
3
Rated short-circuit current (kA rms)
Limited energy
Voltage 400/440 V AC
(1)
D
B
1
1
5
2
9
5
Rated short-circuit current (kA rms)


schneider-electric.com CAD software and tools
This international site allows you
to access all the Schneider Electric
products in just 2 clicks
via comprehensive range data-
sheets, with direct links to:
complete library: technical
documents, catalogs, FAQs,
brochures
selection guides from
the e-catalog.
product discovery sites and
their Flash animations.
You will also nd illustrated
overviews, news to which you
can subscribe, the list of country
contacts
p
p
p
The CAD software and tools
enhance productivity
and safety. They help you create
your installations by simplifying
product choice through easy
browsing in the Schneider Electric
offers.
Last but not least, they optimise use
of our products while also complying
with standards and proper
procedures.
TOOLS

F-1
Catalogue numbers
and order forms
Contents
Compact NS
Presentation 2
Functions and characteristics A-1
Installation recommendations B-1
Dimensions and connection C-1
Electrical diagrams D-1
Additional characteristics E-1
NS80H-MA F-2
Complete device F-2
Accessories F-3
NSC100N F-4
Complete device F-4
Accessories F-5
NS100/160/250N/H 1P/2P F-6
Complete fxed/FC device F-6
Accessories F-7
NS100/160/250N: complete fxed/FC device F-8
Compact NS100/160/250N and NA F-8
Vigicompact NS100/160/250N F-9
NS100/160/250SX: complete fxed/FC device F-10
NS100/160/250H: complete fxed/FC device F-11
NS100/160/250L: complete fxed/FC device F-12
NS100/160/250: fxed/FC device based on separate
components F-13
Compact and Vigicompact F-13
Installation and connection F-15
Compact and Vigicompact NS100/160/250 F-15
Accessories F-16
Compact NS100/160/250 F-16
NS400/630: complete fxed/FC device F-21
Compact NS400/630 F-21
Switch-disconnector, Vigicompactand Compact 1000 V F-22
NS400/630: fxed/FC device based
on separate components F-23
Installation and connection F-24
Compact and Vigicompact NS400/630 F-24
Accessories F-26
Compact NS400/630 F-26
Compact NS100 to NS630 fxed/FC for direct current F-31
Choice of device F-31
Parallel or series connection accessories F-32
Connection accessories F-33
Electrical auxiliaries F-34
Monitoring and locking F-35
Interlocking, installation, plug-in/withdrawable accessories F-36
Source-changeover systems for 2 devices D-37
Compact NS100 to NS630 D-37
NSA125/160: complete fxed/FC device F-39
NSA160N/E and NSA125/160NA F-39
Accessories F-40
NSA160N/E and NSA125/160NA F-40
Order forms F-41

F-2
Catalogue numbers
NS80H-MA
Complete device
Compact NS80H-MA with built-in trip unit MA
E
1
8
6
0
5
t
Compact NS80H-MA (70 kA at 380-415 V)
Rating 3P 3d
MA1.5 28106
MA2.5 28105
MA6.3 28104
MA12.5 28103
MA25 28102
MA50 28101
MA80 28100

F-3
NS80H-MA (cont.)
Accessories
Connection accessories
Long terminal shields (1 pair)
E
1
8
6
0
7
3P 28034
Electrical auxiliaries
Auxiliary switch (changeover)
E
1
8
6
0
8
OF or SD 29450
OF or SD low level 29452
Voltage releases
E
2
1
3
9
4
AC Voltage MX MN
24 V 50/60 Hz 28079
42 V 50/60 Hz 28069
48 V 50/60 Hz 28070 28080
110-130 V 50/60 Hz 28071 28081
208 V 60 Hz 28067 28089
220-240 V 50/60 Hz 28072 28082
277 V 60 Hz 28068 28090
380-415 V 50 Hz 28073 28083
440-480 V 50/60 Hz 28074 28084
DC Voltage MX MN
24 V 28075 28085
48 V 28076 28086
110-125 V 28077 28087
250 V 28078 28088
MN 220-240 V 50/60 Hz with time delay 29421
Composed of: MN 250 V DC 28088
Delay unit 220-240 V 50/60 Hz 29427
Rotary handles
Direct rotary handle
E
5
8
5
8
0
O
I
FF
Standard black handle 28050
Red handle on yellow front 28051
MCC conversion accessory 28054
Extended rotary handle
E
5
8
5
8
1
ON
I
O
O F ON
I
OFF
Standard extended rotary handle 28052
Red handle on yellow front 28053
Indication auxiliary
E
4
4
4
5
0
2 early make contacts 28055
1 early-break contact 28056
Wiring accessory for early-make contact (CAF) 29336
Miscellaneous
Removable locking device for 3 padlocks 29370
100 identifcation labels 29314
DIN rail plate 28040
Catalogue numbers

F-4
Catalogue numbers
NSC100N
Complete device
Compact NSC100N with built-in trip unit
E
2
1
0
1
6
Compact NSC100N (18 kA at 380-415 V)
Rating 3P 3d 4P 4d
TM16D 28120 28130
TM20D 28121 28131
TM25D 28122 28132
TM32D 28123 28133
TM40D 28124 28134
TM50D 28125 28135
TM63D 28126 28136
TM70D 28127 28137
TM80D 28128 28138
TM100D 28129 28139
Compact NSC100NA switch-disconnector
Compact NSC100NA
Rating 3P 4P
28140 28141

F-5
NSC100N (cont.)
Accessories
Vigi module
Vigi module 0.03/3A
E
9
4
5
1
7
T
R
Bottom connection 3P 28000
4P 28001
Top connection 3P 28002
4P 28003
Connection accessories
Long terminal shields (1 pair)
E
1
8
6
0
7
3P 28034
4P 28035
Electrical auxiliaries
Auxiliary switch (changeover)
E
1
8
6
0
8
OF or SD 29450
OF or SD low level 29452
Voltage releases
E
2
1
3
9
4
AC Voltage MX MN
24 V 50/60 Hz 28079
42 V 50/60 Hz 28069
48 V 50/60 Hz 28070 28080
110-130 V 50/60 Hz 28071 28081
208 V 60 Hz 28067 28089
220-240 V 50/60 Hz 28072 28082
277 V 60 Hz 28068 28090
380-415 V 50 Hz 28073 28083
440-480 V 50/60 Hz 28074 28084
DC Voltage MX MN
24 V 28075 28085
48 V 28076 28086
110-125 V 28077 28087
250 V 28078 28088
MN 220-240 V 50/60 Hz with time delay 29421
Composed of: MN 250 V DC 28088
Delay unit 220-240 V 50/60 Hz 29427
Rotary handles
Direct rotary handles
E
5
8
5
8
0
ON
O
OFF
Standard black handle 28050
Red handle on yellow front 28051
MCC conversion accessory 28054
Extended rotary handles
E
R
5
8
5
8
1
ON
I
O
OFF ON
I
OF
Standard extended rotary handle 28052
Red handle on yellow front 28053
Indication auxiliary
E
4
4
4
5
0
2 early make contacts 28055
1 early-break contact 28056
Wiring accessory for early-make contact (CAF) 29336
Miscellaneous
45 mm standard front face 28039
DIN rail plate 28040
100 labels 29314
Removable locking device for 3 padlocks 29370
Catalogue numbers

F-6
Catalogue numbers
NS100/160/250N/H 1P/2P
Complete xed/FC device
Compact NS100/160N 1P/2P, NS250 1P
With thermal-magnetic trip unit TM-D
E
2
6
4
0
4
Compact NS100N
Rating 1P 1t
(Icu =25 kA at 220/240 V)
2P 2t (Icu =85 kA at 220/240 V and 25 kA at 380/415 V)
TM16D 29585 29605
TM20D 29588 29608
TM25D 29584 29604
TM30D 29587 29607
TM40D 29583 29603
TM50D 29586 29606
TM63D 29582 29602
TM80D 29581 29601
TM100D 29580 29600
Compact NS160N
E
3
0
8
4
0
Rating 1P 1t
(Icu =25 kA at 220/240 V)
2P 2t (Icu =85 kA at 220/240 V and 25 kA at 380/415 V)
TM125D 30581 30601
TM160D 30580 30600
Compact NS250N
Rating 1P 1t (Icu =25 kA at 220/240 V)
TM160D 31582
TM200D 31581
TM250D 31580
Compact NS100/160H 1P/2P
With thermal-magnetic trip unit TM-D
E
2
6
4
0
4
Compact NS100H
Rating 1P 1t (Icu =40 kA at 220/240 V) 2P 2t (Icu =100 kA at 220/240 V and 70 kA at 380/415 V)
TM16D 29595 29615
TM20D 29598 29618
TM25D 29594 29614
TM30D 29597 29617
TM40D 29593 29613
TM50D 29596 29616
TM63D 29592 29612
TM80D 29591 29611
TM100D 29590 29610
Compact NS160H
E
3
0
8
4
0
Rating 1P 1t
(Icu =40 kA at 220/240 V)
2P 2t (Icu =100 kA at 220/240 V and 70 kA at 380/415 V)
TM125D 30590 30611
TM160D 30589 30610

F-7
NS100/160/250N/H 1P/2P (cont.)
Accessories
Catalogue numbers
Connection accessories
Rear connections
E
1
8
5
7
9
2 short 29235
2 long 29236
Bare cable connectors
E
1
8
8
7
2
Snap-on, for cable: 1.5 to 95 mm ; y 160 A Set of 2 29246
25 to 95 mm ; y 250 A Set of 2 29255
120 to 185 mm

; y 250 A Set of 2 29247

Terminal extensions
E
1
8
6
0
0
Right-angle terminal extensions Set of 2 29250
E
1
8
6
0
1
Straight terminal extensions Set of 2 29251
Terminal shields
Short (1 pair) 1P 29320
Short (2 pairs) 2P 2x 29320
Locks
Toggle locking device for 3 padlocks
Removable 29370
Installation accessories
Front-panel escutcheons
For toggle operated breaker 29315

F-8
Catalogue numbers
NS100/160/250N: complete
xed/FC device
Compact NS100/160/250N and NA
Compact NS100/160/250N
With thermal-magnetic trip unit TM-D
t i
5
5 6
8
0
x r
Im
6
8 9 95
98
1
x n
r
m
Compact NS100N (36 kA at 380/415 V)
E
2
1
2
8
4
Ra ing 3P 2t 3P 3t 4P 3t 4P 4t 4P 3t +N/2
TM16D 29625 29635 29645 29655
TM25D 29624 29634 29644 29654
TM32D 29627 29637 29647 29657
TM40D 29623 29633 29643 29653
TM50D 29626 29636 29646 29656
TM63D 29622 29632 29642 29652
TM80D 29621 29631 29641 29651 29661
TM100D 29620 29630 29640 29650 29660
Compact NS160N (36 kA at 380/415 V)
Ra ing 3P 2t 3P 3t 4P 3t 4P 4t 4P 3t +N/2
TM80D 30623 30633 30643 30653 30663
TM100D 30622 30632 30642 30652 30662
TM125D 30621 30631 30641 30651 30661
TM160D 30620 30630 30640 30650 30660
Compact NS250N (36 kA at 380/415 V)
Ra ing 3P 2t 3P 3t 4P 3t 4P 4t 4P 3t +N/2
TM125D 31623 31633 31643 31653 31663
TM160D 31622 31632 31642 31652 31662
TM200D 31621 31631 31641 31651 31661
TM250D 31620 31630 31640 31650 31660
With electronic trip unit STR22SE
t
1
3
5 6
I
m
9 5
8
1
I
I
STR 2 DE
005% r 6 H
la
st
m I
Compact NS100N (36 kA at 380/415 V)
E
2
1
2
8
5
Ra ing 3P 3t 4P 3t, 4t, 3t +N/2
40 29772 29782
100 29770 29780
Compact NS160N (36 kA at 380/415 V)
Ra ing 3P 3t 4P 3t, 4t, 3t +N/2
40 30773 30783
100 30771 30781
160 30770 30780
Compact NS250N (36 kA at 380/415 V)
Ra ing 3P 3t 4P 3t, 4t, 3t +N/2
100 31772 31782
250 31770 31780
Compact NS100/160/250NA switch-disconnector
With NA switch-disconnector unit
t i
Compact NS100NA
E
2
6
3
9
5
Ra ing 2P 3P 4P
100 29619 29629 29639
Compact NS160NA
Ra ing 2P 3P 4P
160 30619 30629 30639
Compact NS250NA
Ra ing 2P 3P 4P
250 31619 31629 31639

F-9
NS100/160/250N: complete
xed/FC device (cont.)
Vigicompact NS100/160/250N
Catalogue numbers
Vigicompact NS100/160/250N
With thermal-magnetic trip unit TM-D
Vigicompact NS100N (36 kA at 380/415 V) equipped of MH Vigi module (220 to 440 V)
E
2
1
2
7
9
Rating 3P 3t 4P 3t 4P 4t 4P 3t +N/2
TM16D 29935 29945 29955
TM25D 29934 29944 29954
TM32D 29937 29947 29957
TM40D 29933 29943 29953
TM50D 29936 29946 29956
TM63D 29932 29942 29952
TM80D 29931 29941 29951 29961
TM100D 29930 29940 29950 29960
Vigicompact NS160N (36 kA at 380/415 V) equipped of MH Vigi module (220 to 440 V)
Rating 3P 3t 4P 3t 4P 4t 4P 3t +N/2
TM80D 30933 30943 30953 30963
TM100D 30932 30942 30952 30962
TM125D 30931 30941 30951 30961
TM160D 30930 30940 30950 30960
Vigicompact NS250N (36 kA at 380/415 V) equipped of MH Vigi module (220 to 440 V)
Rating 3P 3t 4P 3t 4P 4t 4P 3t +N/2
TM125D 31933 31943 31953 31963
TM160D 31932 31942 31952 31962
TM200D 31931 31941 31951 31961
TM250D 31930 31940 31950 31960
With electronic trip unit STR22SE
Vigicompact NS100N (36 kA at 380/415 V) equipped of MH Vigi module (220 to 440 V)
E
2
1
2
7
9
Rating 3P 3t 4P 3t, 4t, 3t +N/2
40 29972 29982
100 29970 29980
Vigicompact NS160N (36 kA at 380/415 V) equipped of MH Vigi module (220 to 440 V)
Rating 3P 3t 4P 3t, 4t, 3t +N/2
40 30973 30983
100 30971 30981
160 30970 30980
Vigicompact NS250N (36 kA at 380/415 V) equipped of MH Vigi module (220 to 440 V)
Rating 3P 3t 4P 3t, 4t, 3t +N/2
100 31972 31982
250 31970 31980

F-10
Catalogue numbers
NS100/160/250SX: complete
xed/FC device
Compact NS100/160/250SX
With thermal-magnetic trip unit TM-D
o r
4 5
6
8
10
x r
Im
9 5
98
1
In
r r
Compact NS100SX (50 kA at 380/415 V)
E
2
1
2
8
4
Rating 3P 3t 4P 3t 4P 4t 4P 3t +N/2
TM16D 35857 35867 35877
TM25D 35856 35866 35876
TM32D 35855 35865 35875
TM40D 35854 35864 35874
TM50D 35853 35863 35873
TM63D 35852 35862 35872
TM80D 35851 35861 35871 35881
TM100D 35850 35860 35870 35880
Compact NS160SX (50 kA at 380/415 V)
Rating 3P 3t 4P 3t 4P 4t 4P 3t +N/2
TM80D 35893 35903 35913 35923
TM100D 35892 35902 35912 35922
TM125D 35891 35901 35911 35921
TM160D 35890 35900 35910 35920
Compact NS250SX (50 kA at 380/415 V)
Rating 3P 3t 4P 3t 4P 4t 4P 3t +N/2
TM125D 35933 35943 35953 35963
TM160D 35932 35942 35952 35962
TM200D 35931 35941 35951 35961
TM250D 35930 35940 35950 35960
With electronic trip unit STR22SE
o
3
5
6
8
0
Ir
m
6
8 9
95
8
1
x n
r
TR 22 DE
90
1 5% r 0 6 H
a m
e
m
Compact NS100SX (50 kA at 380/415 V)
E
2
1
2
8
5
Rating 3P 3t 4P 3t, 4t, 3t +N/2
40 35971 35976
100 35970 35975
Compact NS160SX (50 kA at 380/415 V)
Rating 3P 3t 4P 3t, 4t, 3t +N/2
40 35982 35987
100 35981 35986
160 35980 35985
Compact NS250SX (50 kA at 380/415 V)
Rating 3P 3t 4P 3t, 4t, 3t +N/2
100 35991 35996
250 35990 35995

F-11
NS100/160/250H: complete
xed/FC device
Catalogue numbers
Compact NS100/160/250H
With thermal-magnetic trip unit TM-D
t
2
4 5 6
8
0
I
Im
6
7
5 9 5
98
1
I
I
m
Compact NS100H (70 kA at 380/415 V)
E
2
1
2
8
4
Rating 3P 3t 4P 3t 4P 4t 4P 3t +N/2
TM16D 29675 29685 29695
TM25D 29674 29684 29694
TM32D 29677 29687 29697
TM40D 29673 29683 29693
TM50D 29676 29686 29696
TM63D 29672 29682 29692
TM80D 29671 29681 29691 29701
TM100D 29670 29680 29690 29700
Compact NS160H (70 kA at 380/415 V)
Rating 3P 3t 4P 3t 4P 4t 4P 3t +N/2
TM80D 30673 30683 30693 30703
TM100D 30672 30682 30692 30702
TM125D 30671 30681 30691 30701
TM160D 30670 30680 30690 30700
Compact NS250H (70 kA at 380/415 V)
Rating 3P 3t 4P 3t 4P 4t 4P 3t +N/2
TM125D 31673 31683 31693 31703
TM160D 31672 31682 31692 31702
TM200D 31671 31681 31691 31701
TM250D 31670 31680 31690 31700
With electronic trip unit STR22SE
t
1 5
5
0
I
I
6
85 9 95
8
1
I
I
STR 2 DE
005% r 5 0 z
l
t t
Compact NS100H (70 kA at 380/415 V)
E
2
1
2
8
5
Rating 3P 3t 4P 3t, 4t, 3t +N/2
40 29792 29802
100 29790 29800
Compact NS160H (70 kA at 380/415 V)
Rating 3P 3t 4P 3t, 4t, 3t +N/2
40 30793 30803
100 30791 30801
160 30790 30800
Compact NS250H (70 kA at 380/415 V)
Rating 3P 3t 4P 3t, 4t, 3t +N/2
100 31792 31802
250 31790 31800

F-12
Catalogue numbers
NS100/160/250L: complete
xed/FC device
Compact NS100/160/250L
With thermal-magnetic trip unit TM-D
t
5
4
8
0
I
m
6
8 9 5
8
1
I
I I
Compact NS100L (150 kA at 380/415 V)
E
2
1
2
8
4
Rating 3P 3t 4P 3t 4P 4t 4P 3t +N/2
TM16D 29715 29725 29735
TM25D 29714 29724 29734
TM32D 29717 29727 29737
TM40D 29713 29723 29733
TM50D 29716 29726 29736
TM63D 29712 29722 29732
TM80D 29711 29721 29731 29741
TM100D 29710 29720 29730 29740
Compact NS160L (150 kA at 380/415 V)
Rating 3P 3t 4P 3t 4P 4t 4P 3t +N/2
TM80D 30713 30723 30733 30743
TM100D 30712 30722 30732 30742
TM125D 30711 30721 30731 30741
TM160D 30710 30720 30730 30740
Compact NS250L (150 kA at 380/415 V)
Rating 3P 3t 4P 3t 4P 4t 4P 3t +N/2
TM125D 31713 31723 31733 31743
TM160D 31712 31722 31732 31742
TM200D 31711 31721 31731 31741
TM250D 31710 31720 31730 31740
With electronic trip unit STR22SE
i
5 6
0
I
m
6
8 9 5
8
1
I
I
m
Compact NS100L (150 kA at 380/415 V)
E
2
1
2
8
5
Rating 3P 3t 4P 3t, 4t, 3t +N/2
40 29812 29822
100 29810 29820
Compact NS160L (150 kA at 380/415 V)
Rating 3P 3t 4P 3t, 4t, 3t +N/2
40 30813 30823
100 30811 30821
160 30810 30820
Compact NS250L (150 kA at 380/415 V)
Rating 3P 3t 4P 3t, 4t, 3t +N/2
100 31812 31822
250 31810 31820

F-13
NS100/160/250: xed/FC
device based on separate
components
Compact and Vigicompact
Catalogue numbers
Basic frame
D
B
1
0
1
9
5
8
2P (3P frame) 3P 4P
NS100N 29000 29003 29008
NS100SX 29006 29011
NS100H 29004 29009
NS100L 29005 29010
NS160N 30400 30403 30408
NS160SX 30406 30411
NS160H 30404 30409
NS160L 30405 30410
NS250N 31400 31403 31408
NS250SX 31406 31411
NS250H 31404 31409
NS250L 31405 31410
+ Trip unit
D
B
1
0
1
9
5
9
1
5 6
8
0
I
I
7
85 9
I
I
S R E
05 r 0 6
l m
t t
I
Standard protection: trip unit TM-D
Rating 3P 2t 3P 3t 4P 3t 4P 4t 4P 3t +N/2
TM16D 29025 29035 29045 29055
TM25D 29024 29034 29044 29054
TM32D 29027 29037 29047 29057
TM40D 29023 29033 29043 29053
TM50D 29026 29036 29046 29056
TM63D 29022 29032 29042 29052
TM80D
(1)
29021 29031 29041 29051 29061
TM100D
(1)
29020 29030 29040 29050 29060
TM80D
(2)
30423 30433 30443 30453 30463
TM100D
(2)
30422 30432 30442 30452 30462
TM125D 30421 30431 30441 30451 30461
TM160D
(3)
30420 30430 30440 30450 30460
TM160D
(4)
31422 31432 31442 31452 31462
TM200D 31421 31431 31441 31451 31461
TM250D 31420 31430 31440 31450 31460
Standard protection: electronic trip unit SE
Rating 3P 3t 4P 3t, 4t, 3t +N/2
STR22SE - 40 A 29072 29082
STR22SE - 80 A
(2)
30471 30481
STR22SE - 100 A 29070 29080
STR22SE - 160 A 30470 30480
STR22SE - 250 A 31470 31480
Standard protection with oversized neutral: electronic trip unit SE OSN
Rating 4P 3t, 3t +1.6N
STR22SE OSN 160 A - 3 x f 100 A
(2)
30466
STR22SE OSN 250 A - 3 x f 160 A
(4)
31481
Type G protection: trip unit TM-G
Rating 3P 2t 3P 3t 4P 4t
TM16G 29145 29155 29165
TM25G 29144 29154 29164
TM40G 29143 29153 29163
TM63G 29142 29152 29162
Type G protection: electronic trip unit GE
Rating 3P 3t 4P 3t, 4t, 3t +N/2
STR22GE - 40 A 29076 29086
STR22GE - 100 A 29075 29085
STR22GE - 160 A 30475 30485
STR22GE - 250 A 31475 31485
Motor protection: trip unit MA
Rating 3P 3t 4P 3t
MA2.5 29125
MA6.3 29124
MA12.5 29123
MA25 29122
(1) For NS100. MA50 29121
(2) For NS160/250. MA100 29120 29130
(3) For NS160. MA150 30500 30510
(4) For NS250. MA220 31500 31510

F-14
Catalogue numbers
NS100/160/250: xed/FC
device based on separate
components (cont.)
Compact and Vigicompact (cont.)
+ Trip unit (cont.)
3
5 6
10
I
I
3
5
I
I
R 2
5% r 6 H
m
t t
I
Motor protection: electronic trip unit ME
D
B
1
0
1
9
5
9
Rating 3P 3t
STR22ME - 20 A 29175
STR22ME - 25 A 29174
STR22ME - 40 A 29173
STR22ME - 50 A 29172
STR22ME - 80 A 29171
STR22ME - 100 A 29170
STR22ME - 150 A 30520
STR22ME - 220 A 31520
Options: SDTAM 110/240 V AC/DC 29424
SDTAM 24/48 V AC - 24/72 V DC 29430
Switch-disconnector NA
2P (3P frame) 3P 4P
NA (NS100) 29200 29201 29202
NA (NS160/250) 30456 30456 30457
+ Vigi module
D
B
1
0
1
9
6
1
3P 4P
ME type for NS100/160 29212 29213
MH type for NS100/160 (220 to 440 V) 29210 29211
MH type for NS250 (220 to 440 V) 31535 31536
MH type for NS100/160 (440 to 550 V) 29215 29216
MH type for NS250 (440 to 550 V) 31533 31534
Connection for a 4P Vigi on a 3P breaker 29214

F-15
Installation and connection
Compact and Vigicompact
NS100/160/250
Catalogue numbers
Fixed/RC device = fxed/FC device + rear connection kit
Short RC kit
E
1
6
9
9
2
3P 29237
4P 29238
Comprising: Short RCs 3P 3x 29235
4P 4x 29235
Mixed RC kit
3P 29239
4P 29240
Comprising: Kit 3P Short RCs 2x 29235
Long RCs 1x 29236
Kit 4P Short RCs 2x 29235
Long RCs 2x 29236
Plug-in confguration = fxed/FC device + plug-in kit
Kit for Compact
E
1
8
6
2
3
2P (3P frame) 29288
3P 29289
4P 29290
Comprising: Base 2P 1x 29265
3P 1x 29266
4P 1x 29267
Safety trip 3P/4P 1x 29270
Short terminal shields 3P 1x 29321
4P 1x 29322
Power connections 2P 2x 29268
3P 3x 29268
4P 4x 29268
Kit for Vigicompact
3P 29291
4P 29292
Comprising: Base 3P 1x 29266
4P 1x 29267
Safety trip 3P/4P 1x 29270
Short terminal shields 3P 1x 29321
4P 1x 29322
Power connections 3P 3x 29269
4P 4x 29269
Withdrawable confguration = fxed/FC device + withdrawable kit
Kit for Compact
E
1
6
9
9
0
2P (3P frame) 29298
3P 29299
4P 29300
Comprising: Plug-in kit 2P 1x 29288
3P 1x 29289
4P 1x 29290
Fixed part of chassis 2P/3P/4P 1x 29282
Moving part of chassis 2P/3P/4P 1x 29283
Kit for Vigicompact
3P 29301
4P 29302
Comprising: Plug-in kit 3P 1x 29291
4P 1x 29292
Fixed part of chassis 3P/4P 1x 29282
Moving part of chassis 3P/4P 1x 29283
Insulation accessories for plug-in and withdrawable
Long terminal shields for plug-in base and withdrawable confguration
3P 29332
4P 29333
Comprising: Adapter 3P (1 pair) 1x 29306
4P (1 pair) 1x 29307
Long terminal shields 3P (1 pair) 1x 29308
4P (1 pair) 1x 29309
Interphase barriers kit for plug-in base and withdrawable confguration
3P 29334
4P 29311
Comprising: Adapter 3P (1 pair) 1x 29306
4P (1 pair) 1x 29307
Interphase barriers Set of 6 1x 29328

F-16
Catalogue numbers
Accessories
Compact NS100/160/250
Connection accessories (Cu or Al)
Rear connections
E
1
8
5
7
9
2 short 29235
2 long 29236
Bare cable connectors
E
1
8
5
7
2
Snap-on, for cable 1.5 to 95 mm ; y 160 A Set of 3 29242
Set of 4 29243
25 to 95 mm ; y 250 A Set of 3 29227
Set of 4 29228
120 to 185 mm ; y 250 A Set of 3 29259
Set of 4 29260
E
1
8
5
9
8
Voltage plug for 185 mm bare cable connector Set of 2 29348
Clips for bare-cable connector Set of 10 29241
Distribution connectors for six 1.5 to 35 mm cables with interphase barriers Set of 3 29248
Set of 4 29249
" Polybloc" distribution block (for bare cable)
E
2
4
0
7
6
160 A (40 C) 6 cables S y 10 mm 07100
250 A (40 C) 9 cables S y 10 mm 07101
Terminal extensions
E
1
8
6
0
0
Right-angle terminal extensions Set of 3 29261
Set of 4 29262
E
1
8
6
0
1
Straight terminal extensions Set of 3 29263
Set of 4 29264
E
1
8
6
5
9
9
Spreaders 3P 31563
4P 31564
Supplied with 2 (or 3) interphase barriers
E
5
1
0
0
6
One-piece spreader 3P 31060
4P 31061
Front alignment base 3P/4P 31064
Crimp lugs for copper cable
E
1
8
6
0
2
For cable 120 mm Set of 3 29252
Set of 4 29256
For cable 150 mm Set of 3 29253
Set of 4 29257
For cable 185 mm Set of 3 29254
Set of 4 29258
Supplied with 2 (or 3) interphase barriers
Crimp lugs for aluminium cable
E
3
0
9
0
8
For cable 150 mm Set of 3 29504
Set of 4 29505
For cable 185 mm Set of 3 29506
Set of 4 29507
Supplied with 2 (or 3) interphase barriers
Terminal shields
E
1
8
6
1
8
Short (1 pair) 3 P 29321
4 P 29322
Long (1 pair) 3 P 29323
4 P 29324
E
1
8
6
0
6
Interphase barriers Set of 6 29329
Insulation kit U u 600 V
Long terminal shields +insulating screens 3 P 29326
4 P 29327
E
2
6
0
3
3
2 insulating screens (fxed breaker) 3 P 29330
4 P 29331

F-17
Accessories (cont.)
Compact NS100/160/250 (cont.)
Catalogue numbers
Electrical auxiliaries
Auxiliary contacts (changeover)
E
1
8
6
0
8
OF or SD or SDE or SDV 29450
OF or SD or SDE or SDV low level 29452
SDE adapter for trip unit TM or MA 29451
Voltage releases
E
1
8
6
0
9
AC Voltage MX MN
24 V 50/60 Hz 29384 29404
48 V 50/60 Hz 29385 29405
110-130 V 50/60 Hz 29386 29406
220-240 V 50/60 Hz
208-277 V 60 Hz 29387 29407
380-415 V 50 Hz
440-480 V 60 Hz 29388 29408
525 V 50 Hz - 600 V 60 Hz 29389 29409
DC Voltage MX MN
12 V 29382 29402
24 V 29390 29410
30 V 29391 29411
48 V 29392 29412
60 V 29383 29403
125 V 29393 29413
250 V 29394 29414
MN 48 V 50/60 Hz with time delay 29420
composed of: MN 48 V DC 29412
delay unit 48 V 50/60 Hz 29426
MN 220-240 V 50/60 Hz with time delay 29422
composed of: MN 250 V DC 29414
delay unit of 220-240 V 50/60 Hz 29427
Motor mechanism modules with SDE adapter
E
1
8
6
1
0
I
s O O
s O F
m u u o
AC Voltage MT100/160 MT250
48-60 V 50/60 Hz 29440 31548
110-130 V 50/60 Hz 29433 31540
220-240 V 50/60 Hz 29434 31541
208-277 V 60 Hz
380-415 V 50/60 Hz 29435 31542
440-480 V 60 Hz
DC Voltage MT100/160 MT250
24-30 V 29436 31543
48-60 V 29437 31544
110-130 V 29438 31545
250 V 29439 31546
LV installation control and monitoring (Digipact)
Communicating auxiliary contacts for Compact NS circuit breakers
E
3
8
7
2
3
OF, SD and SDE communicating auxiliary contacts for Compact NS100/160/250 (the SDE adapter
for thermal-magnetic trip units is included)
29453
Communicating " connected/disconnected" position indication contacts for Compact NS circuit breakers
E
3
8
7
2
2
"connected /disconnected" position indication contacts for Compact NS100/250 29296
Motor mechanism + communicating auxiliary contacts for Compact NS circuit breakers
E
1
8
6
1
0
I
h O O
h F
m n
MT100/160 220-240 V 50/60 Hz +communicating OF, SD, SDE for Compact NS100/160 29441
E
3
8
7
2
4
MT250 220-240 V 50/60 Hz +communicating OF, SD, SDE for Compact NS250 31549

F-18
Catalogue numbers
Accessories (cont.)
Compact NS100/160/250 (cont.)
Indication and measurement modules
Ammeter module
D
B
1
1
4
7
9
9
Rating (A) 100 160 250
3P 29455 30555 31565
4P 29456 30556 31566
I max. ammeter module
D
B
1
1
4
7
9
9
Rating (A) 100 160 250
3P 34849 34850 34851
Current transformer module
D
B
1
0
5
1
6
8
Rating (A) 100 150 250
3P 29457 30557 31567
4P 29458 30558 31568
Current transformer module and voltage output
D
B
1
0
5
1
6
8
Rating (A) 125 150 250
3P 29461 30561 31569
4P 29462 30562 31570
Insulation monitoring module
D
B
1
0
5
1
6
9
3P 29459
4P 29460
Voltage presence indicator
D
B
1
0
5
1
7
0
29325
Rotary handles
Direct rotary handles
E
1
8
6
1
1
ON
I
O
OFF
Standard black handle 29337
Red handle on yellow front 29339
MCC conversion accessory 29341
CNOMO conversion accessory 29342
Standard extended rotary handle
E
1
8
6
1
2
ON
I
O
OFF ON
OFF
Standard extended rotary handle 29338
Red handle on yellow front 29340
Telescopic handle for withdrawable device 29343
Accessories
Indication auxiliary 1 early-break contact 29345
2 early-make contacts 29346
Early-make wiring terminal 29336
Locks
Toggle locking device for 1 to 3 padlocks
E
1
8
6
2
1
E
1
8
6
1
3
By removable device 29370
By fxed device 29371
Locking of the rotary handle
E
1
8
6
2
0
ON
I
l
O
F
l
Keylock adapter (keylock not included) 29344
Keylock (keylock adapter not
included)
Ronis 1351B.500 41940
Profalux KS5 B24 D4Z 42888
Locking of the motor mechanism modules
E
1
8
6
1
0
I
h O
h F
m u ut
Keylock adapter +Ronis keylock (special) 29449

F-19
Accessories (cont.)
Compact NS100/160/250 (cont.)
Catalogue numbers
Interlocking
Mechanical interlocking for circuit breakers
E
2
1
2
8
8
With toggles 29354
E
1
8
7
8
0
With rotary handles 29369
Interlocking with key (2 keylocks / 1 key) for rotary handles
E
2
6
7
6
6
O F
ON I
Keylock kit (keylock not included)
(1)
29344
1 set of 2 keylocks (1 key only, Ronis 1351B.500 41950
keylock kit not included) Profalux KS5 B24 D4Z 42878
(1) For only 1 device.
Installation accessories
Front-panel escutcheons
E
1
8
5
8
9
Toggle 29315
Vigi module 29316
Rotary handle, motor mechanism module or escutcheon collar, IP40 29317
Vigi module or ammeter IP40 29318
Toggle cover
29319
Sealing accessories
29375
DIN rail adapter
29305
Plug-in/withdrawable confguration accessories
Auxiliary connections
E
1
8
5
8
6
1 9-wire fxed connector (for base) 29273
1 9-wire moving connector (for circuit breaker) 29274
1 support for 2 moving connectors 29275
9-wire manual auxiliary connector (fxed + moving) 29272
Plug-in base accessories
E
9
4
5
2
9
Long insulated right angle Set of 3 29276
terminal extension Set of 4 29277
2 IP4 shutters for base 29271
Chassis accessories
Escutcheon collar Toggle 29284
Vigi module 29285
Locking kit (keylock not included) 29286
2 carriage switches (connected/disconnected position indication) 29287
Parts of plug-in kit
E
1
8
6
2
3
Plug-in base FC/RC 2P 29265
3P 29266
4P 29267
Set of 2 power connections for Standard 29268
Vigi module 29269
Safety trip for advanced opening 29270
Parts of withdrawable kit
E
1
8
6
1
7
Fixed part (for base) 3P/4P 29282
Moving part (for circuit breaker) 29283
Spare parts
10 toggle extensions 29313
Bag of screws 29312
E
1
8
6
2
4
12 snap-in nuts (fxed/FC) M6 for NS100N/H/L 29234
M8 for NS160/250N/H/L 30554
100 identifcation labels 29314

F-20
Catalogue numbers
Accessories (cont.)
Compact NS100/160/250 (cont.)
Individual enclosures
Sheet-metal enclosure IP54 for
E
2
4
0
8
9
Compact NS100/160 and Vigi NS100/160 with standard rotary handle 31215
Compact NS100/160 and Vigi NS100/160 with red, yellow rotary handle 31216
Compact NS250 and Vigi NS250 with standard rotary handle 31217
Compact NS250 and Vigi NS250 with red, yellow rotary handle 31218
Insulating enclosure IP55 for
E
2
4
0
9
0
Compact NS100/160 29465
Vigicompact NS100/160 29466
Compact NS250 31573
Vigicompact NS250 31574
Visible break disconnect function
See catalogue dealing with "Interpact INV products (visible break)" and the associated accessories.
Visible break disconnection function associated with fxed front-connected/rear-connected Compact NS (for "tarif vert/tarif jaune"
connection).
Test kits
Test kits
E
2
1
2
9
0
Mini test kit for STR trip units 43362
E
3
6
2
7
1
Portable test kit for STR trip units 34547
Spare test plug for portable test kit 34547 34503
Wiring kit (spare part) 34546

F-21
NS400/630: complete xed/FC
device
Compact NS400/630
Compact NS400/630N with electronic trip unit
E
2
1
3
0
2
TR



Electronic trip unit STR23SE (U y 525 V)
3P 4P 3d, 4d, 3d +N/2
Compact NS400N
(50 kA at 380/415 V)
45 mm pitch
150 A 32719 32720
250 A 32707 32708
400 A 32693 32694
Compact NS630N (50 kA at 380/415 V), 45 mm pitch 32893 32894
Electronic trip unit STR53UE (U y 525 V)
3P 4P 3d, 4d, 3d +N/2
Compact NS400N 150 A 32725 32726
(50 kA at 380/415 V) 250 A 32713 32714
45 mm pitch 400 A 32699 32700
Compact NS630N (50 kA at 380/415 V), 45 mm pitch 32899 32900
Compact NS400/630H with electronic trip unit
E
2
1
3
0
2
SE I
I
I



Electronic trip unit STR23SE (U y 525 V)
3P 4P 3d, 4d, 3d +N/2
Compact NS400H
(70 kA at 380/415 V)
45 mm pitch
150 A 32721 32722
250 A 32709 32710
400 A 32695 32696
Compact NS630H (70 kA at 380/415 V), 45 mm pitch 32895 32896
Electronic trip unit STR53UE (U y 525 V)
3P 4P 3d, 4d, 3d +N/2
Compact NS400H
(70 kA at 380/415 V)
45 mm pitch
150 A 32727 32728
250 A 32715 32716
400 A 32701 32702
Compact NS630H (70 kA at 380/415 V), 45 mm pitch 32901 32902
Compact NS400/630L with electronic trip unit
E
2
1
3
0
2
SE



Electronic trip unit STR23SE (U y 525 V)
3P 4P 3d, 4d, 3d +N/2
Compact NS400L
(150 kA at 380/415 V)
45 mm pitch
150 A 32723 32724
250 A 32711 32712
400 A 32697 32698
Compact NS630L (150 kA at 380/415 V), 45 mm pitch 32897 32898
Electronic trip unit STR53UE (U y 525 V)
3P 4P 3d, 4d, 3d +N/2
Compact NS400L
(150 kA at 380/415 V
45 mm pitch
150 A 32729 32730
250 A 32717 32718
400 A 32703 32704
Compact NS630L (150 kA at 380/415 V), 45 mm pitch 32903 32904
Compact NS400/630H/L with magnetic trip unit MA for motor protection
Trip unit MA320
3P
Compact NS400H, 45 mm pitch 32750
Compact NS400L, 45 mm pitch 32751
Trip unit MAE500
3P
Compact NS630H, 45 mm pitch 32950
Compact NS630L, 45 mm pitch 32951
Catalogue numbers

F-22
NS400/630: complete xed/FC
device (cont.)
Switch-disconnector, Vigicompact
and Compact 1000 V
Compact NS400/630NA switch-disconnector
E
2
6
3
9
6
3P 4P
Compact NS400NA, 45 mm pitch 32756 32757
Compact NS630NA, 45 mm pitch 32956 32957
Vigicompact NS400/630N
E
2
1
3
0
4
Trip unit STR23SE (U y 525 V)
Vigicompact equipped with MB Vigi module (220 to 440 V) 3P 4P 3d, 4d, 3d +N/2
Vigicompact NS400N, 45 mm pitch 32733 32734
Vigicompact NS630N, 45 mm pitch 32933 32934
Compact NS400N 1000 V
E
2
1
3
0
2
3 SE
9 1 5
l
m5 6 r 3
8
1
8
I
I
I
%I
Trip unit STR23SP
Compact equipped with connection kit 3P
Compact NS400N 1000 V
(10 kA at 1150 V)
45 mm pitch
150 A low setting 37 A 32673
150 A 32672
250 A 32671
400 A 32670
Compact NS400NA 1000 V
E
2
6
3
9
6
Compact equipped with connection kit 3P
Compact NS400NA 1000 V 400 A 32753
45 mm pitch
Catalogue numbers

F-23
NS400/630: xed/FC device
based on separate components
Compact and Vigicompact NS400/630N/H/L
Basic frame
D
B
1
0
1
9
5
5
3P 4P
NS400N 150 A 32382 32387
250 A 32392 32397
400 A 32403 32408
NS400H 150 A 32383 32388
250 A 32393 32398
400 A 32404 32409
NS400L 150 A 32384 32389
250 A 32394 32399
400 A 32405 32410
NS630N 32803 32808
NS630H 32804 32809
NS630L 32805 32810
+ trip unit
D
B
1
0
1
9
5
6
3 E
%
I
Im
I
I
t
m






Electronic trip units STR23SE or STR23SV
3P, 4P 3d, 4d, 3d +N/2
STR23SE (U y 525 V) 32420
STR23SV (U >525 V) 32432
Standard protection with oversized neutral: electronic trip unit STR23SE OSN
Rating 4P 3d, 3d +1.6N
STR23SE OSN (U y 525 V) 32443
Electronic trip units STR53UE (basic offer) or STR53SV
3P, 4P 3d, 4d, 3d +N/2
STR53UE F (U y 525 V) 32424
STR53SV F (U >525 V) 32433
Electronic trip unit STR53UE (with options)
3P, 4P 3d, 4d, 3d +N/2
STR53UE FTI (U y 525 V) 32425
STR53UE FI (U y 525 V) 32426
STR53UE FTI (U y 525 V)
for external neutral CT
(1)
32429
Options: ZSI wiring 32442
COM wiring 32441
(1) Allows the connection of an external neutral CT for 3P breakers equipped with "earth fault" protection (T).
Electronic trip unit STR43ME
3P, 3d
STR43ME F 32430
Options: SDTAM 110/240 V AC/DC 29424
SDTAM 24/48 V AC / 24/72 V DC 29430
STR43ME FI 32431
Options: SDTAM 110/240 V AC/DC 29424
SDTAM 24/48 V AC / 24/72 V DC 29430
COM wiring 32441
Spare battery option for STR53UE or STR43ME 32434
+ Vigi module
D
B
1
0
1
9
5
7
3P 4P
Type MB 200 to 440 V 32455 32456
440 to 550 V 32453 32454
Connection for a 4P Vigi on a 3P breaker 32457
External CT for earth-fault protection
E
2
8
3
9
8
For earth fault protection (T) of STR53UE FT or FTI
Installation on outgoing neutral conductor outside the circuit-breaker
150 A 36950
250 A 36951
400 A 36952
630 A 32440
Catalogue numbers

F-24
Installation and connection
Compact and Vigicompact NS400/630
Fixed/RC device = fxed/FC device + RC kit
E
2
1
0
1
3
Mixed RC kit
3P 32477
4P 32478
Comprising: Kit 3P Short RCs 2x 32475
Long RCs 1x 32476
Kit 4P Short RCs 2x 32475
Long RCs 2x 32476
Fixed/FC device 52.5 mm or 70 mm pitch = fxed FC confguration 45 mm pitch + spreaders
E
2
1
0
1
2
Pitch of all Compact and Vigicompact NS400/630/N/H/L is 45 mm. A set of spreaders is available for connection: fxed front
connections or withdrawable with pitch of 52.5 mm or 70 mm.
Upline or downline clearance
52.5 mm 3P 32490
4P 32491
70 mm 3P 32492
4P 32493
Plug-in device = fxed/FC device + plug-in kit
E
2
1
0
1
4
Kit for Compact
3P 32538
4P 32539
Comprising: Base 3P 1x 32516
4P 1x 32517
Safety trip 3P/4P 1x 32520
Short terminal shields 3P 1x 32562
4P 1x 32563
Power connections 3P 3x 32518
4P 4x 32518
Kit for Vigicompact
3P 32540
4P 32541
Comprising: Base 3P 1x 32516
4P 1x 32517
Safety trip 3P/4P 1x 32520
Short terminal shields 3P 1x 32562
4P 1x 32563
Power connections 3P 3x 32519
4P 4x 32519
Withdrawable device = fxed/FC device + withdrawable kit
E
2
1
0
1
5
Kit for Compact
3P 32542
4P 32543
Comprising: Plug-in kit 3P 1x 32538
4P 1x 32539
Fixed part of chassis 3P/4P 1x 32532
Moving part of chassis 3P/4P 1x 32533
Kit for Vigicompact
3P 32544
4P 32545
Comprising: Plug-in kit 3P 1x 32540
4P 1x 32541
Fixed part of chassis 3P/4P 1x 32532
Moving part of chassis 3P/4P 1x 32533
Catalogue numbers

F-25
Installation and connection (cont.)
Compact and Vigicompact NS400/630
(cont.)
Insulation accessories
Long terminal shields kit for plug-in base and withdrawable confguration
3P 32588
4P 32589
Comprising: Adapter 3P (1 pair) 1x 32584
4P (1 pair) 1x 32585
Long terminal shields 3P (1 pair) 1x 32586
4P (1 pair) 1x 32587
Interphase barriers kit for plug-in base and withdrawable confguration
3P 32591
4P 32592
Comprising: Adapter 3P (1 pair) 1x 32584
4P (1 pair) 1x 32585
Interphase barriers Set of 6 1x 32571
Catalogue numbers

F-26
Accessories
Compact NS400/630
Connection accessories (Cu or Al)
Rear connections
E
1
8
5
7
9
2 short 32475
2 long 32476
Bare cable connectors
E
2
2
0
4
0
For 1 cable from 35 to 300 mm Set of 3 32479
Set of 4 32480
E
2
2
0
4
1
For 2 cable from 35 to 240 mm Set of 3 32481
Set of 4 32482
Voltage measurement input for bare cable connector Set of 2 29348
Terminal extensions
E
1
8
6
0
0
Right-angle terminal extensions Set of 3 32484
Set of 4 32485
E
2
1
2
7
6
Edgewise pads Set of 3 32486
Set of 4 32487
D
B
1
1
7
6
0
6
Spreaders 52.5 mm 3P 32490
4P 32491
70 mm 3P 32492
4P 32493
Supplied with 2 (or 3) interphase barriers
Crimp lugs for copper cable
E
1
8
6
0
2
For cable 240 mm

Set of 3 32500
Set of 4 32501
For cable 300 mm

Set of 3 32502
Set of 4 32503
Supplied with 2 (or 3) interphase barriers
Crimp lugs for aluminium cable
E
3
0
9
0
8
For cable 240 mm Set of 3 32504
Set of 4 32505
For cable 300 mm Set of 3 32506
Set of 4 32507
Supplied with 2 (or 3) interphase barriers
Terminal shields
E
1
8
6
1
8
Short, 45 mm (1 pair) 3 P 32562
4 P 32563
Long, 45 mm (1 pair) 3 P 32564
4 P 32565
Long for spreaders, 52.5 mm
(supplied with insulating plate)
3 P 32582
4 P 32583
E
1
8
6
0
6
Interphase barriers Set of 6 32570
Insulation Kit U u 600 V
45 mm pole distance 3 P 32580
4 P 32581
For spreaders, 52.5 mm
(long terminal shields +insulating plate)
3 P 32582
4 P 32583
E
2
6
0
3
3
2 insulating screens
(fxed breaker)
52.5 mm pitch 3 P 32576
4 P 32577
70 mm pitch 3 P 32578
4 P 32579
Catalogue numbers

F-27
Accessories (cont.)
Compact NS400/630 (cont.)
Electrical auxiliaries
Auxiliary contacts (changeover)
E
1
8
6
0
8
OF or SD or SDE or SDV 29450
OF or SD or SDE or SDV low level 29452
Voltage releases
E
1
8
6
0
9
AC Voltage MX MN
24 V 50/60 Hz 29384 29404
48 V 50/60 Hz 29385 29405
110-130 V 50/60 Hz 29386 29406
220-240 V 50/60 Hz
208-277 V 60 Hz
29387 29407
380-415 V 50 Hz
440-480 V 60 Hz
29388 29408
525 V 50 Hz-600 V 60 Hz 29389 29409
DC Voltage MX MN
12 V 29382 29402
24 V 29390 29410
30 V 29391 29411
48 V 29392 29412
60 V 29383 29403
125 V 29393 29413
250 V 29394 29414
MN 48 V 50/60 Hz with time delay 29420
Composed of: MN 48 V DC 29412
Delay unit 48 V 50/60 Hz 29426
MN 220-240 V 50/60 Hz with time delay 29422
Composed of: MN 250 V DC 29414
Delay unit 220/240 V 50/60 Hz 29427
Motor mechanism modules
E
1
8
6
1
0
1
I
u h O O
u h F
m nu o
AC Voltage MT400 MT630
48-60 V 50/60 Hz 32639 32839
110-130 V 50/60 Hz 32640 32840
220-240 V 50/60 Hz
208-277 V 60 Hz
32641 32841
380-415 V 50 Hz 32642 32842
440-480 V 60 Hz 32647 32847
DC Voltage MT400 MT630
24-30 V 32643 32843
48-60 V 32644 32844
110-130 V 32645 32845
250 V 32646 32846
Operations counter 32648
LV installation control and monitoring (Digipact)
Communicating auxiliary contacts for Compact NS circuit breakers
E
3
8
7
2
3
OF, SD and SDE communicating auxiliary contacts for Compact NS400/630 32551
Communicating " connected/disconnected" position indication contacts for Compact NS circuit breakers
E
3
8
7
2
2
"connected /disconnected" position indication contacts for Compact NS400/630 29296
Motor mechanism + communicating auxiliary contacts for Compact NS circuit breakers
E
1
8
6
1
0
1
I
sh ON O
s O F
ma au
MT400 220-240V 50/60 Hz +communicating OF, SD, SDE for Compact NS400 32652
E
3
8
7
2
4
MT630 220-240V 50/60 Hz +communicating OF, SD, SDE for Compact NS630 32848
Catalogue numbers

F-28
Accessories (cont.)
Compact NS400/630 (cont.)
Indication and measurement modules
Ammeter module
D
B
1
1
0
9
3
1
Ra ing (A) 400 630
3P 32655 32855
4P 32656 32856
I max. ammeter module
D
B
1
1
0
9
3
1
Ra ing (A) 400 630
3P 34852 34853
Current transformer module
D
B
1
0
5
1
6
8
Ra ing (A) 400 600
3P 32657 32857
4P 32658 32858
Current transformer module and voltage output
D
B
1
0
5
1
6
8
Ra ing (A) 400 600
3P 32653 32861
4P 32654 32862
Insulation monitoring module
D
B
1
0
5
1
6
9
3P 32659
4P 32660
Voltage presence indicator
D
B
1
0
5
1
7
0
32566
Rotary handles
Direct rotary handle
E
1
8
6
1
1
ON
I
FF
Standard black handle 32597
Red handle on yellow front 32599
MCC conversion accessory 32606
CNOMO conversion accessory 32602
Extended rotary handle
E
1
8
6
1
2
I
FF N
F
Standard extended rotary handle 32598
Red handle on yellow front 32600
Telescopic handle for withdrawable device 32603
Indication auxiliary
1 early-break contact 32605
2 early-make contacts 29346
Locks
Toggle locking device for 1 to 3 padlocks
E
1
8
6
2
1

By removable device 29370
By fxed device 32631
Locking of the rotary handle
E
1
8
6
2
0
ON
I
f l
O
OFF
f l
Keylock adapter (keylock not included) 32604
Keylock (keylock adapter not
included)
Ronis 1351B.500 41940
Profalux KS5 B24 D4Z 42888
Locking of the motor mechanism modules
E
1
8
6
1
0
1
I
u h N O
h O
n / u
Keylock adapter (keylock not included) 32649
Keylock (keylock adapter not
included)
Ronis 1351B.500 41940
Profalux KS5 B24 D4Z 42888
E
1
8
6
1
3
Catalogue numbers

F-29
Accessories (cont.)
Compact NS400/630 (cont.)
Interlocking
Mechanical interlocking for circuit breakers
E
2
1
2
8
8
With toggles 32614
E
1
8
7
8
0
With rotary handles 32621
Interlocking with key (2 keylocks / 1 key) for rotary handles
E
2
6
7
6
6
OO F
ON I
Keylock kit (keylock not included)
(1)
32604
1 set of 2 keylocks (1 key only,
keylock kit not included)
Ronis 1351B.500 41950
Profalux KS5 B24 D4Z 42878
(1) For only 1 device.
Installation accessories
Templates for front panel cut-outs
E
1
8
5
8
9
Toggle 32556
Vigi module 29316
Rotary handle, motor mechanism module or escutcheon collar, IP40 32558
Vigi module or ammeter IP40 29318
Toggle cover
32560
Sealing accessories
29375
Plug-in/withdrawable confguration accessories
Auxiliary connections
E
1
8
5
8
6
1 fxed withdrawable part with 9 wires (for base) 29273
1 moving withdrawable part with 9 wires (for circuit breaker) 32523
1 support for 3 moving connectors 32525
9-wire manual auxiliary connector (fxed + moving) 29272
Plug-in base accessories
E
9
4
5
2
9
Long insulated right angle
terminal extension
Set of 3 32526
Set of 4 32527
2 IP4 shutters for base 32521
Chassis accessories
Escutcheon collar Toggle 32534
Vigi 29285
Locking kit (keylock not included) 29286
2 carriage switches (connected/disconnected position indication) 29287
Parts of plug-in kit
E
1
8
6
2
3
Plug-in base FC/RC 3P 32516
4P 32517
Set of 2 power connections for Standard 32518
Vigi 32519
Safety trip for advanced opening 32520
Parts of withdrawable kit
E
1
8
6
1
7
Fixed part (for base) 3P/4P 32532
Moving part (for circuit breaker) 32533
Spare parts
D
B
1
1
5
6
3
3
100 identifcation labels 29314
Battery for STR43ME or STR53UE 32434
Toggle extension (replacement) 32553
Additional toggle extension 32595
Bag of screws 32552
Catalogue numbers

F-30
Accessories (cont.)
Compact NS400/630 (cont.)
Individual enclosures
Sheet-metal enclosure IP54 for
E
2
4
0
8
9
Compact NS400 with standard rotary handle 31219
Compact NS400 with red, yellow rotary handle 31220
Compact NS630 and Vigi NS400/630 with standard rotary handle 31221
Compact NS630 and Vigi NS400/630 with red, yellow rotary handle 31222
Insulating enclosure IP55 for
E
2
4
0
9
0
Compact NS400 and NS630 32665
Vigicompact NS400/630 32666
Visible break disconnect function
See chapter "Interpact INV (visible break)" and the associated accessories.
Visible break disconnection function associated with fxed front-connected/rear-connected Compact NS (for "tarif vert/tarif jaune"
connection).
Test
Test kits
E
2
1
2
9
0
Mini test kit for STR trip units 43362
E
3
6
2
7
1
Portable test kit for STR trip units 34547
Spare test plug for portable test kit 34547 34503
Wiring kit (spare part) 34546
Catalogue numbers

F-31
Catalogue numbers
Compact NS100/160N/H 1P/2P
With thermal-magnetic trip unit TM-D
E
2
6
4
0
4
Compact NS100N AC/DC
Rating 1P 1d (Icu =50 kA 250 V DC) 2P 2d (Icu =85 kA 250 V DC/1P - 500 V DC/2P)
TM16D 29585 29605
TM20D 29588 29608
TM25D 29584 29604
TM30D 29587 29607
TM40D 29583 29603
TM50D 29586 29606
TM63D 29582 29602
TM80D 29581 29601
TM100D 29580 29600
Compact NS160N AC/DC
E
3
0
8
4
0
Rating 1P 1d (Icu =50 kA 250 V DC) 2P 2d (Icu =100 kA 250 V DC/1P - 500 V DC/2P)
TM125D 30581 30601
TM160D 30580 30600
Compact NS100H AC/DC
Rating 1P 1d (Icu =85 kA 250 V DC) 2P 2d (Icu =100 kA 250 V DC/1P - 500 V DC/2P)
TM16D 29595 29615
TM20D 29598 29618
TM25D 29594 29614
TM30D 29597 29617
TM40D 29593 29613
TM50D 29596 29616
TM63D 29592 29612
TM80D 29591 29611
TM100D 29590 29610
Compact NS160H AC/DC
Rating 1P 1d (Icu =85 kA 250 V DC) 2P 2d (Icu =100 kA 250 V DC/1P - 500 V DC/2P)
TM125D 30590 30611
TM160D 30589 30610
Compact NS100/160/250DC 3P/4P
Basic frame
D
B
1
1
5
9
1
0
(Icu =100 kA 250 V DC/1P - 500 V DC/ 2P - 750 V DC/3P)
3P 4P
NS100DC 29016 29017
NS160DC 30416 30417
NS250DC 31416 31417
+ Trip unit
D
B
1
1
5
9
0
9
Rating 3P 3d 4P 4d
Standard protection: trip unit TM-D/DC
TM16D 29035 29055
TM25D 29034 29054
TM32D 29037 29057
TM40D 29033 29053
TM50D 29036 29056
TM63D 29032 29052
TM80DC 29029 29049
TM100DC 29028 29048
TM125DC 30436 30446
TM160DC 30435 30445
TM200DC 31446 31456
TM250DC 31445 31455
Type G protection: trip unit TM-G
TM16G 29155 29165
TM25G 29154 29164
TM40G 29153 29163
TM63G 29152 29162
Compact NS400/630DC with trip unit MP
D
B
1
1
5
9
0
8
3P 4P
Trip unit MP1
Compact NS400DC 32742 32745
Compact NS630DC, 45 mm pitch 32942 32945
Trip unit MP2
Compact NS400DC 32743 32746
Compact NS630DC, 45 mm pitch 32943 32946
Trip unit MP3
Compact NS630DC, 45 mm pitch 32944 32947
ii
3
4 5
0
I
I
9
I
I
S 22
05%I 0 z t
3
4 5
0
I
I
9
I
I
S 22
05%I 0 z t
2 SE
I
I



2 SE
I
I



Compact NS100 to NS630
xed/FC for direct current
Choice of device

F-32
Catalogue numbers
Special connection accessories for parallel or series connection NS100-250 NS400-630
D
B
1
0
4
7
3
1
Connection accessories for parallel or series connection
of 2 poles
(1)
1 connection plate equipped
with heat sink +1 interphase
barrier
(2)
29498 32868
(1) Series connection: 2 poles = 1 connection plate.
3 poles = 2 connection plates.
4 poles = 3 connection plates.
Parallel connection: 2 poles = 2 connection plates.
3 poles = 1 set of 2 connection plates (29499).
2 x 2 poles = 4 connection plates.
(2) These connection accessories come with an interphase barrier.
Connection plates for parallel connection of 3 poles 1 set of 2 connection plates 29499
(3)
Connection plates for parallel connection of 4 poles
(3) (3)
1P short terminal shields 1 pair 29320
2P short terminal shields 2 pairs 2 x 29320
3P terminal shields for series connection of poles 1 set 29495 32865
4P terminal shields for series connection of poles 1 set 29496 32866
4P terminal shields for parallel connection of poles (2P/4P) 1 set 29497 32867
(3) To be made by the customer.
Compact NS100 to NS630
fxed/FCfordirectcurrent
Parallel or series connection accessories

F-33
Catalogue numbers
Connection accessories (Cu or Al) NS100-250 NS400-630
Rear connections
E
1
8
5
7
9
2 short 29235 32475
2 long 29236 32476
Bare cable connectors
E
1
8
8
7
2
Snap-on, for cable: 1.5 to 95 mm
2
; y 160 A Set of 2 29246
Set of 3 29242
Set of 4 29243
25 to 95 mm
2
; y 250 A Set of 2 29255
Set of 3 29227
Set of 4 29228
120 to 185 mm
2
; y 250 A Set of 2 29247
Set of 3 29259
Set of 4 29260
E
2
2
0
4
0
For 1 cable from 35 to 300 mm
2
Set of 3 32479
Set of 4 32480
For 2 cables from 35 to 240 mm
2
Set of 3 32481
E
2
2
0
4
1
Set of 4 32482
Voltage measurement input for bare cable connector
185 mm
2
or 1 x 300 mm
2
or 2 x 240 mm
2
Set of 2 29348 29348
Terminalextensions
D
B
1
0
4
8
8
5
Right-angle terminal extensions Set of 2 29250
Set of 3 29261 32484
Set of 4 29262 32485
D
B
1
0
4
8
8
4Straight terminal extensions Set of 2 29251
Set of 3 29263
Set of 4 29264
D
B
1
0
4
8
0
6
Edgewise pads Set of 3 32486
Set of 4 32487
Crimp lugs for copper cable (supplied with 2 or 3 interphase barriers)
E
1
8
6
0
2
For cable 120 mm
2
Set of 3 29252
Set of 4 29256
For cable 150 mm
2
Set of 3 29253
Set of 4 29257
For cable 185 mm
2
Set of 3 29254
Set of 4 29258
For cable 240 mm
2
Set of 3 32500
Set of 4 32501
For cable 300 mm
2
Set of 3 32502
Set of 4 32503
Crimp lugs for aluminium cable (supplied with 2 or 3 interphase barriers)
E
3
0
9
0
8For cable 150 mm
2
Set of 3 29504
Set of 4 29505
For cable 185 mm
2
Set of 3 29506
Set of 4 29507
For cable 240 mm
2
Set of 3 32504
Set of 4 32505
For cable 300 mm
2
Set of 3 32506
Set of 4 32507
Barriers
D
B
1
1
5
9
2
0

Interphase barriers Set of 6 29329 32570
Compact NS100 to NS630
fxed/FCfordirectcurrent
Connection accessories

F-34
Catalogue numbers
Electricalauxiliaries NS100-630
Auxiliarycontacts(changeover)
E
1
8
6
0
8
OF or SD or SDE or SDV 29450
OF or SD or SDE or SDV low level 29452
SDE adapter for trip unit TM or MA 29451
Voltage releases
E
1
8
6
0
9
AC Voltage MX MN
24 V 50/60 Hz 29384 29404
48 V 50/60 Hz 29385 29405
110-130 V 50/60 Hz 29386 29406
220-240 V 50/60 Hz
208-277 V 60 Hz
29387 29407
380-415 V 50 Hz
440-480 V 60 Hz
29388 29408
525 V 50 Hz - 600 V 60 Hz 29389 29409
DC Voltage MX MN
12 V 29382 29402
24 V 29390 29410
30 V 29391 29411
48 V 29392 29412
60 V 29383 29403
125 V 29393 29413
250 V 29394 29414
MN 48 V 50/60 Hz with time delay 29420
composed of: MN 48 V DC 29412
Delay unit 48 V 50/60 Hz 29426
MN 220-240 V 50/60 Hz with time delay 29422
composed of: MN 250 V DC 29414
Delay unit of 220-240 V 50/60 Hz 29427
Motor mechanism modules with SDE adapter NS100-250 NS400-630
D
B
1
1
5
9
1
9
AC Voltage MT100/160 MT400
48-60 V 50/60 Hz 29440 32639
110-130 V 50/60 Hz 29433 32640
220-240 V 50/60 Hz
208-277 V 60 Hz
29434 32641
380-415 V 50/60 Hz 29435 32642
440-480 V 60 Hz 32647
Voltage MT250 MT630
48-60 V 50/60 Hz 31548 32839
110-130 V 50/60 Hz 31540 32840
220-240 V 50/60 Hz
208-277 V 60 Hz
31541 32841
380-415 V 50/60 Hz 31542 32842
440-480 V 60 Hz 32847
DC Voltage MT100/160 MT400
24-30 V 29436 32643
48-60 V 29437 32644
110-130 V 29438 32645
250 V 29439 32646
Voltage MT250 MT630
24-30 V 31543 32843
48-60 V 31544 32844
110-130 V 31545 32845
250 V 31546 32846
Operations counter 32648
1
I
h N O
O F
a a t
1
I
h N O
O F
a a t
Compact NS100 to NS630
fxed/FCfordirectcurrent
Electrical auxiliaries

F-35
Catalogue numbers
LV installation control and monitoring (Digipact) NS100-250 NS400-630
CommunicatingauxiliarycontactsforCompactNScircuitbreakers3P/4P
E
3
8
7
2
3
OF, SD and SDE communicating auxiliary contacts
(1)
29453 32551
(1) For NS100-250, the SDE adapter for thermal-magnetic trip units is included.
Communicatingconnected/disconnectedpositionindicationcontactsforCompactNScircuitbreakers
E
3
8
7
2
2
Connected /disconnectedposition indication contacts 29296 29296
Motormechanism+communicatingauxiliarycontactsforCompactNScircuitbreakers
D
B
1
1
5
9
1
9
MT100/160 220-240 V 50/60 Hz +communicating OF, SD, SDE 29441
MT250 220-240 V 50/60 Hz +communicating OF, SD, SDE 31549
MT400 220-240 V 50/60 Hz +communicating OF, SD, SDE 32652
MT630 220-240 V 50/60 Hz +communicating OF, SD, SDE 32848
E
3
8
7
2
4
Rotary handles NS100-250 NS400-630
Direct rotary handles
D
B
1
1
5
9
1
8
Standard black handle 29337 32597
Red handle on yellow front 29339 32599
MCC conversion accessory 29341 32606
CNOMO conversion accessory 29342 32602
Standardextendedrotaryhandle
D
B
1
1
5
9
1
7
Standard extended rotary handle 29338 32598
Red handle on yellow front 29340 32600
Telescopic handle for withdrawable device 29343 32603
Accessories
Indication auxiliary 1 early-break contact 29345 32605
2 early-break contacts 29346 29346
Early-make wiring terminal 29336
Locking NS100-250 NS400-630
Togglelockingdevicefor1to3padlocks
D
B
1
1
5
9
1
3
By removable device 29370 29370
D
B
1
1
5
9
1
6

By fxed device (3P/4P) 29371 32631
Lockingoftherotaryhandle
D
B
1
1
5
9
1
4
Keylock adapter (keylock not included) 29344 32604
Keylock (keylock adapter not included) Ronis 1351B.500 41940 41940
Profalux KS5 B24 D4Z 42888 42888
Lockingofthemotormechanismmodules
D
B
1
1
5
9
1
9
Keylock adapter +Ronis keylock (special) 29449
Keylock adapter (keylock not included) 32649
Keylock (keylock adapter not included) Ronis 1351B.500 41940
Profalux KS5 B24 D4Z 42888
1
I
O O
h F
n / u o
1
I
O O
h F
n / u o
ON
O
OF
ON
O
OF
N
I
O
O F N
I
F
N
I
O
O F N
I
F
h
O
n t
h
O
n t
Compact NS100 to NS630
fxed/FCfordirectcurrent
Monitoring and locking
ON
O
OF

F-36
Catalogue numbers
Interlocking NS100-250 NS400-630
Mechanicalinterlockingforcircuitbreakers3P/4P
E
2
1
2
8
8
With toggles 29354 32614
E
1
8
7
8
0
With rotary handles 29369 32621
Interlockingwithkey(2keylocks/1key)forrotaryhandles3P/4P
D
B
1
1
5
9
1
1
Keylock kit (keylock not included)
(1)
29344 32604
1 set of 2 keylocks
(1 key only, keylock kit not included)
Ronis 1351B.500 41950 41950
Profalux KS5 B24 D4Z 42878 42878
(1) For only 1 device.
Installation accessories NS100-250 NS400-630
Front-panelescutcheons
E
1
8
5
8
9
Toggle 1 to 4P 29315 32556
Rotary handle, motor mechanism module or escutcheon collar, IP405 3P/4P 29317 32558
Togglecover
29319 32560
Sealing accessories 1 to 4P
29375 29375
DIN rail adapter 3P/4P
29305
Plug-in/withdrawableconfgurationaccessories NS100-250 NS400-630
Auxiliaryconnections
E
1
8
5
8
6
1 9-wire fxed connector (for base) 29273 32556
1 9-wire moving connector (for circuit breaker) 29274 29316
1 support for 2 moving connectors 29275 32558
9-wire manual auxiliary connector (fxed + moving) 29272 29318
Plug-in base accessories
E
9
4
5
2
9
Long insulated right angle terminal extension Set of 3 29276 32526
Set of 4 29277 32527
2 IP4 shutters for base 29271 32521
Chassis accessories
Escutcheon collar for toggle 29284 32534
Locking kit (keylock not included) 29286 29286
2 carriage switches (connected/disconnected position indication) 29287 29287
Partsofplug-inkit
D
B
1
1
5
9
1
2
Plug-in base FC/RC 3P 29266 32516
4P 29267 32517
Set of 2 power connections for standard device 29268 32518
Safety trip for advanced opening 29270 32520
Partsofwithdrawablekit
D
B
1
1
5
9
1
5
Fixed part (for base) 3P/4P 29282 32532
Moving part (for circuit breaker) 29283 32533
Spare parts NS100-250 NS400-630
D
B
1
1
5
6
3
3
Toggle extension 32553
10 toggle extensions 29313
Additional toggle extension 32595
Bag of screws 29312 32552
E
1
8
6
2
4
12 snap-in nuts (fxed/FC) M6 for NS100N/H/L 29234
M8 for NS160/250N/H/L 30554
100 identifcation labels 29314 29314
O F
ON I
O F
ON I
Compact NS100 to NS630
fxed/FCfordirectcurrent
Interlocking, installation, plug-in/
withdrawable accessories

F-37
Catalogue numbers
Manual source changeover
Mechanical interlocking
E
2
1
2
8
8
For toggle controlled circuit breakers NS100...250 29354
NS400...630 32614
E
1
8
7
8
0
For rotary handled circuit breakers NS100...250 29369
NS400...630 32621
Key lock interlocking
E
2
3
8
5
1
For rotary handled or remote controlled circuit breakers
2 locks, 1 key Ronis 1351B.500 41950
Profalux KS5 B24 D4Z 42878
Remote controlled source changeover
Plate + IVE
E
3
3
4
1
9
Source normal /source replacement (identical voltages) 24 to 250 V DC 48 to 415 V AC 50/60 Hz
440 V 60 Hz
NS100...250/NS100...250
Plate +IVE
(1)
29351 29350
Plate 29349 29349
IVE 29356 29352
Auxiliary switches 2 OF +2 SDE 4 x 29450 4 x 29450
Spare wiring system (device/IVE) 29365 29365
Back sockets option add: Only long RC
(2) (2)
Plug in base option add: Plug in kit
(2) (2)
NS400...630/NS100...630
Plate +IVE
(1)
32611 32610
Plate 32609 32609
IVE 29356 29352
Auxiliary switches 2 OF +2 SDE 4 x 29450 4 x 29450
Spare wiring system (device/IVE) 29365 29365
Back sockets option add: Only long RC
(2) (2)
Plug in base option add: Plug in kit
(2) (2)
Adaptator kit for NS100...250 1 x 32618 1 x 32618
Control unit option
E
3
3
4
2
0
110/127 V AC 50/60 Hz 220/240 V AC 50/60 Hz 380/415 V AC 50/60 Hz
440 V 60 Hz
ACP +control unit BA
(1)
29470 29471
Plate ACP 29363 29364
Control unit BA 29376 29377
ACP +control unit UA
(1)
29448 29472 29473
Plate ACP 29447 29363 29364
Control unit UA 29446 29378 29380
ACP +control unit UA150
(1)
(communication op ion) 29474 29475
Plate ACP 29363 29364
Control unit UA150 29379 29381
Wiring cable between BA/UA and ACP/IVE
29368 29368
(1) The supply voltages BA/UA control unit, ACP plate, IVE and the remote control must be identical whatever the source changeover type.
(2) See products pages.
Source-changeover systems
for 2 devices
Compact NS100 to NS630

F-38
Catalogue numbers
Connection accessories
Downstream coupling accessories
3P 4P
D
B
1
0
1
0
6
2
Short terminal shields (1 pair) NS100...250/NS100...250 29321 29322
NS400...630/NS400...630 32562 32563
E
5
0
9
9
8
Source normal/source
replacement
NS100...250/
NS100...250
250 A 29358 29359
NS400...630/
NS400...630
630 A 32619 32620
D
B
1
0
1
0
6
3
Long terminal shields (1 pair) NS100...250/NS100...250 29324
NS400...630/NS400...630 32565
Typical composition of remote controlled source changeover
Remote controlled source changeover
E
3
3
4
2
2
1 normal device N (1)
+1 replacement device R (2)
+2 remote controls (3)
+1 plate with interlocking (4) with IVE (5) and its wiring (8)
+2 plug-in kits (if plug-in version)
+1 adaptor kit for NS100...250 plug-in (if NS400...630 wi h NS100...250)
+auxilary switches (6)
2 x (1 OF +1 SDE) for Compact NS100...630
+1 downstream coupling accessory (7) for Compact NS100...630 (option)
+long RC (if back connection)
IVE voltages and remote controls are identical.
Associated control unit
E
3
3
4
2
3
1 source changeover without associated control unit
+1 ACP (9) with BA control unit (10)
Or +1 ACP (9) with UA control unit (11)
Or +1 ACP (9) with UA150 control unit (11)
+extension (12) for remote UA/BA connection on front of switchboard
IVE voltages +remote control +ACP +BA or UA are identical.
Source-changeover systems
for 2 devices (cont.)
Compact NS100 to NS630 (cont.)

F-39
Catalogue numbers
NSA125/160: complete xed/
FC device
NSA160N/E and NSA125/160NA
Compact NSA160N with built-in trip unit
Compact NSA160N (36 kA at 380/415 V)
E
2
1
0
1
6
Rating 3P 3d 4P 4d
TM16D 28239 28259
TM25D 28238 28258
TM32D 28237 28257
TM40D 28236 28256
TM50D 28235 28255
TM63D 28234 28254
TM80D 28233 28253
TM100D 28232 28252
TM125D 28231 28251
TM160D 28230 28250
Compact NSA160E with built-in trip unit
E
2
1
0
1
6
Compact NSA160E (16 kA at 380/415 V)
Rating 3P 3d 4P 4d
TM16D 28209 28229
TM25D 28208 28228
TM32D 28207 28227
TM40D 28206 28226
TM50D 28205 28225
TM63D 28204 28224
TM80D 28203 28223
TM100D 28202 28222
TM125D 28201 28221
TM160D 28200 28220
Compact NSA125/160NA switch
Rating 3P 4P
Compact NSA125NA 28263 28264
Compact NSA160NA 28261 28262

F-40
Accessories
NSA160N/E and NSA125/160NA
Catalogue numbers
Vigi module 0.03/3A
E
9
4
5
1
7
T
R
Bottom connectors 3P 28000
4P 28001
Top connectors 3P 28002
4P 28003
Connection accessories
Long terminal shields (1 pair)
E
1
8
6
0
7
3P 28034
4P 28035
Electrical auxiliaries
Auxiliary contacts (changeover)
E
1
8
6
0
8
OF or SD 29450
OF or SD low level 29452
Voltage releases
E
2
1
3
9
4
AC 50/60 Hz Voltage (V) MX MN
48 28070 28080
110/130 28071 28081
220/240 28072 28082
380/415 28073 28083
440/480 28074 28084
DC Voltage (V) MX MN
24 28075 28085
48 28076 28086
125 28077 28087
250 28078 28088
Rotary handles
Door-mounted rotary control
E
3
1
2
9
3
ON
I
i
r s
O
OF
5
Extended black handle 28059
Red handle on yellow front 28058
Miscellaneous
DIN rail and riser for Multi 9 devices 28041

Order form
Check the applicable and enter the appropriate Communication
square boxes information in the rectangles Communicating Of, SD, SDE or SDV auxiliary contacts 6A-240 V AC Low level
Circuit breaker Quantity Connected/disconnected position indication contacts
Compact type NS100/160/250 Motor mechanism +communicating OF, SD, SDE contacts 220-240 V 50/60 Hz
NS400/630 Indication and measurements
Rating A Auxiliary contact OF, SD or SDE Standard Low level
Circuit breaker N, H SDE adapter (TM trip unit)
Number of poles 1 or 2 Remote operation
Circuit breaker DC Electrical operation Motor mechanism AC DC V
Number of poles 3 or 4 Voltage releases Instantaneous MX AC DC V
Number of poles tripped 3d or 4d MN AC DC V
Fixed device Front conn. Long rear conn. Delayed MN AC DC V
Short rear conn. Rotary handles
Plug-in/withdr. Plug-in Withdrawable Direct Black Red on yellow front
Thermal-magnetic trip unit MCC conversion access. CNOMO conversion access.
Thermal-magnetic
NS100 to 250
TMD rating (1663 A) Extended Black Red on yellow front
TMG rating (1663 A) Telescopic handle for withdrawable device
TMDC rating (80250 A) Indication auxiliary 1 early-break switch 2 early-break switches
Magnetic only
NS400/630
MP1 (NS400/630) Wiring accessory for early-make switches
MP2 (NS400/630) Locking
MP3 (NS630) Toggle (1 to 3 padlocks) Removable Fixed
Special connection accessories for parallel or
series connection
Rotary handle Keylock adapter (keylock not included)
Keylock Ronis 1351B.500 Profalux KS5 B24 D4Z
Series
connection
2 poles (1 connection plate) Motor mechanism Keylock adapter +Keylock Ronis (special) NS100/250
3 poles (2 connection plates) Keylock adapter (keylock not included) NS400/630
4 poles (3 connection plates) Keylock Ronis 1351B.500 Profalux KS5 B24 D4Z
Parallel
connection
2 poles (2 connection plates) Interlocking
3 poles (NS100 to 250,
1 set of 2 connection plates)
Mechanical Toggle Rotary handle
By key (2 Keylocks, 1 key) Keylock adapter (keylock not included)
2 x 2 poles (4 connection plates) For rotary handle Keylock Ronis 1351B.500 Profalux KS5 B24 D4Z
Special terminal shields for parallel or series
connection
Installation accessories
Front-panel escutcheon Toggle
1P short 1 pair Rotary handle, motor mechanism, escutcheon collar; IP405
2P short 2 x 1 pair (1P) Toggle cover
3P short for series connection of poles 1 set Sealing accessories
4P short for series connection of poles 1 set DIN rail adapter NS100/250
4P short for parallel connectio
of poles (2P/4P)
1 set Plug-in / Drawout confguration accessories
Auxiliary connections 1 automatic connector fxed part with 9 wires (for base)
Connection 1 auto. conn. moving part with 9 wires (for circuit breaker )
NS100/250
connectors
Snap-on 1.5
v
to 95
v
(<160 A) 1 support for 3 automatic connector moving parts
Snap-on 25
v
to 95
v
(<250 A) 9-wire manual auxiliary connector (fxed + moving)
Snap-on 120
v
to 185
v
(<250 A) Plug-in base accessories Long insulated terminals Set of 3 Set of 4
NS400/630
connectors
1 cable 35
v
to 300
v
2 IP4 shutters for base
2 cables 35
v
to 240
v
Chassis accessories Escutcheon collar Toggle Vigi
Voltage
measurement input
For bare cable
connector
NS100/250 y 185
v
Locking kit (keylock not included)
2 carriage switches (conn./disconnected position indication)
For bare cable
connector
NS400/630 Parts of plug-in Plug-in base FC/RC 2P 3P 4P
Set of 2 power connec ions Standard Vigi
Right-angle terminal extensions Safety trip for advanced opening
Straight extensions NS100/250 For 3P/4P chassis Moving part
Edgewise extensions NS400/630 Fixed part
Cu cable lugs NS100/250 120
v
150
v
185
v
NS400/630 240
v
300
v
Al cable lugs NS100/250 150
v
185
v
NS400/630 240
v
300
v
Interface barriers Set of 6
Compact NS100 to NS630 DC
Circuit breakers
F-41

F-42
Oder form
Compact NS100 to NS630
Circuit breakers and switch-
disconnectors
To indicate your choices, check the applicable square boxes
and enter the appropriate information in the rectangles
Circuit breaker or switch-disconnector
Compact type NS100/160/250
NS400/630
Rating A
Circuit breaker N, H, L
Switch-disconnector NA
Number of poles 2, 3 or 4
Number of poles tripped 2d, 3d, 3dN/2 or 4d
Fixed device Front connections Long rear conn.
Short rear conn. Mixed rear conn.
Plug-in/withdr. Plug-in Withdrawable
Earth-leakage protection ME, MH, MB, MHM
Voltage V
4p MB option on 3P NS
Thermal-magnetic or electronic trip unit
Termal-mag. TMD rating (16 ... 250 A)
TMD rating (16 ... 63 A)
MA rating (2.5 ... 220 A)
Electronic STR22 SE GE ME
STR23 SE SV
STR53 (basic) UE F SV F
STR53UE FT FI FTI
ZSI wiring
Option T (rating 150.. 630 A) A
STR43ME F FI
Option STDAM 110/240 V AC/DC
24/48 V AC/24/72 V DC
COM wiring
Spare battery for STR43 and STR53
Connection
Rear-connection kit Short Mixed
Plug-in kit Compact Vigicompact
Withdrawable kit Compact Vigicompact
Long terminal-shield kit for plug-in or withdr. NS400/630
Interphase-barrier kit for plug-in or withdr. NS400/630
NS100/250 connectors Snap-on 1 5
v
to 95
v
(<160 A)
Snap-on 10
v
to 185
v
(<250 A)
Distribution 6 x 1.5
v
to 35
v
NS400/630 connectors 1 cable 35
v
to 300
v
2 cables 35
v
to 240
v
Right-angle terminal extensions
Straight extensions NS100/250
Edgewise extensions NS400/630
Spreader NS100/250 (one piece) (45 mm)
NS400/630 (52.5 mm) (70 mm)
Cu cable lugs NS100/250 120
v
150
v
185
v
NS400/630 240
v
300
v
AI cable lugs NS100/250 150
v
185
v
NS400/630 240
v
300
v
Voltage measurement for lugs NS100/250 y 185
v
Input for connector for lugs NS400/630
Terminal shields NS100/250 Short Long
NS400/630 Short Long
Long for 52 5 mm spreaders
Interphase barriers Set of 6
Insulation kit >600V Without spreaders
NS400/630 With 52.5 mm spreaders
2 insulating NS100/250
screens: NS400/630 525 pitch 70 pitch
Communication
Commmunication OF, SD, SDE or SDV auxiliary contacts
Connected/disconnected position indication contacts
Motor mechanism + communicating OF, SD, SDE contacts 220/240 V 50/60 Hz
Indication and measurement
Ammeter module standard 3P 4P
I max 3P
Current-transformer module 3P 4P
Insulation-monitoring module 3P 4P
Voltage-presence indicator
Auxiliary contact OF, SD, SDE, or SDV Standard Low level
SDE adapter (TM or MA trip units)
Remote operation
Electrical operation Motor mechanism AC DC V
Voltage releases Instantaneous MX AC DC V
MN AC DC V
Delayed MN AC DC V
Rotary handles
Direct Black Red and yellow front
MCC conversion access. CNOMO conversion access.
Extended Black Red and yellow front
Telescopic handle for withdrawable device
Indication auxiliary 1 early-break switch 2 early-make switches
Wiring accessory for early-make switches
Locking
Toggle (1 to 3 padlocks) Removable Fixed
Rotary handle Keylock adapter (Keylock not included)
Keylocks Ronis 1351B 500 Profalux KS5 B24 D4Z
Motor mechanism Keylock adapter +Keylock Ronis (special) NS100/250
Keylock adapter (Keylock not included) NS400/630
Keylocks Ronis 1351B 500 Profalux KS5 B24 D4Z
Interlocking
Mechanical Toggle operated Rotary Handle
By key (2 keylocks, 1 key) Locking kit without locks
for rotary handle Keylocks Ronis 1351B 500 Profalux KS5 B24 D4Z
Intallation accessories
Front-panel escutcheon Toggle
Rotary handle, motor mechanism, escutcheon collar; IP40
Vigi module or ammeter IP40 Vigi module
Toggle cover
Sealing accessories
DIN rail adapter NS100/250
Plug-in / withdrawable confguration accessories
Auxiliary connections 1 automatic connector fxed part with 9 wires (for base)
1 auto. conn. moving part with 9 wires (for circuit breaker)
1 support for 3 automatic connector moving parts
9-wire manual auxiliary connector (fxed + moving)
Plug-in base accessories Long insulated terminals Set of 3 Set of 4
2 IP4 shutters for base
Chassis accessories Escutcheon collar Toggle Vigi
Locking kit (keylock not included)
2 carriage switches (conn./disconnected position indication)
Parts or plug-in Plug-in base FC/RC 2P 3P 4P
Withdrawable kits Set of two power connections Standard Vigi
Safety trip for advanced opening
For 3P/4P chassis Moving part
Fixed part

F-43
Oder form
Compact NS630b to NS3200
Circuit breakers and switch-
disconnectors
Name of customer: ...................................................................

Address for delivery: ................................................................
Requested delivery date: .........................................................
Customer order no.: .................................................................
To indicate your choices, check the applicable square boxes
and enter the appropriate information in the rectangles
Circuit breaker or switch-disconnector
Compact type NS630b to NS1600
NS1600b to NS3200
Rating A
Circuit breaker N, H, L, LB
Switch-disconnector NA
Number of poles 3 or 4
Device NS630b/3200 Fixed
NS630b/1600 Withdr. with chassis
Withdr. without chassis
(moving part only)
Chassis alone without connections
Micrologic control unit
Basic protection 2.0 5.0
A - ammeter
2.0 5.0 6.0 7.0
P - power 5.0 6.0 7.0
AD - external power-supply module V
ENVT - External Neutral Voltage Temp. (3P + N and Micrologic P)
TCE - external sensor (CT) for neutral protection
Rectangular sensor NS630b/1600 280 x 115 mm
for earth-leakage protection NS 1600b/3200 470 x 160 mm
TCW - external sensor for SGR protection
LR - long-time rating plug Standard 0.4 to 1 Ir
Low setting 0.4 to 0.8 Ir
Hight setting 0.8 to 1 Ir
LT OFF
Communication
COM module Jbus/Modbus Manual operation
Electrical operation
Digipact Manual operation
Electrical operation
Device Chassis
Eco COM Jbus/Modbus Device Chassis
(1)
module (1) for drawout devices, please order
1 JBUS/ModBus chassis COM module
NS630b/1600 connection
Horizontal rear connections Top Bottom
Vertical rear connections Top Bottom
Front connections Top Bottom
4x240
v
bare cable connectors+shields NS - FC fxed
Long connection shields NS - FC fxed
Vertical-connection adapters NS - FC fxed, withdr.
Cable-lug adapters NS - FC fxed, withdr.
Arc chute screen NS - FC fxed
Interphase barriers NS - FC fxed, withdrawable
Spreaders NS - FC fxed, withdrawable
NS 1600b/3200 connection
Front connections NS - FC fxed
Vertical connection adaptor optional for NS1600b/2500
(standard for NS3200)
Micrologic control unit functions:
2.0: basic protection (long time + inst.)
5.0: selective protection (long time + short time + inst.)
6.0: selective + earth-fault protection
(long time + short time + inst. + earth-fault)
7.0: selective + earth-leakage protection
(long time + short time + inst. + earth-leakage)
Indication contacts
NS630b/3200 SD trip indication (maximum 1) (only for manually operated devices)
6 A-240 V AC qty Low level qty
SDE fault-trip indication (maximum 1)
(SDE integrated in electrically operated devices)
6 A-240 V AC qty Low level qty
OF ON/OFF indication contacts (maximum 3)
6 A-240 V AC qty Low level qty
NS630b/1600 Carriage switches
(possible combinations: 3 CE, 2 CD, 1 CT)
CE - "connected" position 6 A-240 V AC qty Low level qty
CD - "disconnected" position 6 A-240 V AC qty Low level qty
CT - "test" position 6 A-240 V AC qty Low level qty
Programmable contacts (630b - 1600)
M6C kit for manually Compact
Auxiliary terminals for chassis alone Jumpers (set of 10)
3-wire terminal (30 parts) 6-wire terminal (10 parts)
Remote operation
Electrical operation Standard Communicating
(NS630b/1600) Power supply AC DC V
Voltage releases MX AC DC V
MN AC DC V
MN delay unit Ajustable Non ajustable
Rotary handles for NS630b/1600 fxed and withdrawable device
Direct Black Red on yellow front
CNOMO conversion access.
Extended Black Red on yellow front
Telescopic handle for withdrawable device
Indication auxiliary 6 A-240 V AC 2 early-make switches
2 early-make switches
Locking
Toggle (1 to 3 padlocks) Removable system Fixed system
Rotary handle OFF position ON and OFF positions
using a keylock Ronis 1351B.500 Profalux KS5 B24 D4Z
(NS630b/1600) Keylock kit (without keylock)
For electrically VBP - ON/OFF pushbutton locking
operated devices (by transparent cover +padlocks
(NS630b/1600) OFF position locking:
VCPO - by padlocks
VSPO - by keylocks:
Keylock kit (w/o keylock) Profalux Ronis
1 keylock Profalux Ronis
2 identical keylocks, 1 key Profalux Ronis
Chassis locking in "disconnected" position:
VSPD - by keylocks Keylock kit (w/o keylock) Profalux Ronis
Kirk Castell
1 keylock Profalux Ronis
2 identical keylocks, 1 key Profalux Ronis
2 keylocks, different keys Profalux Ronis
Optional connected/disconnected/test position locking
VPEC - door interlock On right-hand side of chassis
On left-hand side of chassis
VPOC - racking interlock
VDC - mismatch protection
Accessories
VO - safety shutters on chassis NS - withdrawable as standard
CDM - mechanical operation counter
CDP - escutcheon
CP - transparent cover for escutcheon
OP - blanking plate for escutcheon
Mounting brackets for fxed NS for mounting on horizontal plane
Test kits Mini test kit Portable test kit

F-44
Notes


Schneider Electric Industries SAS
89, boulevard Franklin Roosevelt
F - 92505 Rueil Malmaison Cedex (France)
Tel : +33 (0)1 41 29 85 00
http://www.schneider-electric.com
http://www.schneider-electric.co
As standards, specifcations and designs change from time to time, please ask for confrmation
of the information given in this publication.
This document has been printed on ecological paper.
Design: Schneider Electric
Photos: Schneider Electric
Printed: Imprimerie du Pont de Claix/J PF - Made in France
07-2008 LVPED208012EN
A
R
T
9
6
0
2
8
6

2
0
0
8

-

S
c
h
n
e
i
d
e
r

E
l
e
c
t
r
i
c

-

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
0
550E0000.indd 4 22/07/2008 17:05:20